Inkjet MFC

SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL: MFC5890CN
MFC5895CW

Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work.

Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times.

August 2010
SM-FAX097
8CAH17(4)
Confidential
© Copyright Brother 2010
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any
form or by any means without permission in writing
from the publisher.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Trademarks
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International Corporation.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Presto! PageManager is a registered trademark of NewSoft Technology Corporation.
Microdrive is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
CompactFlash is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
Memory Stick is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
SanDisk is a licensee of the SD and miniSD trademarks.
xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fujifilm Co. Ltd., Toshiba Corporation and Olympus Optical Co. Ltd.
PictBridge is a trademark.
Memory Stick Pro, Memory Stick Pro Duo, Memory Stick Duo and MagicGate are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
BROADCOM, SecureEasySetup and the SecureEasySetup logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Broadcom Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
Wi-Fi, WPA and WPA2 are registered trademarks and Wi-Fi Protected Setup is a trademark of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
FaceFilter Studio is a trademark of Reallusion, Inc.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement
specific to its proprietary programs.
All other brand and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.

Confidential
Preface

This Service Manual is intended for use by service personnel and details the specifications,
construction, theory of operation, and maintenance for the Brother machines noted on the front
cover. It includes information required for troubleshooting and service--disassembly,
reassembly, and lubrication--so that service personnel will be able to understand equipment
function, repair the equipment in a timely manner and order spare parts as necessary.
To perform appropriate maintenance so that the machine is always in the best possible
condition for the customer, service personnel must adequately understand and apply this
manual.

The table below shows the functional comparison between the models covered by this manual.

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

RAM 64 MB 64 MB
LCD (with backlight) 3.3-inch wide color 3.3-inch wide color
Touch panel --- ---
Wired LAN √ √
Wireless LAN (WLAN PCB) --- √
PhotoCapture Center √ √
PictBridge/USB flash memory drive √ √
Movable platen --- ---
Slide tray --- ---
ADF √ √
High-yield ink cartridge sensor --- ---
Ink cartridge detection sensors √ √
Ink empty sensors √ √
Handset (Hook switch PCB) --- ---
Duplex printing --- ---
Backup battery √ √

This manual describes the models and their versions destined for major countries. The specifications and
functions are subject to change depending upon each destination.

i Confidential
How this manual is organized
This manual is made up of nine chapters and appendices.

CHAPTER 1 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Contains external views and names of components and describes their functions. Information
about the keys on the control panel is included to help you check operation or make
adjustments.

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS
Lists the specifications of each model, which enables you to make a comparison of different
models.

CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION

Gives an overview of the scanning and printing mechanisms as well as the sensors, actuators,
and control electronics. It aids in understanding the basic principles of operation as well as
locating defects for troubleshooting.

CHAPTER 4 ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Details error messages and codes that the incorporated self-diagnostic functions display if any
error or malfunction occurs. If any error message appears, refer to this chapter to find which
components should be checked or replaced.
The latter half of this chapter provides sample problems that could occur in the main sections of
the machine and related troubleshooting procedures. This will help service personnel pinpoint
and repair defective components.

CHAPTER 5 HANDLING DATA HELD IN THE MACHINE PRIOR TO

REPAIR
Describes how to handle data held in the machine to be repaired.
At the user site, if the machine cannot print FAX data received and left in the machine due to
the printing mechanism defective, the service personnel should instruct the end user to follow
the transfer procedure given in this chapter to transfer the FAX data to another machine before
sending the machine for repair.
At the service site, the service personnel should back up the machine information and user
setting information held in the machine into an external memory for restoration after repair,
using the backup procedure given in this chapter.

CHAPTER 6 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND LUBRICATION

Details procedures for disassembling and reassembling the machine together with related notes.
The disassembly order flow provided enables you to see at a glance the quickest way to get to
component(s) involved.
At the start of a disassembly job, you check the disassembly order flow that guides you through
a shortcut to the target components.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points to which the specified
lubricants should be applied during reassembly jobs.

ii Confidential
CHAPTER 7 ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT
Details adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the head/carriage unit, main
PCB and some other parts have been replaced.

CHAPTER 8 CLEANING
Provides cleaning procedures not covered by the User's Guide. Before starting any repair work,
clean the machine as it may solve the problem concerned.

CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE MODE

Describes the maintenance mode which is exclusively designed for the purpose of checks,
settings and adjustments of the machine using the keys on the control panel.
In the maintenance mode, you can update memory (EEPROM: electrically erasable
programmable read-only memory) contents for optimizing the drive conditions of the head/
carriage unit or the paper feed roller and paper ejection roller in the engine unit, if those units
have been replaced, or for setting the CIS scanner area, for example. You can also customize
the EEPROM according to the shipment destination of the machine concerned. In addition, you
can perform operational checks of the LCD, control panel PCB or sensors, perform a print test,
display the log information or error codes, and modify firmware switches (WSW).

Appendix 1 Reading Labels

Shows the location of labels put on some parts and describes the coding information for serial
number and head property data.

Appendix 2 Firmware Installation

Provides instructions on how to change firmware stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB or
load firmware to a new main PCB from the host PC.

Appendix 3 EEPROM Customizing Codes

Provides instructions on how to set up the EEPROM customizing codes for the various
preferences exclusively designed for each destination. The specified customizing code is stored
in the EEPROM mounted on the main PCB. If the main PCB is replaced, therefore, you need to
set up the proper customizing code with the machine in the maintenance mode.
Customizing codes customize firmware for individual models, enabling the common firmware
to be used for various models. A list of EEPROM customizing codes comes with the firmware
data provided by Brother Industries.

Appendix 4 Firmware Switches (WSW)

Describes the functions of the firmware switches, which can be divided into two groups: one is
for customizing preferences designed for the shipping destination (as described in Appendix 3)
and the other is for modifying preferences that match the machine to the environmental
conditions. Use the latter group if the machine malfunctions due to mismatching.

Appendix 5 Wiring Diagrams

Provides the wiring diagrams that help you understand the connections between PCBs.

iii Confidential
Appendix 6 Circuit Diagrams
Provides the circuit diagrams of the MJ PCB and power supply PCB.

Appendix 7 Deletion of User Setting Information

Provides instructions on how to delete user setting information recorded in the machine.

iv Confidential
 SAFETY INFORMATION

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injuries.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicate a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property or loss of product functionality.

Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about
how the operation works with other features.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine.

v Confidential
vi Confidential
vii Confidential
viii Confidential
ix Confidential
x Confidential
xi Confidential
xii Confidential
xiii Confidential
 CHAPTER 1
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

Confidential
 CHAPTER 1 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

This chapter contains external views and names of components and describes their functions.
Information about the keys on the control panel is included to help you check operation or make
adjustments.

CONTENTS

1.1 OUTLINE ................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 CONTROL PANEL ................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 1-6

Confidential
1.1 OUTLINE

Front view

(1) ADF & document cover ASSY

(2) Control panel

(9) Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

(3) Ink cartridge cover

(4) Media slots for

PhotoCapture Center
(5) Paper tray

(6) Port for PictBridge /

USB flash memory drive

(8) External telephone

line jack

(7) Telephone line jack

(frontview)

1-1 Confidential
 Back view

(12) LAN cable connector (11) USB interface connector

LAN USB

(10) Jam clear cover

(backview)

No. Name Description

ADF: Load documents (originals) here. Documents
will be fed into the machine, page by page.
(1) ADF & document cover ASSY
Document cover: Open to place the document
(original) on the scanner glass.
Use the keys to operate the machine. The liquid crystal
(2) Control panel
display (LCD) shows the machine operation status.
(3) Ink cartridge cover Open to replace ink cartridges.
(4) Media slots for PhotoCapture Center Insert a memory card here.
Load paper here. Paper will be fed into the machine,
(5) Paper tray
sheet by sheet.
Connect a digital camera (with PictBridge) to this
Port for PictBridge / USB flash
(6) connector using the USB cable.
memory drive
Insert a USB flash memory drive here.
(7) Telephone line jack Plug in the modular plug on the telephone line here.
Plug in the modular plug on the external telephone line
(8) External telephone line jack
here.
(9) Scanner cover (Scanner unit) Open to remove jammed paper.
(10) Jam clear cover Open to remove paper jammed inside the machine.
(11) USB interface connector Connect the USB cable here.
(12) LAN cable connector Connect the LAN cable here.

1-2 Confidential
1.2 CONTROL PANEL

10 9 8 7 6

1 2 3 4 5

1-3 Confidential
1-4 Confidential
1-5 Confidential
1.3 COMPONENTS

The machine consists of the following major components:

Control panel ASSY

ADF & document cover

ASSY

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Wire spring
Upper cover
Speaker

Scanner cover damper Side cover R

Scanner cover
support
Head/carriage unit
Maintenance unit

MJ side cover
Ink refill ASSY
Side cover L
Engine unit
Registration sensor Main PCB ASSY
PCB
PF encoder PCB
Flushing box

MJ PCB Ink absorber box

Lower cover

Ink cartridge cover

MJ/PS shield unit

Media module cover

Front cover
WLAN
PCB*
Power supply PCB
Paper tray ASSY

Jam clear cover

Inner back cover
(COMPONENTS_BHL9_MFC5890CN)

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

1-6 Confidential
 CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS

Confidential
 CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter lists the specifications of each model, which enables you to make a comparison of
different models.

CONTENTS

2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 Media Specifications.................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Paper Handling.......................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 LCD/LED/Panel ......................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Memory ..................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.5 Security ..................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.6 Interface .................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.7 Others........................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2 TELEPHONE.......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Volume ...................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Quick/Auto Dials........................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.3 Tel Service................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.4 Message Center ........................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.5 List/Report ................................................................................................. 2-6
2.3 FAX.........................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.1 Sending ..................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 Receiving................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.3 PC FAX...................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4 PRINTER................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.5 COPY ..................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6 SCANNER .............................................................................................................. 2-11
2.7 PHOTO CAPTURE................................................................................................. 2-12
2.7.1 PictBridge .................................................................................................. 2-13
2.8 SOFTWARE ........................................................................................................... 2-13
2.9 NETWORK ............................................................................................................. 2-14
2.9.1 Wired ......................................................................................................... 2-14
2.9.2 Wireless..................................................................................................... 2-15
2.10 SUPPLIES/OPTIONS ............................................................................................. 2-16
2.11 SERVICE INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 2-16

Confidential
2.12 PAPER.................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.12.1 Paper Specifications.................................................................................. 2-17
2.12.2 Printable Area............................................................................................ 2-20

Language List .................................................................................................................. 2-21

ITU-T Test Chart #1 ......................................................................................................... 2-22
Brother Chart ................................................................................................................... 2-23

Confidential
2.1 GENERAL

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Technology Inkjet
Print Head 94 nozzles/line, 5 lines
Variable Dot Print Yes (3 sizes)
BK: 4 pl
Minimum Droplet Size
CMY: 1.5 pl
Scanning Method CIS
CPU Speed RISC 192 MHz
Backup Clock Yes
Simultaneous Operation Yes
U.S.A. Yes (Letter size)
Demo Europe N/A
Sheet
Asia/
N/A
Oceania
U.S.A. FAX + COPY (Print + LCD demo)
Panel Key Europe N/A
Demo
for Demo
Asia/
N/A
Oceania
U.S.A. Yes
LCD Europe N/A
Demo
Asia/
N/A
Oceania
Test Print Print Quality & Alignment Check Sheet (by pressing the Ink key.)

2-1 Confidential
2.1.1 Media Specifications
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
A3, A4, LGR, LTR, LGL, EXE, B4 (JIS), B5 (JIS), A5, A6, Photo (102 x 152 mm/4 x 6 inches),
Indexcard (127 x 203 mm/5 x 8 inches), Photo-L (89 x 127 mm/3.5 x 5 inches),
Standard Tray Photo-2L (127 x 178 mm/5 x 7 inches), Post Card 1 (100 x 148 mm/3.9 x 5.8 inches),
Post Card 2 (Double) (148 x 200 mm/5.8 x 7.9 inches), C5 Envelope, Com-10,
DL Envelope, Monarch, JE4 Envelope
Photo Tray N/A
Media
Sizes Lower Tray N/A
Duplex Print N/A
ADF
148/148 mm to 215.9/355.6 mm (5.8/5.8 inches to 8.5/14.0 inches)
(width/length)
Scanner Glass
Up to 215.9/297 mm (up to 8.5/11.7 inches)
(width/length)
Standard Tray 64-220 g/m2 (17-58 lb.)
Photo Tray N/A
Media
Lower Tray N/A
Weights
Duplex Print N/A
ADF 64-90 g/m2 (17-24 lb.)
Standard Tray Plain, Inkjet, Glossy (cast/resin coated), Transparency
Photo Tray N/A
Media
Lower Tray N/A
Types
Duplex Print N/A
ADF Plain

2.1.2 Paper Handling

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
2
Standard Tray 150 (80 g/m )

Paper Input Photo Tray N/A

(sheets) Lower Tray N/A
ADF 50 (90 g/m2)
Output Paper Capacity
50 (80 g/m2)
(sheets)

2-2 Confidential
2.1.3 LCD/LED/Panel
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Type & Size 3.3-inch Wide Color LCD
Touch Panel N/A
Backlight & Color Yes
U.S.A.: English/Spanish,
U.S.A.
LCD Canada: English/Canada-French
Language Europe See "Language List (page 2-21)."
Asia/
English/Spanish
Oceania
Selectable Wallpaper Yes (4 patterns)
Illuminated Key/LED Fax/Scan/Copy/Photo Capture
Illuminated Key Color Blue
Status LED Color N/A

2.1.4 Memory
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Memory Capacity
64 MB
(physical: megabytes)
Memory Backup
Yes
(with battery, 24 hours)
Backup Print: ON/OFF
Yes
(in function menu)

2.1.5 Security
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Memory Security N/A
Transmission Lock N/A
Secure Function Lock Yes

2-3 Confidential
2.1.6 Interface
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Host Interface USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
LAN Yes
Wireless LAN N/A Yes
Bluetooth N/A
IrSimple N/A
PictBridge Yes
USB Flash Memory Yes
"Compact Flash"
"Memory Stick"
"Memory Stick Pro"
Acceptable Media Cards "Secure Digital"
"Secure Digital High Capacity"
"xD Picture Card"
"xD Picture Card TypeM/TypeM+/TypeH"

2.1.7 Others
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
On/Off Switch Yes
U.S.A. 100-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Power Source Europe/

Asia/ 220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Oceania
Operating Environment
Temperature (Best Print 5-40 (18-33) degrees centigrade
Quality)
Humidity 20 - 80% (w/o condensation)
Power U.S.A. 28 / 6.5 / 4 / 0.9 W
Consumption
Average Europe/
(Operating/ Asia/ 28 / 6.5 / 4 / 0.9 W
Standby/Sleep/ Oceania
OFF mode)
Machine Noise (Operating) 50 dBA (Maximum) (Belgium only)
Machine Dimensions 485 x 408 x 242 mm
10.7 kg
U.S.A.
(23.6 lb.)
Machine Weight Europe/
10.9 kg
Asia/
(24.0 lb.)
Oceania
Energy Star Compliant Yes
U.S.A. N/A
Europe Yes
Blue Angel
Asia/
N/A
Oceania
TCO99 N/A
Speaker Yes

2-4 Confidential
2.2 TELEPHONE

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Handset N/A
Digital Cordless Phone
N/A
(Cordless Handset)
SKYPE API support N/A
U.S.A. Hook
Hook/ Tel R/
Europe Tel R
Recall/On Hook
Key Asia/
Hook
Oceania
Duplex Speaker Phone Key N/A
PBX Feature (Europe Only) Yes
Hold/Mute N/A
Music on Hold N/A
Monitoring the Line on Hold
N/A
with Music

2.2.1 Volume
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Handset Volume N/A
Speaker Volume Yes (3 steps + OFF)
Ring Volume Yes (3 steps + OFF)

2.2.2 Quick/Auto Dials

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Yes - 6 locations
One Touch Dial
(3 keys + Shift key)
Speed Dial 80 x 2 numbers
Figures of One Touch & Speed
20 digits
Dial
Registerable Number Of
16 characters
Characters
Group Dial (Up to X groups) Yes (6)
Telephone Index
Yes
(Search/Speed dial key)

2-5 Confidential
2.2.3 Tel Service
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Caller ID Yes
Call Waiting Caller ID N/A
Call from Caller ID List Yes
Call from Call List Yes
Call waiting Ready N/A
Backup Caller ID list Yes
Call List Indication Yes
External TAD Interface Yes
Distinctive Ringing Yes

2.2.4 Message Center

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
TAD N/A
ICM Recording Time N/A
Toll Saver N/A
Recording Conversation N/A
OGM/User Recording Time
N/A
(MC/TAD, F/T)

2.2.5 List/Report
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Activity Report/Journal Report Yes (up to 200)
Transmission Verification
Yes
Report
Help List Yes
Caller ID List Yes
Quick Dial List Yes (Print/Display)
Tel Index List ABC
User Setting List Yes
Order Form N/A
Network Configuration Yes

2-6 Confidential
2.3 FAX

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Modem Speed 33,600 bps
Transmission Speed Approx. 3 seconds (Brother #1, MMR)
ITU-T Group Super G3
Mono: MH/MR/MMR
Coding Method
Color: JPEG
Paper Handling Size LTR, A4, LGL (with ADF)
LTR (FB): 208 mm
A4 (FB): 204 mm
Document Scanning Width
LTR/LGL (ADF): 208 mm
A4 (ADF): 208 mm
Document
Yes/Yes (ITU-T color FAX)
(Send/Receive)
Color FAX
Memory (Send/
No/Yes (ITU-T color FAX)
Receive)
Send Yes
Display FAX
Receive Yes
Super Fine Yes (TX & RX : B&W only)
Mono: 64,
Gray Scale
Color: 256
Contrast
Yes
(Auto/S.Light/S.Dark)
Dual Access Yes (B&W only)
Enhanced Remote Activate Yes
Yes
Station ID
20 digits/20 characters
Remote Maintenance Yes
Remote Access Yes
Fax Retrieval Yes (B&W only)
Paging Yes (U.S.A. only)

2-7 Confidential
2.3.1 Sending
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Delayed Timer Up to 50 / B&W only
Polled U.S.A. Yes (Standard)
Sending
(type) Europe/Asia/
Yes (Standard/Secure)
*B&W only Oceania

Batch Transmission Yes (B&W only/not color)

Quick-Scan
(Memory transmission) Approx. 3.30 seconds/page @LTR
(ITU-T Test Chart #1 on page Approx. 3.50 seconds/page @A4
2-22)
ITU-T Test
Chart #1
Up to 400 pages
(see page 2-
Memory 22) / MMR
Transmission
Brother Chart
(see page 2- Up to 480 pages
23) / MMR
Broadcasting (Speed/
Yes (216 locations)
One Touch + Manual)
Manual Broadcasting Yes (50 locations)
Fax Forwarding Yes (B&W only)

2.3.2 Receiving
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Easy Receive/Fax Detect Yes (Fax detect only)
Polling U.S.A. Yes (Standard/Sequential)
Receiving
(type) Europe/Asia/ Yes
* B&W only Oceania (Standard/Sequential/Secure/Timer)

Auto Reduction Yes

ITU-T Test
Chart #1
Up to 400 pages
(see page 2-
Out-of-Paper 22) / MMR
Reception
Brother Chart
(see page 2- Up to 480 pages
23) / MMR

2-8 Confidential
2.3.3 PC FAX
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Color/Mono Mono (A4 only)
Sending Yes (Network/USB)
Yes (Network/USB),
Receiving
N/A for MAC
RX: Class 2
PC-Fax Protocol
TX: PC-FAX Driver
Broadcasting Up to 50

2.4 PRINTER

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Mono/Color Color

Print Speed (A4/LTR) Up to 35/28 ppm

*Including paper feeding (Mono: 450 x 300 dpi/Color: 600 x 150 dpi):

Resolution
Up to 1200 x 6000 dpi
(horizontal x vertical)
Fonts (CD Based) N/A
Auto Duplex Print N/A
Manual Duplex Print Yes
<Borderless printing>
On: 0, 0, 0, 0 mm/0, 0, 0, 0 inch (*)
Off: 3, 3, 3, 3 mm/0.12, 0.12, 0.12, 0.12 inches (**)

(*) Borderless for A3, A4, B4, LGR, LTR, A6,

Print Paper Margin
Photo (102 x 152 mm/4 x 6 inches),
(upper, lower, left, right)
Index card (127 x 203 mm/5 x 8 inches),
Photo-L (89 x 127 mm/3.5 x 5 inches),
Photo-2L (127 x 178 mm/5 x 7 inches),
Post Card 1 (100 x 148 mm/3.9 x 5.8 inches) only
(**) 12, 24, 3, 3 mm/0.47, 0.95, 0.12, 0.12 inches for Envelops
Easy Print Setting for Printer
N/A
Driver (Japan only)
Color Enhancement
Yes
(Color Printer)

2-9 Confidential
2.5 COPY

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Mono/Color (Color Copy) Color
Copy Speed (A4/LTR)
*Including paper feeding 23/20 cpm
**Europe's default is calculated 8/8 cpm (Belgium only)
by "normal mode" speed
Print: Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi
Resolution Mono
Scan: Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi
(horizontal x
vertical) Print: Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi
Color
Scan: Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi
Stack Yes (99)
Multi Copy
Sort Yes
Reduction/Enlargement (%) 25 - 400 in 1% increments
2 in 1 / 4 in 1
N in 1
LGR/LTR/A3/A4 only (*Mono & Color)
Poster Yes (3 x 3, 2 x 2)
Auto Skew Adjustment N/A
Fit to Page Yes
Book Copy
(Shadow
Correction &
Yes
Copy Skew
Enhancement Adjustment for
book)
Watermark
Yes
Copy
Duplex Copy N/A
Print Paper Margin
3, 3, 3, 3 mm/0.12, 0.12, 0.12, 0.12 inches
(upper, lower, left, right)
Standard Tray LGR, LTR, LGL, A3, A4, A5, 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 inches)
Paper Sizes
Photo Tray N/A
(Color Copy)
Lower Tray N/A

2-10 Confidential
2.6 SCANNER

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Mono/Color (Color Scanner) Color
Scan Speed (Mono/Color) Maximum 3.24/4.55 seconds (LTR)
*@100 dpi Maximum 3.44/4.83 seconds (A4)

Resolution Optical 1200 x 2400 dpi

(horizontal x 1200 x 1200 dpi
vertical) Interpolated
(For Windows XP/Vista, up to 19200 x 19200 dpi with Scanner Utility)
Gray Scale 256
Image Yes (Scan Key)
OCR Yes (Scan Key)
E-mail Yes (Scan Key)
File Yes (Scan Key)
Scan to Media
(Media Card
Yes (Scan Key)
or USB Flash
Memory)
FTP Yes (Scan Key)
E-mail Server Yes (Download/Scan Key)
Document Scanning Width 210 mm
Color Depth Input: 48 bits, Output: 24 bits

2-11 Confidential
2.7 PHOTO CAPTURE

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Memory Stick: 16-128 MB (Duo, micro with
Memory Stick: 16-128 MB (Duo with Adapter) Adapter)
Memory Stick Pro: 256 MB - 8 GB Memory Stick Pro: 256 MB - 32 GB
(MagicGate: YES if not use MG function) (MagicGate: YES if not use MG function)
(Duo, micro with Adapter)
Secure Digital: 16 MB - 2 GB (MiniSD,
Secure Digital: 16 MB - 2 GB (MiniSD with
microSD with Adapter)
Adapter)
Media Cards Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC): 4-32
Acceptable Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC): 4-8 GB
GB
Media
(Type & Size) xD Picture Card: 16-512 MB xD Picture Card: 16-512 MB
xD Picture Card TypeM/TypeM+/TypeH: xD Picture Card TypeM/TypeM+/TypeH:
256 MB - 2 GB 256 MB - 2 GB
Compact Flash: 4 MB - 8 GB Compact Flash: 4 MB - 32 GB
(Type1 only, Type2 & Microdrive are not (Type1 only, Tpye2 & Microdrive are not
compatible) compatible)
USB Flash
Up to 8 GB Up to 32 GB
Memory
Standard Tray LGR, LTR, A3, A4, 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 inches), 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7 inches)
Paper Sizes Photo Tray N/A
Lower Tray N/A
Standard Tray Plain, Inkjet, Glossy
Paper Types Photo Tray N/A
Lower Tray N/A
<Borderless printing>
Print Paper Margin (upper,
On: 0, 0, 0, 0 mm/0, 0, 0, 0 inch
lower, left, right) (PCC)
Off: 3, 3, 3, 3 mm/0.12, 0.12, 0.12, 0.12 inches
Available Paper Size for Full
All sizes
(Maximum) Size Printing
Direct Print Size for A4/LTR 8 x 10 cm (3 x 4 inches), 9 x 13 cm (3.5 x 5 inches), 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 inches),
(N/A for A3, LGR, B4) 13 x 18 cm (5 x 7 inches), 15 x 20 cm (6 x 8 inches), Maximum Size
Borderless/Cropping
Yes/Yes
(Full Auto)
DPOF (Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1)
Media Format
Exif DCF (Up to Ver. 2.1)
Image Format Print by Media
Photo Print: JPEG/JPEG
Card/USB Flash Memory
Color Enhancement
Yes
(PCC)
Removable Disk (Media Card/ Yes (read & write)
USB Flash Memory) (both Card & USB flash memory)
Scan to Media (Media = Media Color: JPEG/PDF
Card or USB Flash Memory) B&W: TIFF/PDF
Network Media Card/USB Yes (read & write)
Flash Memory Access (both Card & USB flash memory)
Monochrome/Sepia Yes
Trimming Yes
Search from Date Yes
Slide-show Yes
Yes
Photo Enhance
(Remove red-eye/Skin-Tone/Scenery/Auto correct)

2-12 Confidential
2.7.1 PictBridge
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Paper Size A3, A4, LGR, LTR, 4 x 6 inches, Printer Setting
Paper Type Plain Paper, Inkjet Paper, Glossy, Printer Setting
Direct Print Size for A4/LTR Maximum size only
Borderless / Cropping
Yes/No
(Full Auto)
Index Print N/A
DPOF Yes
Color Enhancement Yes
Print Quality Normal, Fine, Printer Setting

2.8 SOFTWARE

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Windows 2K/XP/XP Professional X64/
Support OS Windows Windows 2K/XP/XP Professional x64/Vista
Vista/Win7
Version
Mac Mac OS X 10.2.4 (greater) Mac OS X 10.4.11, 5.x, 6.x
Windows® 2000 Professional
Windows® XP Home
Windows® XP Professional
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Vista®
Win 2K Professional
Windows7
Win XP Home/XP Professional
Windows Server® 2003 (print only via network)
Win XP Professional x64
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition
Win Vista
PC Application (print only via network)
Win Server 2003 (print only via network)
Windows Server® 2003 R2
Win Server 2003 x64 (print only via network)
(print only via network)
Win Server 2008 (print only via network)
Windows Server® 2003 R2 x64 Edition
Mac OS X 10.3.9 - 10.4.3
(print only via network)
Mac OS X 10.4.4 or greater
Windows Server® 2008 (print only via network)
Windows Server® 2008 R2
(print only via network)
Mac OS® X 10.4.11, 5.x
Mac OS® X 10.6.x

2-13 Confidential
2.9 NETWORK

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

ITU SUB Addressing N/A
Printer Yes
Scanner Yes
PC FAX Yes
Internet FAX (Firmware) Yes (Download)
Color: PDF/JPEG
Format (Scan to E-mail server)
B/W: TIFF/PDF
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP), NetBIOS/WINS, LPR/LPD,
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, DNS Resolver, mDNS, FTP Server, TELNET,
Protocols (IPv4)
SNMPv1, TFTP, Scanner Port, LLTD Responder, Web Services, SMTP Client,
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, POP3, APOP, FTP Client
(Turned off by default) NDP, RA, LPR/LPD, Custom Raw Port/Port9100, mDNS,
Protocols (IPv6) FTP Server, TELNET, SNMPv1, TFTP, Scanner Port, LLTD Responder, Web Services,
SMTP Client, POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, POP3, APOP, FTP Client
LDAP N/A
FAX to E-mail Yes
Network Management
Yes
(BRAdmin Light)
Network Management (MIB-II
Yes
as well as Brother private MIB)
Network Reset Yes (for WLAN & WIRED LAN at once) (in LAN Menu)

2.9.1 Wired
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Model Name (Ethernet) Embedded (NC-170h)
Network Connection (Ethernet) Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation

2-14 Confidential
2.9.2 Wireless
Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW
Model Name (Wireless) N/A Embedded (NC-180w)
Network Connection
N/A IEEE 802.11b/g
(Wireless)
SSID (32 chr), WEP 64/128 bit,
Wireless Security N/A WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)
**NO LEAP**
WiFi Certification N/A Wifi B and G
WCN
N/A
(Windows Connect Now)
Secure EZ
N/A
Setup
AOSS
Setup Support (WLAN model N/A Yes
Utility only)
WPS (WiFi
Protected N/A Yes
Setup)
Auto Switch WLAN/WIRED
N/A
LAN

2-15 Confidential
2.10 SUPPLIES/OPTIONS

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

LC61BK/ LC65HY-BK
LC61C/ LC65HY-C
U.S.A.
LC61M/ LC65HY-M
LC61Y/ LC65HY-Y
LC1100BK/ LC1100HY-BK
Ink Cartridge Model LC1100C/ LC1100HY-C
Europe
Name LC1100M/ LC1100HY-M
LC1100Y/ LC1100HY-Y
LC67BK/ LC67HY-BK
Asia/ LC67C/ LC67HY-C
Oceania LC67M/ LC67HY-M
LC67Y/ LC67HY-Y
Bundled Ink Cartridge Type High yield
Bundled Cartridges Approx. 770/540 pages
Ink Supply Standard
Cartridge Approx. 450/325 pages
Cartridges
Yield
(@ISO Supply Low Yield
N/A
pattern/ Cartridges
normal) Supply High Yield
Approx. 900/750 pages
Cartridges
Plain: LGR/LTR
U.S.A. Inkjet: LGR/LTR
Brother Paper (for Glossy (resin coated): LGR/LTR/4 x 6 inches
Plain, Glossy and
Inkjet) Europe/ Plain: A3/A4
Asia/ Inkjet: A3/A4
Oceania Glossy (resin coated): A3/A4/4 x 6 inches
Recommended Paper Only for
3M 3410 Transparency Film
Transparency

2.11 SERVICE INFORMATION

Model MFC5890CN MFC5895CW

Monthly Volume 4000 pages
Machine Life (year) 50000 pages or 5 years
MTBF (Mean Time Between
4000 hours
Failures)
MTTR (Mean Time To Be
30 minutes
Repaired)

2-16 Confidential
2.12 PAPER

2.12.1 Paper Specifications

Paper type and size for each operation
Paper Type Paper Size Usage
Fax Copy Photo Printer
Capture
Cut Sheet Ledger 11 x 17 inches (279.4 x 431.8 mm) Yes Yes Yes Yes
A3 11.7 x 16.5 inches (297 x 420 mm) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter 8 1/2 x 11 inches (215.9 x 279.4 mm) Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 8.3 x 11.7 inches (210 x 297 mm) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Legal 8 1/2 x 14 inches (215.9 x 355.6 mm) Yes Yes -- Yes
Executive 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 inches (184 x 267 mm) -- -- -- Yes
B4 (JIS) 10.1 x 14.3 inches (257 x 364 mm) -- -- -- Yes
B5 (JIS) 7.2 x 10.1 inches (182 x 257 mm) -- -- -- Yes
A5 5.8 x 8.3 inches (148 x 210 mm) -- Yes -- Yes
A6 4.1 x 5.8 inches (105 x 148 mm) -- -- -- Yes
Cards Photo 4 x 6 inches (10 x 15 cm) -- Yes Yes Yes
Photo L 3 1/2 x 5 inches (89 x 127 mm) -- -- -- Yes
Photo 2L 5 x 7 inches (13 x 18 cm) -- -- Yes Yes
Index Card 5 x 8 inches (127 x 203 mm) -- -- -- Yes
Post Card 1 3.9 x 5.8 inches (100 x 148 mm) -- -- -- Yes
Post Card 2 5.8 x 7.9 inches (148 x 200 mm) -- -- -- Yes
(Double)
Envelopes C5 Envelope 6.4 x 9 inches (162 x 229 mm) -- -- -- Yes
DL Envelope 4.3 x 8.7 inches (110 x 220 mm) -- -- -- Yes
COM-10 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 inches (105 x 241 mm) -- -- -- Yes
Monarch 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 inches (98 x 191 mm) -- -- -- Yes
JE4 Envelope 4.1 x 9.3 inches (105 x 235 mm) -- -- -- Yes
Transparencies Letter 8 1/2 x 11 inches (215.9 x 279.4 mm) -- Yes -- Yes
A4 8.3 x 11.7 inches (210 x 297 mm) -- Yes -- Yes

Paper weight, thickness and capacity

Paper Type Weight Thickness No. of
sheets
Cut Sheet Plain Paper 17 to 32 lb. (64 to 120 g/m2) 3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm) 150 *
Inkjet Paper 17 to 53 lb. (64 to 200 g/m2) 3 to 10 mil (0.08 to 0.25 mm) 20
Glossy Paper Up to 58 lb. (Up to 220 g/m2) Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm) 20
Cards Photo 4 x 6 inches Up to 58 lb. (Up to 220 g/m2) Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm) 20
Index Card Up to 32 lb. (Up to 120 g/m2) Up to 6 mil (Up to 0.15 mm) 30
Post Card Up to 53 lb. (Up to 200 g/m2) Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm) 30
Envelopes 20 to 25 lb. (75 to 95 g/m2) Up to 20 mil (Up to 0.52 mm) 10
Transparencies -- -- 10
*
Up to 150 sheets of plain paper 20 lb. (80 g/m2).

2-17 Confidential
Recommended print media

Brother paper
Paper Type Item
Ledger Plain BP60PLGR (USA only)
Ledger Glossy Photo BP71GLGR
Letter Plain BP60PL (USA only)
Letter Glossy Photo BP71GP
Letter Inkjet (Matte) BP60ML (USA only)
4 x 6 in. Glossy Photo BP71GP
A3 Plain BP60PA3
A3 Glossy Photo BP71GA3
A3 Inkjet (Matte) BP60MA3
A4 Plain BP60PA
A4 Glossy Photo BP71GA4
A4 Inkjet (Matte) BP60MA
10 x 15 cm Glossy Photo BP71GP

2-18 Confidential
Handling and using print media
„ Store paper in its original packaging, and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from
moisture, direct sunlight and heat.
„ Avoid touching the shiny (coated) side of photo paper. Load photo paper with the shiny side
facing down.
„ Avoid touching either side of transparencies because they absorb water and perspiration
easily, and this may cause decreased output quality. Transparencies designed for laser
printers/copiers may stain your next document. Use only transparencies recommended for
inkjet printing.
„ You can only print on both sides of the paper with PC printing using Windows.

1 0.08 inches (2 mm) or greater curve

may cause jams to occur

2-19 Confidential
2.12.2 Printable Area

Top (1) Bottom (2) Left (3) Right (4)

Cut Sheet 0.12 inches (3 mm) 0.12 inches (3 mm) 0.12 inches (3 mm) 0.12 inches (3 mm)
Envelopes 0.47 inches (12 mm) 0.95 inches (24 mm) 0.12 inches (3 mm) 0.12 inches (3 mm)

2-20 Confidential
Language List
Product Country Languages Default
Category
MFC U.S.A. English English
Canada English/French English
Belgium Dutch/French/English Dutch
Switzerland German/French/English German
Pan Nordic/Denmark English/Norwegian/Swedish/Finnish/ Depends on first country
Danish setting
General English/Czech/Hungarian/Polish/ English
Bulgarian/Romanian/Slovak
Russia Russian/English Russian
Asia English English
Oceania English English
Hong Kong Traditional Chinese/English Traditional Chinese

2-21 Confidential
ITU-T Test Chart #1

2-22 Confidential
Brother Chart

2-23 Confidential
 CHAPTER 3
THEORY OF OPERATION

Confidential
 CHAPTER 3 THEORY OF OPERATION

This chapter gives an overview of the scanning and printing mechanisms as well as the sensors,
actuators, and control electronics. It aids in understanding the basic principles of operation as well as
locating defects for troubleshooting.

CONTENTS

3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................................. 3-2
3.2.1 Scanner Mechanism.................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 Printing Mechanism................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.1 Ink supply and ink jet mechanism ......................................................... 3-10
[1] Overview ........................................................................................... 3-10
[2] Features ............................................................................................ 3-11
[3] Head/carriage unit............................................................................. 3-12
[4] Ink cartridges..................................................................................... 3-17
[5] Ink refill assembly.............................................................................. 3-19
[6] Ink supply tubes ................................................................................ 3-20
3.2.2.2 Head maintenance mechanism............................................................. 3-21
[1] Overview ........................................................................................... 3-21
[2] Maintenance unit components .......................................................... 3-22
[3] Mechanisms constituting the head maintenance mechanism........... 3-24
[4] Power transmission route to the head maintenance mechanism
and motor rotational direction............................................................ 3-29
[5] Purge types, ink usage, purge counts, and purge codes .................. 3-32
[6] Ink cartridge capacities ..................................................................... 3-32
3.2.2.3 Carriage drive mechanism .................................................................... 3-33
3.2.2.4 Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms .......... 3-37
3.2.3 Sensors and Actuators .............................................................................. 3-41
3.3 CONTROL ELECTRONICS ................................................................................... 3-44
3.3.1 Components .............................................................................................. 3-44

Confidential
3.1 OVERVIEW

- Compact Flash - Digital camera

- Memory Stick (with PictBridge)
- SD Memory Card - USB flash
Host - xD-Picture Card memory drive
WLAN* LAN

*
Color Control Backup USB WLAN LAN PhotoCapture USB
LCD panel battery interface PCB interface Center interface

Fax Control Section Printer Control Section

SDAA
Print data

Line MJ PCB Speaker Scanner unit Ink jet printer unit Paper feeding Power
- CIS unit - Head/carriage unit mechanism supply AC
- CIS motor - Carriage PCB with - Paper feed
head flat cables motor
- Carriage motor - ASF motor
- Ink refill ASSY
ADF unit - Maintenance unit
- ADF motor

(Overview_BHL9_A3)

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

3-1 Confidential
3.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

This machine consists of the scanner mechanism and printing mechanism. It uses five motors
(CIS motor, ADF motor, paper feed motor, ASF motor, and carriage motor), three encoders (PF
encoder, ASF encoder, and CR encoder), various sensors, and two thermistors.

„ Scanner Mechanism

Document path for ADF scanning

(Left) (Right)

Document for flat-bed scanning

(BHL9A3_ADF_1)

„ Printing Mechanism

Ink supply and ink jet mechanism, head maintenance mechanism, and carriage drive
mechanism.

(Front) (Rear)

- Carriage drive mechanism - Ink supply and ink jet mechanism

- Head maintenance mechanism

(3_01_BHL9_A3)

3-2 Confidential
Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms

Recording paper path

(Front) (Rear)

(3_02_BHL9_A3)

3-3 Confidential
„ Scanner Mechanism - Document scanning mechanism CIS motor
(See Section 3.2.1.) (stepping motor)

- Automatic document feeder (ADF) ADF motor

mechanism (stepping motor)

„ Printing Mechanism - Ink supply and ink jet mechanism

(See Section 3.2.2.) (See Section 3.2.2.1.)

- Head maintenance mechanism

(See Section 3.2.2.2.)
(Head capping and carriage lock) ASF motor* (DC motor)
+ +
(Purge, air removing, and head wiper) Paper feed motor
(DC motor)

- Carriage drive mechanism Carriage motor

(See Section 3.2.2.3.) (DC motor)

- Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding ASF motor* (DC motor)

and ejecting mechanisms +
(See Section 3.2.2.4.) Paper feed motor
(DC motor)

„ Encoders - Paper feed motor encoder (PF encoder)

(See Section 3.2.3.) - ASF motor encoder (ASF encoder)
- Carriage motor encoder (CR encoder)

„ Sensors - Document front sensor

(See Section 3.2.3.) - Document rear sensor
- Scanner cover sensor
- Ink cartridge cover sensor
- Registration sensor
- Paper width (media) sensor
- Purge cam switch
- Cap lift cam switch
- Ink empty sensors (black, yellow, cyan and magenta)
- Ink cartridge detection sensors (black, yellow, cyan and magenta)

„ Thermistors - Head thermistor

(See Section 3.2.3.) - Casing internal temperature thermistor

* ASF motor: Auto Sheet Feeder motor

3-4 Confidential
3.2.1 Scanner Mechanism
This mechanism consists of the automatic document feeder (ADF), document cover, and
scanner unit (scanner cover).
The scanner unit consists of a scanner top cover, CIS unit, CIS drive assembly, and scanner
base.
The detailed illustration on the next page shows the components making up the ADF: document
pull-in roller, document separation roller, document feed rollers, document ejection rollers,
ADF motor, and document front and rear sensors.
For further details on the sensors, see Section 3.2.3.

ADF unit
ADF & document
cover ASSY

Document cover

White reference film

Scanner top cover

CIS drive assembly

(CIS motor) CIS drive belt

CIS flat cable

Scanner unit
(Scanner cover)

Scanner base

CIS unit CIS idle pulley

CIS rail
(3_03_BHL9)

3-5 Confidential
 Document feed rollers
Document pressure rollers 1
Document separation roller
Document support
Document pull-in roller
Document ejection rollers

Document path for ADF scanning

(Left) (Right)

Pinch rollers Document for flat-bed scanning

CIS unit ADF motor
Document front sensor actuator
ADF parts
Document pressure bar
Document rear sensor actuator
Document pressure rollers 2
(BHL9A3_ADF_2)

The scanner mechanism offers two types of scanning: ADF scanning and flat-bed scanning. It
automatically switches to the former at the start of a scan operation if the document front sensor
inside the ADF detects a document.

3-6 Confidential
(1) ADF scanning: Document moves across stationary CIS unit
Placing a document face up in the ADF activates the document front sensor, switching to ADF
scanning.
The CIS drive mechanism (details below) operates for each scanning command executed. First,
the CIS motor moves the CIS unit to the white reference film for white level compensation.
Secondly, the ADF motor rotates the document pull-in roller to pull the document into the ADF.
Thirdly, the CIS motor again moves the CIS unit to the ADF scanning position.
The document separation roller feeds the pages one at a time, starting from the top, to the
document feed roller, which rotates to move the page in a curve left, down, and right. The page
is scanned as it passes over the CIS unit. It then leaves the machine face down onto the
document cover. The machine ejects subsequent pages above this one to preserve the document
page order.

(2) Flat-bed scanning: CIS unit moves under stationary document

The user lifts the document cover, places a page (or open book) face down with the left and top
edges fitting on the left and top guidelines on the glass plate, and closes the document cover.
The CIS drive mechanism (details below) operates for each scanning command executed. The
CIS unit first moves to the white reference film for white level compensation. It then moves
right, scanning as it goes. It returns to its home position after the scan.

CIS drive mechanism

The contact image sensor (CIS) unit rides along the CIS rail, driven by the CIS drive belt.
Clockwise motion of the CIS motor moves the unit to the left; counterclockwise motion, to the
right.
This unit consists of the document illumination LED array, the lens array gathering the light
reflected from the scanned image, the CIS PCB converting the light input to pixel data output,
and the CIS glass.
The CIS unit used in the machine supports color scanning. In scanning color documents, the
CIS unit illuminates them by turning on the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) LEDs alternately.
In scanning monochrome documents, it turns on the green LEDs only.

3-7 Confidential
3.2.2 Printing Mechanism
The printing mechanism consists of the following.
„ Ink supply and ink jet mechanism (Section 3.2.2.1)
„ Head maintenance mechanism (Section 3.2.2.2)
„ Carriage drive mechanism (Section 3.2.2.3)
„ Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms (Section 3.2.2.4)

The ink supply mechanism supplies ink to the head/carriage unit, in which the ink jet
mechanism sprays ink droplets from the head nozzles onto paper.
The major components of the ink supply mechanism (shown on page 3-10) are:
- Ink refill assembly: This secures the ink cartridges and connects them to the corresponding
ink supply tubes.
- Ink supply tubes: These supply the head/carriage unit with ink fed from the ink cartridges via
the ink refill assembly.
The major components of the ink jet mechanism (head/carriage unit shown on page 3-12) are:
- Front end: This is an ink-jet head consisting of piezoelectric plate (PZT), metal plates, nozzle
plate, and head driver.It jets out ink to produce images on paper.
- Back end: This consists of damper assemblies and air vent unit. Each damper assembly
dampens the ink pressure fluctuations in the corresponding ink supply tube and collects air
bubbles that result from pressure changes on the ink.
To keep the optimum head performance, the head maintenance mechanism (shown on page 3-
31) uses the rotational torque of the ASF motor* to cap the head nozzles in order to prevent
them from drying up. It also uses the rotational torque of the paper feed motor to purge for
removing air bubbles from the head/carriage unit and wipe off any ink remaining on the head
nozzle surface.
The carriage drive mechanism (shown on page 3-33) moves the head/carriage unit with a
carriage motor (DC motor) along the recording paper. The CR encoder sensor mounted on the
head/carriage unit scans the CR encoder strip and monitors the current head position relative to
the home position and the current travel speed.
The paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms are driven by the ASF
motor* and paper feed motor (both are DC motors).
The major components are:
- Paper tray: Recording paper is stored in this tray.
- Paper pull-in rollers (shown on page 3-38):
These rollers pull in paper into the machine.
- Bank ASSY (shown on page 6-73):
This separates paper, sheet by sheet to feed it into the
printing section.
- Jam clear cover (shown on page 3-37):
Opening this cover allows the user to access paper jammed.
It also guides paper pulled in from the paper tray into the
printing section.

*ASF motor: Auto Sheet Feeder motor

3-8 Confidential
- Paper feed roller (shown on page 3-38):
This roller performs paper registration and feeds paper to
the printing section precisely.
- Paper ejection roller (shown on page 3-37):
This roller ejects paper and keeps paper tension tight.
- ASF motor* (shown on page 3-38):
This motor pulls in paper, switches the paper feed operation
modes, and drives the head capping mechanism and
carriage lock mechanism of the maintenance unit.
- Paper feed motor (shown on page 3-38):
This motor feeds recording paper and drives the purge
mechanism, air removing mechanism and head wiper
mechanism of the maintenance unit.
- Clutch gears L and R (shown on page 3-38):
Clutch gear L switches the transmission route of the ASF
motor rotation between the paper pulling-in mechanism and
the head capping & carriage lock mechanisms.
Clutch gear R transmits the rotational torque of the paper
feed motor to the purge gear (for purge, air removing and
head wiper mechanisms).
- ASF rotary encoder: This generates a signal indicating the rotation speed of the
ASF motor shaft. The signal is sent to the controller and
used for controlling the paper pull-in position and speed.
- PF rotary encoder: This generates a signal indicating the rotation speed of the
PF roller gear. The signal is sent to the controller and used
for controlling the paper feed position and speed.

*ASF motor: Auto Sheet Feeder motor

3-9 Confidential
3.2.2.1 Ink supply and ink jet mechanism
[ 1 ] Overview
The ink supply and ink-jet mechanism consists of the head/carriage unit, four ink cartridges, ink
refill assembly, and four ink supply tubes.
The head/carriage unit scans the surface of the recording paper, jetting out ink supplied through
the ink supply tubes onto the paper to produce images. For further details, see "[ 3 ] Head/
carriage unit" below.
The four ink cartridges (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta) are mounted on the ink refill
assembly. For further details, see "[ 4 ] Ink cartridges" below.
The ink refill assembly secures the ink cartridges and connects them to the corresponding ink
supply tubes. For further details, see "[ 5 ] Ink refill assembly" below.
The ink supply tubes supply the head/carriage unit with ink fed from the ink cartridges via the
ink refill assembly. For further details, see "[ 6 ] Ink supply tubes" below.

(Maintenance unit)

Engine unit (Ink absorber box)

Head/carriage unit

Ink refill assembly

Ink supply tubes

(Flushing box) (3_04_BHL9)

3-10 Confidential
[ 2 ] Features
A distinct feature of this machine is the use of ink supply tubes between the ink cartridges and
the head/carriage unit. Relieving the head/carriage unit of the task of carrying heavy ink
cartridges back and forth across the page, the approach generally adopted by other ink-jet
printers, offers the following advantages.
- Lower power consumption
- Lower noise levels
- Lower vibration
During print operation, the ink-jet mechanism inside the head/carriage unit sprays ink droplets
from the head nozzles. The loss of this ink from the head produces a negative pressure that
replenishes the head with ink from the ink tank through the supply tubes.
Note, however, that the above ink flow is only possible when the ink supply tubes are full of
ink. The factory therefore primes the ink supply path by applying strong suction to the head
nozzles with the maintenance unit to suck both air and ink through the ink supply tubes.
Leaving too long interval between this priming and actual use, however, risks air bubbles,
increased viscosity, and other quality issues with the ink in the supply tubes. Before using this
machine for the first time, therefore, this machine automatically replaces the ink supply path
contents with fresh ink using an initial purge, a repeat of this priming operation.
When the machine is on standby, a constant negative pressure (which is produced according to
the difference in height between the head/carriage unit and ink cartridges) is applied to the rear
of the print head, thus preventing ink from leading out of those nozzles.
Note: The above applies only as long as this machine rests on a horizontal surface. Standing
this machine on end or even just tilting it backwards with the print head uncapped risks
overcoming this slight negative pressure preventing ink leakage from the head nozzles.
Piezoelectric ceramic actuators inside the print head convert this ink to droplets sprayed onto
the paper. For further details, see "[ 3 ] Head/carriage unit" below.

3-11 Confidential
[ 3 ] Head/carriage unit
The head/carriage unit consists of a front end (ink-jet head) and a back end (damper and air vent
unit) as shown below.
The front end consists of metal plates laminated together and etched to form ink flow channels.
Piezoelectric ceramic actuators generate the spray pressure. The response of individual front
ends to applied voltages and waveforms varies, however, because of the nature of piezoelectric
materials, fluctuation in manufacturing accuracy, and other factors. The front end therefore
leaves the production line with head property labels giving property data. The manufacturer
writes this property data to the EEPROM on the main PCB incorporating this unit. Based on the
property data of the front end, the processor drives piezoelectric ceramic actuators to insure
consistent performance without fluctuations.

Back end
(Buffer and air vent unit)

(Front)

Head driver

Filter

Piezo plate

Front end
Metal plates (Ink-jet head)

Nozzle plate
(Head)

3-12 Confidential
 „ Front end

Front end components and their main roles

- Piezoelectric plate
Applying a voltage stretches the plate, serving as the actuator for spraying ink. Consisting of
thin piezoelectric plates laminated together, this plate can be driven even by a low voltage.
- Filter
This removes foreign materials from the ink.
- Metal plates
These form the head nozzle pressure chambers, ink flow paths, and manifolds.
- Nozzle plate
This plate has a total of 470 nozzles--47 nozzles x 2 lines staggered x 5 rows (black x 2,
yellow, cyan, and magenta).
- Head driver
This flexible circuit board holds the piezoelectric driver chip.

Nozzle array (head bottom plate viewed from the bottom)

Print head travel direction

Yellow
Black Cyan

Black Magenta
Paper feed direction

Black Black Yellow Cyan Magenta

Channels

Nozzles

(Nozzle)

3-13 Confidential
Ink spray function
The head employs drop-on-demand ink-jet printing.
Print commands to the drive circuit apply a bias voltage to the layer electrodes on the
piezoelectric ceramic surface stretching the elements perpendicular to that surface. Drive
signals removing this voltage for specific channel electrodes allow the piezoelectric elements to
return to their original shape, sucking ink into the corresponding channels*. Reapplying the bias
voltage stretches the elements once again, applying pressure to the ink, spraying it from the
head nozzle. The ink drop hits the paper on the platen, forming a dot.
* Pressure chambers for individual nozzles

3-14 Confidential
„ Back end

Damper ASSY (Magenta)

Air bubbles

Left chamber

Right
chamber

Damper ASSY (Cyan)

Air bubbles

Right chamber
Shut-off valves
Left chamber

Air vent unit

Damper ASSY (Yellow)

Air bubbles

Right
Left chamber chamber

Damper ASSY (Black)

Air bubbles
(Air vent rods) (Air vent cap)
Left chamber (A part of maintenance unit)
Right
chamber (BackEnd_E)

Back end components and their main roles

- Damper assemblies
Each assembly has two roles: dampening the ink pressure fluctuations* in the ink supply tube
as the carriage moves and collecting air bubbles that grow in the ink flow path.
* Ink pressure fluctuations: As the head/carriage unit travels, inertia means that the ink remains in the
same place, temporarily raising or lowering the pressure in the right chamber.

- Air vent unit

At regular scheduled intervals, this vents any air bubbles that have accumulated in the damper
assemblies. The air vent rods in the maintenance unit push up the shut-off valves, opening the
air vent flow paths.

3-15 Confidential
Damping
Without damping, ink pressure fluctuations directly affect the size of ink-jet head droplets,
risking lower print quality.
Each damper assembly has two chambers. The one on the right in the illustration below has a
loose film across its top and serves as a damper. The film immediately flexes in and out in
response to falls and rises in pressure, adjusting the chamber volume to counteract pressure
fluctuations in the ink supply tubes.

Film This loose film flexes in and out in

response to changes in ink pressure.

Left chamber

(DamperFunc)

Air buffering
Liquid ink contains trace amounts of air. These molecules coalesce into air bubbles as the
piezoelectric ceramic actuators vary the pressure on the ink in the ink-jet head channel. (See the
illustration on page 3-13.) Removing as many of these bubbles as possible before the ink
reaches the ink-jet head is essential to maintaining proper print quality. The above illustration
shows how the damper assemblies provide air buffers, the chambers on the left, for
consolidating these air bubbles away from the ink-jet head and vent flow paths for purging them
at regular scheduled intervals.

3-16 Confidential
[ 4 ] Ink cartridges

Filled with ink Ink near-empty/Ink empty

Disc valve S
Sensor actuator

Air

Ink empty sensor

Ink

(3_06)
Disc valve D

Ink cartridge features

This machine uses four ink cartridges: a black one and three color ones with a slightly lower
capacity. It features horizontal insertion in the ink refill base over plastic needles.
Each cartridge has two ports: one supplying the ink for printing and another intaking air to
replace that ink. Both ports have a disc valve preventing ink leakage. When a cartridge is
mounted over the plastic needles in the ink refill base, these valves are opened to secure flow
paths for both the ink and the air.
These ink cartridges are single-use affairs. There is no provision for refilling them. The design
reduces environment load by using only burnable materials yielding no toxic substances.

Inks
This machine uses dye-based inks for colors and pigment-based ink for black. Using the
pigment-based black ink reduces fuzziness from print character outlines, boosts resolution for
black dots, and produces clearer images on plain paper.

3-17 Confidential
Ink near-empty/ink empty detection
The ink refill assembly has four ink empty sensors (photosensors of transparent type) that
monitor the ink levels with sensor actuators inside the ink cartridges.

Disc valve S
Air intake port

Air

Ink empty
sensor

Ink

Ink supply port Sensor actuator (InkBackflowPrevention)

Disc valve D

Ink empty sensor Sensor actuator

Float (InkEmptySensor_2)

Attached to one end of the sensor actuator is a float. When there is ink in the cartridge,
buoyancy lifts the float, rotating the sensor actuator about a pivot near the center of the actuator
to block the light beam to the ink empty sensor, indicating that there is ink.
As the ink level in the ink cartridge drops, however, the float falls, eventually moving the sensor
actuator out of the beam.
Light hitting the sensor outputs the "ink near-empty" signal to the controller that shows the "Ink
low" message and activates a firmware counter tracking ink usage during ink-jet printing,
purges, and other operations. When this counter reaches a predetermined limit, the firmware
regards it as "ink empty" and shows the "Cannot Print" message to prompts the user to replace
it.

3-18 Confidential
[ 5 ] Ink refill assembly

Cartridge release levers

Ink empty sensor PCB

Ink refill case

Ink empty sensors (3_07)

Ink cartridge detection sensors

Ink cartridge detection

sensor PCB

Ink foam case

Ink foam

Ink refill base foam

Ink refill base

(3_08)

3-19 Confidential
 Ink refill assembly components and their main roles
- Ink refill case
- Cartridge release levers
- Ink refill base and its foam
- Ink cartridge detection sensors (on the ink cartridge detection sensor PCB)
- Ink empty sensors (on the ink empty sensor PCB)
- Ink foam and its case

Pushing each ink cartridge into the ink refill case until it clicks secures it and forces the
cartridges' ink supply port into close contact with the ink refill base to prevent ink leakage.
Pressing down the cartridge release lever pops the ink cartridge out of the ink refill case.
The ink from the ink cartridges flows through the ink flow channels provided in the ink refill
base into the ink supply tubes. As the ink level in an ink cartridge drops, the pressure inside
falls, drawing air in the ink cartridge.
The ink cartridge detection sensors detect ink cartridges inserted when the machine power is
ON.
The ink empty sensors detect ink remaining in the ink cartridges loaded. An ink empty sensor
actuator blocking the light beam to an ink empty sensor indicates that there is ink in the ink
cartridge. When ink runs low, the actuator moves out of the beam, activating the sensor ("Ink
near-empty") and showing the "Ink low" message.
If any of the ink cartridges is replaced with the one having different ink volume when the
machine power is OFF, the corresponding ink cartridge detection sensor and ink empty sensor
issue different signals when the power is turned ON next time so that the controller prompts the
user to reload the ink cartridge.
At the back of the ink refill case is an ink foam that absorbs any ink that leaks from the air
intake ports of the ink cartridges loaded when the machine is tilted during transportation or in
storage, preventing ink spread in the machine.

[ 6 ] Ink supply tubes

These are made of low-density polyethylene (LDPE) providing a highly impermeable barrier
against air ingress and drying out of the ink during extended periods of nonuse. This material is
also soft and highly flexible to better withstand the sharp and frequent bending associated with
high-speed head operation repeatedly over extended periods.

3-20 Confidential
3.2.2.2 Head maintenance mechanism
[ 1 ] Overview
The head maintenance mechanism, which keeps the optimum head performance, consists of the
maintenance unit and the ink absorber box. (See the illustration below.)
The maintenance unit has the following mechanisms.
- Head capping mechanism (See page 3-24.)
- Carriage lock mechanism (See page 3-24.)
- Purge mechanism (See page 3-25.)
- Air removing mechanism (See page 3-27.)
- Head wiper mechanism (See page 3-28.)

The ink absorber box absorbs the ink sucked out by purge operations.

(ASF motor)

Maintenance unit

(Engine unit)
Ink absorber box

(Head/carriage unit)

(Paper feed (Ink refill assembly)

motor)

(Ink supply tubes)

(3_09_BHL9)
(Flushing box)

3-21 Confidential
 [ 2 ] Maintenance unit components

Pump switching unit

Purge gear Air vent cap Purge cam Planetary arm

Cap lift cam Air vent rods
Cap lift
cam gear
Carriage lock
(Part of head
cap holder)
(ASF changeover Purge bevel gear
gear)
Head wiper (ASF changeover gear) Tube pump
Head cap holder
Maintenance unit Head cap unit Cap lift cam gear Purge gear
(3_10) (3_11)

Viewed from the top Viewed from the bottom

- Cap lift cam and its gear

These parts transmit the rotational torque of the ASF motor transmitted via the clutch gear L
to the head cap holder. (See [ 4 ] "Power transmission route to the head maintenance
mechanism and motor rotational direction.")
- Head cap unit
When the power is off or the machine is not printing, the head cap unit fits tightly over the
print head to prevent the head nozzles from drying up and to seal the head nozzles for purge
operations to suck up old ink.
- Head cap holder
This lifts up the head cap unit to fit it tightly over the print head to seal the head nozzles. (The
had cap holder is driven by the ASF motor.)
- Carriage lock
This is a part of the head cap holder. It locks the head/carriage unit in its home position so that
the head cap unit protects the head nozzles.
- Purge gear and purge bevel gear
These gears transmit the rotational torque of the paper feed motor via the clutch gear R to the
planetary arm. (See [ 4 ] "Power transmission route to the head maintenance mechanism and
motor rotational direction.")
- Planetary arm
This switches the rotational torque of the paper feed motor (transmitted via the purge gear and
purge bevel gear) to the pump switching unit or tube pump depending on the direction of
paper feed motor rotation.
- Purge cam
This rotating cam drives the pump switching unit, the air vent rods, and the head wiper. Each
drive position of the purge cam is detected by the purge cam switch. (See Section 3.2.3.)

3-22 Confidential
- Pump switching unit
This switches the application target of the negative pressure generated by the tube pump
between the head cap for black ink, the one for color ink, and the air vent cap. Usually the
pump switching unit is switched to the opening tube to the atmospheric air so that the pressure
in the head caps and air vent cap is equal to the normal atmospheric pressure.
- Air vent cap and rods
The air vent cap and rods remove air bubbles trapped in the damper assemblies in the back
end of the head/carriage unit.
During air venting with the tube pump, the air vent cap fits tightly over the air vent unit in the
head/carriage unit so that the negative pressure applies to the air vent unit. Pushing up the air
vent rods opens the shut-off valves inside the air vent unit, removing air bubbles trapped in
the damper assemblies. (For the air vent unit, see Section 3.2.2.1, [ 3 ].)
- Head wiper
As the head/carriage unit moves, this wipes off any ink remaining on the head nozzle surface.
- Tube pump
A roller squeezes the main drain tube looped inside, forcing their contents toward the ink
absorber box and creating negative pressure.

3-23 Confidential
[ 3 ] Mechanisms constituting the head maintenance mechanism
(1) Head capping mechanism
The ASF motor drives the head capping mechanism. When the power is off or the machine is
not printing, this mechanism fits the head cap unit (which contains two head caps) tightly over
the print head to prevent the head nozzles from drying up and to keep dust off the head nozzle
surface.
The head cap unit is mounted on the head cap holder and supported by the spring.
When the head/carriage unit returns to its home position, it presses the mode switching lever
(shown on pages 3-30 and 3-31) to the right so that the clutch gear L engages with the cap lift
cam gear (purge mode). Driving the ASF motor rotates the cap lift cam so that the cap lift arm
raises the head cap holder, fitting it tightly over the head nozzle surface.

Purge gear

Cap lift cam

Cap lift cam gear

ASF changeover gear

Carriage lock
Cap lift arm (Part of head cap holder)

Head cap unit Head cap holder (3_12)

(2) Carriage lock mechanism

This mechanism locks the head/carriage unit to prevent the head nozzles from getting out of the
head cap unit accidentally due to external vibration or impact when the machine is not printing,
when the power is off, or during transport.
A part of the head cap holder acts as a carriage lock. When the head cap holder rises in head
capping operation, the carriage lock also comes up to lock the head/carriage unit.

3-24 Confidential
 (3) Purge mechanism
The paper feed motor drives the purge mechanism.
The counterclockwise rotation of the paper feed motor drives the purge cam that aligns the
pump switching unit with either the black or color ink drain position.
Next, the paper feed motor reverses to activate the tube pump, producing negative pressure to
drain the air and old ink from the head nozzles and channels into the ink absorber box.

Purge cam
Pump switching unit

Main drain tube

Purge bevel gear

ASF changeover gear

Cap lift cam gear

Color drain tube

Black drain tube

Main drain tube
Main drain tube Air vent tube
Planetary arm
(3_14)
Tube pump

3-25 Confidential
(3.1) Switching pump
The pump switching unit switches the application target of the negative pressure generated by
the pump between the head cap for black ink, the one for color ink, and the air vent cap.
When the purge cam is in a head capping position and the head cap unit fits tightly over the
print head, the pump switching unit is switched to the opening tube to the atmospheric air so
that the pressure in the head caps and air vent cap returns to the normal atmospheric pressure.

Print head

Head cap for black ink

Head cap for color ink
Black drain tube

To air vent cap

Main drain tube

Pump switching unit

Color drain tube

(Purge_3_2_E)

To opening to
atmospheric air

(3.2) Draining ink

The tube pump consists of a pump gear and tube roller. As the pump gear rotates, the tube roller
on its circumference squeezes the main drain tube looped around the pump gear, forcing its
content toward the ink absorber box and creating negative pressure.

Main drain tube

Pump gear

Tube pump

Tube roller

(TubePump)

For details about the power transmission route to the head maintenance mechanism, see [ 4 ]
below.

3-26 Confidential
 (4) Air removing mechanism
Other two positions of the purge cam shift two slide cams--one for black ink, the other for color
inks, producing vertical motion of a single air vent rod for black ink and three air vent rods for
color ink, respectively.
Pushing up the air vent rods opens the shut-off valves inside the air vent unit of the head/
carriage unit. Simultaneously adding negative pressure from the tube pump removes air trapped
in the damper assemblies.

Maintenance unit
Purge gear
Air vent rod for black ink
(Cap lift cam gear) Air vent rods for color ink
Air vent cap

(ASF changeover gear)

Slide cam for black ink

Slide cam for color ink
Purge cam (3_16)

Damper ASSY (Magenta)

Air bubbles

Left chamber

Right
chamber

Damper ASSY (Cyan)

Air bubbles

Right chamber
Shut-off valves
Left chamber

Air vent unit

Damper ASSY (Yellow)

Air bubbles

Right
Left chamber chamber

Damper ASSY (Black)

Air bubbles
(Air vent rods) (Air vent cap)
Left chamber (A part of maintenance unit)
Right
chamber (BackEnd_E)

3-27 Confidential
(5) Head wiper mechanism
After the purge operation, the purge cam pushes up the head wiper, wiping off any ink
remaining on the head nozzle surface as the head/carriage unit moves from right to left.

Purge gear

(Cap lift cam gear)

(ASF changeover gear)

Head wiper

Purge cam (3_15)

3-28 Confidential
[ 4 ] Power transmission route to the head maintenance mechanism and motor rotational
direction
This mechanism draws its power from two motors--the ASF motor (DC motor) in the right rear
corner of the engine chassis and the paper feed motor (DC motor) on the left side. The ASF
motor is mounted in the ASF motor holder combined with the maintenance unit.

ASF motor → Maintenance unit (head capping and carriage lock mechanisms)
As shown on the next page, the rotational torque of the ASF motor is always transmitted via the
ASF/maintenance drive gear and idle gear 16 to the clutch gear L.
When the mode switching lever is in the left position (ASF mode), the clutch gear L also
meshes with the ASF changeover gear.
When the head/carriage unit moves to the right end of its travel, a tab on the carriage rear panel
pushes the mode switching lever to the right (purge mode). The clutch gear spring pushes the
clutch gear L to the right, away from the ASF changeover gear, to mesh with the cap lift cam
gear. This way, the ASF motor drives the head capping and carriage lock mechanisms. (See
page 3-31 for the related components.)

Paper feed motor → Maintenance unit (purge, air removing and head wiper mechanisms)
As shown on the next page, the paper feed motor drives the PF roller gear L that rotates the
paper feed roller. At the right end of the roller is the PF roller gear R that always meshes with
the clutch gear R.
When the mode switching lever is in the left position (ASF mode), the clutch gear R does not
mesh with the purge gear but it is just idling.
When the head/carriage unit moves to the right end of its travel, a tab on the carriage rear panel
pushes the mode switching lever to the right (purge mode). The clutch gear spring pushes the
clutch gear R to the right to mesh with the purge gear.
As the paper feed motor rotates counterclockwise, the planetary arm meshes with the purge cam
(as shown below), driving the purge mechanism (pump switching unit), air removing
mechanism and head wiper mechanism. On the contrary, the clockwise motor rotation causes
the planetary arm to mesh with the tube pump gear, driving the purge mechanism (tube pump).
(See page 3-31 for the related components.)
ASF changeover gear
Cap lift cam gear
Cap lift cam switch
Purge cam
Pump switching unit

Color drain tube

Purge cam switch

Tube pump
Planetary arm
Black drain tube
Main drain tube
(3_20)
Air vent tube

3-29 Confidential
 ASF motor
Clutch gear R
Mode switching lever
(Always engaged with
PF roller gear R)
Clutch gear L
ASF/maintenance drive gear
Idle gear 16 PF roller gear R

(ASF changeover gear) Purge gear

Purge bevel gear

Paper feed roller

Planet gear

ASF motor holder ASSY

PF roller gear R
Cap lift cam gear

Paper feed roller

Maintenance unit

(Front)

PF roller
gear L
(3_17_BHL9)
Paper feed motor

3-30 Confidential
 ASF motor holder Mode switching lever
ASSY
Switching lever spring

Air vent cap

Air vent rods

Maintenance unit

Clutch gear spring

Clutch gear L
Clutch gear R
ASF changeover gear
Cap lift cam gear
Cap lift cam
Purge gear Carriage lock
(part of head cap holder)
Purge cam
Head wiper Head cap unit
Head cap holder (3_19)

ASF/maintenance drive gear

ASF motor gear
ASF motor holder Idle gear 16
ASSY
Cap lift cam Clutch gears (L & R)
Purge gear

ASF changeover gear

Purge bevel gear

Cap lift cam gear

Tube pump Maintenance unit

Planet gear
Purge cam
Planetary arm

Pump switching unit (3_18)

3-31 Confidential
[ 5 ] Purge types, ink usage, purge counts, and purge codes
Refer to the table given on page 9-48.

[ 6 ] Ink cartridge capacities

Ink Cartridge Type Contents Usable Portion*1

Starter and bundled Black ink cartridge 23.05 ml Approx. 21.11 ml

High-yield type
cartridges Color ink cartridges 10.10 ml Approx. 8.59 ml
High-yield type 23.05 ml Approx. 21.11 ml
Black ink cartridge
Standard type 12.40 ml Approx. 10.59 ml
Spare ink cartridges
High-yield type 10.10 ml Approx. 8.59 ml
Color ink cartridges
Standard type 8.25 ml Approx. 6.55 ml

*1 These are the values measured with an actual machine, not the guaranteed ones.

Note: The contents and usable portion of ink cartridges are subject to change without notice.
Note: Values given in the above tables are as of August 2008.

3-32 Confidential
3.2.2.3 Carriage drive mechanism

The head/carriage unit, which integrates the print head unit and carriage, is supported and
guided by the CR guide rail and CR support chassis. The CR timing belt transmits the carriage
motor rotation to the head/carriage unit. Clockwise motor rotations move the head/carriage unit
to the right; counterclockwise ones to the left.
The CR encoder sensor on the top of the head/carriage unit scans the CR encoder strip above
the CR support chassis to monitor the current head position relative to the home position. The
controller uses this signal for robust control ensuring uniform speed.
The CR encoder strip is a clear film striped in a 1/150 inch cycle. It offers a choice of three
travel speeds of the head/carriage unit, 57.7, 43.3 and 21.7 ips, to match the print resolution.

CR encoder strip

(Paper feed roller)

CR encoder sensor Carriage motor

pulley
Head/carriage unit

CR guide rail

Carriage motor

CR timing belt

CR support chassis

Idle pulley (3_21_BHL9)

3-33 Confidential
Adjusting the print head angle relative to carriage
For optimal image printing, the print head nozzle array must be perpendicular to the head/
carriage unit's line of travel. Manufacturing limitations, however, make perfect alignment
impossible during mass production. The angle must be adjusted at the individual machine level.
The following describes this adjustment mechanism's components and their roles.
Slider L, the slider, and the rib attach the head/carriage unit to the CR support chassis. The rib
acts as a pivot for the slider's damping springs pressing the head/carriage unit to the rear. Slider
L has a head skew adjuster knob that shifts the slider back and forth, adjusting the angle of this
backward pressure. Rotating the head skew adjuster knob tilts the entire head/carriage unit, thus
adjusting the head nozzle vertical angle relative to the carriage unit's line of travel.
This knob offers 11 settings, from -5 to +5.
For the adjustment procedure, refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].

Viewed from the bottom

Head skew adjuster knob

Damping springs

Rib

CR encoder strip

Slider L

Slider

CR timing belt

(Front) (3_22)

3-34 Confidential
Height adjustment of the head/carriage unit
For optimal image printing, a pair of slider cams mounted on the head/carriage unit switches the
height of the head/carriage unit against the CR guide rail and support chassis between two
levels--2.3 mm (for thick paper and envelops) and 1.6 mm (for other types of paper) in order to
bring the optimum distance between the head nozzle surface and paper.
The slider cams can be switched by hitting against the stoppers at the right and left ends of the
CR guide rail and CR support chassis.

Head/carriage unit

Slider cam

CR guide rail

Slider cam

CR support chassis

(3_23_BHL9)

For "thick paper and envelopes" and "other types of paper":

The machine adjusts the distance from the platen to the head/carriage unit to 2.3 mm for "thick
paper and envelopes" and 1.6 mm for "other types of paper" in order to keep the distance ("a")
constant.

For "other types of paper"

For "thick paper and envelopes"
(Paper other than thick paper and envelopes)

Head nozzle surface Head nozzle surface

"a"
"a"
Paper Paper

Platen (3_23_1b) Platen (3_23_1a)

(3_24_2) (3_24_1)

3-35 Confidential
As listed below, the printer driver on the connected PC or the paper type setting on the machine
controls the slider cams to determine the height of the head/carriage unit.
Adjustment for:
Controlled by:
Thick paper and envelopes Other types of paper
Printer driver (in printing from the PC) Yes Yes
Paper type setting (in copying and
No Yes
printing via PhotoCapture Center)

3-36 Confidential
3.2.2.4 Paper pulling-in, registration, feeding and ejecting mechanisms

These mechanisms are driven via a gear train by two motors--paper feed motor located on the
left side of the engine chassis and ASF motor in the right rear corner. (See the illustration on the
next page.)
The following illustration is a cross-sectional view of the machine viewed from the right. Place
the recording paper face down in the paper tray. This paper first proceeds to the rear, bends
upward, heads back toward the front, passes under the head/carriage unit for printing, and
finally comes out onto the top of the paper tray cover.
The machine supports two paper feed modes--"normal SF mode" and "high-speed feed mode."
Depending upon the selected print quality, either of these two modes applies as listed below.
Print Quality Fast, Normal Other quality
Paper Feed Mode High-speed feed mode Normal SF mode

Head/carriage unit
Paper pull-in gear shaft
Recording paper path ASF idle gears 17
PF roller gear R
Paper ejection roller
Platen Clutch gears (R and L)
ASF/maintenance
drive gear
ASF changeover
gear
(Front) (Rear)
Jam clear cover

Paper tray Paper pull-in rollers

Recording paper path
Paper pull-in roller holder
(3_02_1_BHL9_A3)

3-37 Confidential
 Power transmission routes of the ASF motor and paper feed motor
The rotational torque of the ASF motor is transmitted to the ASF/maintenance drive gear which
always meshes with the clutch gear L, as described in Section 3.2.2.2, [ 4 ].
When the mode switching lever is in the left position (normal SF or high-speed feed mode), the
clutch gear L also meshes with the ASF changeover gear which transmits the ASF motor
rotation via a gear train to the paper pull-in rollers.
The rotational torque of the paper feed motor is transmitted via the PF roller gear L to the paper
feed roller that advances paper to the printing start position.

Mode switching lever

Left position (ASF mode)
Right position (Purge mode)
ASF motor
Clutch gear R
ASF/maintenance
drive gear

Idle gear 16

Purge gear

Clutch gear L

ASF changeover Mode switching lever

gear
ASF idle gears 17 Head/carriage unit
Paper pull-in gear shaft

ASF idle
Paper feed roller gears 17

Paper pull-in
gear shaft
Paper feed motor

PF roller gear L

Paper pull-in
rollers (Front)

PF motor gear
Ejection idle gear
Paper ejection roller (3_25_BHL9_A3)
PF timing belt

3-38 Confidential
Normal SF and high-speed feed mode
Normal SF mode
1st stage The ASF motor rotates clockwise (when viewed from the output gear side) and its
rotational torque is transmitted to the ASF/maintenance drive gear that is always
connected via the idle gear 16 to the clutch gear L. When the mode switching lever
is placed in the left position, the clutch gear L also meshes with the ASF changeover
gear.
The rotational torque is further transmitted from the ASF changeover gear via the
two ASF idle gears 17, paper pull-in gear shaft and the gear train in the paper pull-in
roller holder. Consequently, the paper pull-in rollers turn in the forward direction to
pull in a sheet of paper loaded in the paper tray.
2nd stage After the pulled-in paper pushes the registration sensor actuator to turn the sensor
on, the ASF motor further rotates clockwise for the predetermined period to align
(register) the leading edge of the paper with the paper feed roller. (Registration)
3rd stage The ASF motor stops and the paper feed motor starts rotating clockwise to rotate the
PF roller gear L that rotates the paper feed roller in the forward direction to advance
the paper to the printing start position.
The rotational torque of the PF roller gear L is also transmitted via the ejection idle
gear and PF timing belt to the paper ejection roller that rotates in the forward
direction to eject the paper printed.

High-speed feed mode

1st stage Just as in the normal SF mode, the clockwise rotation of the ASF motor pulls in a
sheet of paper loaded in the paper tray.
The difference from the normal SF mode is that the paper feed motor also rotates
clockwise at the same time as the ASF motor. The paper feed roller rotates in the
forward direction.
2nd stage When the paper fed by the paper pull-in rollers reaches the paper feed roller, the
roller is already rotating in the forward direction; therefore, the paper continues to
advance to the printing start position.
Registration sensor activation has no effect on the paper feeding operation in the
high-speed feed mode.
Even during printing of the first sheet of paper, the ASF motor keeps rotating
clockwise to rotate the paper pull-in rollers in the forward direction. Immediately
after the first sheet leaves the paper tray, the paper pull-in rollers continuously pull
in paper sheet by sheet. After the last sheet of paper advances to the printing start
position, the ASF motor stops.
The paper feed roller always rotates faster than the paper pull-in rollers; therefore,
the trailing edge of the preceding sheet will not overlap with the leading edge of the
subsequent one
Just as in the normal SF mode, the rotational torque of the PF roller gear L is also
transmitted via the ejection idle gear and PF timing belt to the paper ejection roller
that rotates in the forward direction to eject the paper printed.

3-39 Confidential
Other controls

Paper feed position and speed control

A PF encoder disk with the resolution of 300 dpi (0.084 mm pitch) is mounted on the PF roller
gear L. The PF encoder sensor uses it to generate a signal indicating the gear rotation speed--in
other words, the paper feed roller speed--to the controller for use in controlling paper feed
position and speed.

Paper stop position control

The controller uses the PF encoder signal for proportional, integration, differential (PID)
control of the paper feed motor to produce high-resolution precision paper positioning during
printing. This signal also determines the motor parameters for rapidly and precisely positioning
the paper.

Fixed-speed paper feed

This operation rotates the paper feed roller to feed the paper at a constant speed regardless of
load fluctuations. The primary application is ejecting paper when printing is complete--in other
words, in situations where precision stop position control is not needed.

Paper feeding amount control

There is variation in the head nozzle pitch of individual head/carriage units, as well as in the
shape of the paper feed and ejection rollers. To make those parts match each other, therefore,
updating the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58) is necessary (see Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.16).

3-40 Confidential
3.2.3 Sensors and Actuators
This machine uses the following sensors and thermistors.

Sensor Name Sensor Type Location

Document front sensor Photosensor On the document sensor PCB in the
Document rear sensor Photosensor ADF unit

Scanner cover sensor Carbon switch

On the control panel PCB
Ink cartridge cover sensor Carbon switch
Registration sensor Photosensor On the registration sensor PCB
Paper width sensor (media sensor) Photosensor
Head thermistor Thermistor On the carriage PCB
CR encoder sensor Photosensor
PF encoder sensor Photosensor On the PF encoder PCB
ASF encoder sensor Photosensor In the ASF motor unit
Purge cam switch Mechanical switch
On the maintenance unit
Cap lift cam switch Mechanical switch
Casing internal temperature thermistor Thermistor On the ink empty sensor PCB inside
Ink empty sensors (four) Photosensor the ink refill assembly

On the ink cartridge detection sensor

Ink cartridge detection sensors (four) Photosensor
PCB on the ink refill assembly

• The document front sensor detects whether there is a document in the ADF.
• The document rear sensor detects the leading and trailing edges of document pages, indicating
to the control circuitry the point at which to start reading and when page scanning is complete.
• The scanner cover sensor detects whether the scanner cover (scanner unit) is properly closed.
• The ink cartridge cover sensor detects whether the ink cartridge cover is properly closed.
• The registration sensor detects the leading and trailing edges of paper for use in determining
print start and end timings and detecting paper jams.
• The paper width (media) sensor checks whether recording paper is A4 or greater in width at
the start of recording of FAX data received. With this sensor signal, the controller prevents
the print head from printing on the outside of paper in borderless printing. It also protects the
platen from no-paper printing when a paper jam occurs, preventing stains on the platen and
the back side of paper.
• The head thermistor detects the temperature inside the head/carriage unit. According to the
sensor information, the controller adjusts the head driver to compensate for changes in ink
viscosity.

3-41 Confidential
• The carriage motor (CR) encoder sensor monitors the current position and speed of the head/
carriage unit. If the controller detects a head's travel speed error, it interprets the error state as
a paper jam or any foreign material getting into the carriage travel path and stops the
operation.
• The paper feed motor (PF) encoder sensor monitors the PF roller rotation angle and speed for
use in optimizing paper feed amount and speed.
• The Auto Sheet Feeder motor (ASF) encoder sensor monitors the rotation angle and speed of
the ASF motor shaft for use in optimizing paper pull-in amount and speed.
• The purge cam switch detects the drive positions of the purge cam.
• The cap lift cam switch detects the drive positions of the cap lift cam.
• The casing internal temperature thermistor monitors the temperature inside the machine. With
this thermistor signal, the controller determines the periodical automatic purge interval since
the casing internal temperature is almost equal to the ambient temperature of ink inside the
ink cartridges.
• There are four ink empty sensors, one for each color. The sensor actuator inside the ink
cartridge usually blocks the light path to indicate the presence of ink. When ink runs low
(near-empty state), the arm moves out of the beam, activating the sensor. The "Ink low"
message appears.
• There are four ink cartridge detection sensors, one for each color. The sensor detects whether
an ink cartridge is loaded.
The ON timing of the ink cartridge detection sensor and ink empty sensor enables the
controller to discriminate between a standard and high-yield ink cartridges.

Most sensors are photointerrupters consisting of a light-emitting diode and a light-sensitive

transistor as shown below. The only exception is the paper width sensor, which uses reflective
type. The illustration on the next page gives the sensor and actuator locations.
Actuator's end

Light-emitting Light-sensitive
diode transistor

The scanner cover sensor and the ink cartridge cover sensor use a carbon switch that consists of
a carbon on the rubber keypad and a carbon contact printed on the control panel PCB. Opening
the scanner cover or the ink cartridge cover releases the corresponding sensor actuator so that
the actuator is pressed against the rubber keypad by the spring force. Accordingly, the carbon
on the rubber keypad comes into contact with the carbon contact on the control panel PCB. The
conduction results in a voltage level change of the IC port, signaling the cover open.

3-42 Confidential
 ADF & document cover ASSY

Document front sensor

actuator
Document front sensor
Document rear sensor

Document rear sensor

actuator

(3_26_BHL9)
Document sensor PCB

Cap lift cam switch

(ASF encoder sensor PCB)
CR encoder sensor ASF encoder sensor
(Carriage PCB on which the ASF encoder disk
head thermistor is also mounted)

Paper width sensor (Maintenance unit)

Registration sensor Purge cam switch

Scanner cover sensor

(Registration sensor actuator
PCB)
(Control Panel PCB)

Ink cartridge cover

sensor actuator

PF encoder sensor (Ink cartridge detection

sensor PCB)

(PF encoder PCB) Ink cartridge detection

sensors

PF encoder disk Ink empty sensors

Registration sensor actuator (Ink empty sensor PCB on which

the casing internal temperature
CR encoder strip thermistor is also mounted)
(Head/carriage unit) (3_27_BHL9_A3)

Sensors and Actuators Locations

3-43 Confidential
3.3 CONTROL ELECTRONICS

3.3.1 Components
The following illustration shows the hardware components. The corresponding wiring diagrams
appear in Appendix 5.

WLAN*
LAN PC
*
WLAN PCB Backup battery Speaker
Power supply
LAN I/F USB PCB AC line

5 wires used in 5-wire 2-wire 5-wire

6-wire connector
housing
SDAA
2-wire
Line
MJ PCB
2-wire External telephone

Scanner cover sensor

5-wire Control panel PCB
Main Ink cartridge cover sensor
ASIC SDRAM
64MB
28-wire Color LCD

INK JET PRINTING & PAPER FEEDING

ROM MODEM 11-wire (Head 3) Carriage PCB
12MB CR encoder sensor Head/
13-wire (Head 1) carriage
Paper width sensor unit
EEPROM 12-wire (Head 2)
Head thermistor

2-wire Carriage motor

DC motor driver

Ink refill ASSY

Ink cartridge detection sensor PCB
7-wire
Ink cartridge detection sensors

Ink empty sensor PCB

9-wire Ink empty sensors
Casing internal temperature thermistor

Main PCB Maintenance unit

2-wire Purge cam switch Cap lift cam switch
2-wire

ASF motor unit

4-wire ASF encoder sensor
2-wire
DC motor driver ASF motor

4-wire PF encoder PCB

PF encoder sensor
7-wire
Registration sensor PCB
3-wire Registration sensor
2-wire
DC motor driver Paper feed motor

SCANNING
12-wire CIS unit
4-wire
Stepping motor driver CIS motor

ADF unit
Document sensor PCB
5-wire Document front sensor
Document rear sensor
Stepping motor driver 4-wire
ADF motor
Media 1 Media 2
PictBridge (xD/SD/MS (CF card)
card)
USB

(BlockDiagram_BHL9_A3)
- Digital camera
- USB flash memory drive
* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

3-44 Confidential
 CHAPTER 4
ERROR INDICATION AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

Confidential
 CHAPTER 4 ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter details error messages and codes that the incorporated self-diagnostic functions display if
any error or malfunction occurs. If any error message appears, refer to this chapter to find which
components should be checked or replaced.
The latter half of this chapter provides sample problems that could occur in the main sections of the
machine and related troubleshooting procedures. This will help service personnel pinpoint and repair
defective components.

CONTENTS

4.1 ERROR INDICATION ............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Equipment Errors ...................................................................................... 4-1
[1] Error messages appearing on the LCD............................................. 4-2
[2] Error codes contained in "MACHINE ERROR X X" messages ......... 4-7
4.1.2 Communications Errors............................................................................. 4-24
4.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................... 4-31
4.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................ 4-31
4.2.2 Precautions ............................................................................................... 4-31
4.2.3 Checking Prior to Troubleshooting ............................................................ 4-31
4.2.4 Troubleshooting Based on Problem Type ................................................. 4-33
[1] Control panel and LCD problems ...................................................... 4-33
[2] FAX problems.................................................................................... 4-33
[3] Communications problems................................................................ 4-33
[4] Paper/document feeding problems ................................................... 4-34
[5] Print-image problems ........................................................................ 4-35
[6] PC-driven printing problems.............................................................. 4-40
[7] Printing from memory cards--Compact Flash, Memory Stick,
SD Memory Card, xD-Picture Card and USB flash memory drive .... 4-41
[8] Wireless LAN (WLAN)* ..................................................................... 4-41
[9] Others ............................................................................................... 4-41
4.2.5 Problems Encountered Frequently in the Past.......................................... 4-42
[1] Paper jams ........................................................................................ 4-42
[2] Ink-related problems ......................................................................... 4-43
[3] Auto document feeder (ADF) malfunction......................................... 4-44
4.2.6 Possible Component Defects and Resulting Problems............................. 4-45
[1] ADF mechanism................................................................................ 4-45
[2] Scanner mechanism ......................................................................... 4-46
[3] Head/carriage unit drive and purge mechanisms.............................. 4-47
Confidential
[4] Print head mechanism ...................................................................... 4-48
[5] Sheet feeder (SF) mechanism .......................................................... 4-49
[6] Paper feeding mechanism ................................................................ 4-49
[7] Speaker ............................................................................................. 4-49
[8] Control panel..................................................................................... 4-50
[9] PCBs ................................................................................................. 4-50
[ 10 ] Adjustments/data in the memories .................................................... 4-51

Confidential
4.1 ERROR INDICATION

To help the user or the service personnel promptly locate the cause of a problem (if any), the
machine incorporates the self-diagnostic functions which display error messages for equipment
errors.

4.1.1 Equipment Errors

If an equipment error occurs, the machine emits an audible alarm (five short beeps twice) and
shows the error message on the LCD. For the error messages, see [ 1 ] below.
To display detailed error information, use Function code 82 described in Chapter 9, Section
9.4.28 (that is, make the machine enter the maintenance mode and then press the 8 and 2 keys).
Following the MACHINE ERROR, one of the error codes listed in [ 2 ] will appear on the LCD.

4-1 Confidential
[ 1 ] Error messages appearing on the LCD

4-2 Confidential
4-3 Confidential
 Check that you have subscribed to the
Caller ID service.

4-4 Confidential
4-5 Confidential
4-6 Confidential
[ 2 ] Error codes contained in "MACHINE ERROR X X" messages
Using Function code 82 (described in Chapter 9, Section 9.4.28) displays the most recent error
in the format of "MACHINE ERROR XX." The XX represents one of the error codes listed in
this section.
Note: When checking a PCB as instructed in the "Solution" column, also check its harness.
Note: To check sensors, use Function code 32 described in Chapter 9, Section 9.4.9 (that is,
press the 3 and 2 keys in the maintenance mode).

Error Code
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)

20 Cannot identify the ink Ink cartridge not loaded Reload the corresponding ink
21 cartridge loaded because correctly cartridge.
22 the signal values 20: Black ink
23 detected by the 21: Yellow ink
corresponding ink empty 22: Cyan ink
sensor and ink cartridge 23: Magenta ink
detection sensor are - Ink cartridge loaded after
different from the the ink cartridge cover has
specified values. been left open for 10 min-
utes or more
- Ink cartridge replaced
when the power is OFF
- Ink cartridge loaded very
quickly
- Ink cartridge halfway
taken in and out

Ink cartridge partially broken Replace the ink cartridge.

The ink cartridge loaded is Load the specified ink

not the specified one cartridge.

Ink empty sensor defective Replace the ink refill ASSY.

Ink empty sensor PCB

defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

24, 25 Not used.

4-7 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
26 Running out of ink. Running out of ink Replace or reload the ink
27 26: Black ink cartridge.
28 27: Yellow ink
29 28: Cyan ink
29: Magenta ink

Ink empty sensor PCB Replace the ink refill ASSY.

defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

2A Cannot detect ink Ink cartridge not loaded Replace or reload the ink
2B cartridges. 2A: Black ink cartridge.
2C 2B: Yellow ink
2D 2C: Cyan ink
2D: Magenta ink

Ink cartridge broken Replace the ink cartridge.

Ink cartridge detection Replace the ink refill ASSY.

sensor defective

Ink cartridge detection

sensor PCB defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

2E Not used.

2F Ink cartridge cover Ink cartridge cover sensor Replace the control panel PCB.
opened. (carbon switch) defective

Ink cartridge cover’s tab Replace the ink cartridge

broken cover.

Ink cartridge cover sensor Set the ink cartridge cover

actuator unhooked sensor actuator into place.

Rubber keypad defective Replace the rubber keypad.

Control panel PCB defective Replace the control panel PCB.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

4-8 Confidential
Error Code
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
3* Head/carriage unit travel Software malfunction Open and close the scanner
(except 3E) error. cover.
Unplug and plug the AC cord.
Any obstacles on the travel Remove obstacles.
path of the head/carriage unit
Clean and lubricate the CR
guide rail and CR support
chassis.

CR timing belt come off Set the CR timing belt into

place.
CR encoder strip stained or Replace the CR encoder strip.
scratched

Carriage PCB defective Replace the carriage PCB

ASSY.

Head/carriage unit broken Replace the head/carriage unit.

Carriage motor defective Replace the carriage motor.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB defective Replace the power supply

PCB.

Maintenance unit defective Replace the maintenance unit.

3E Recording error related ASF encoder disk, PF Replace the ASF motor ASSY,
to ASF motor, paper feed encoder disk, or CR encoder PF encoder disk, or CR
motor, and carriage strip stained or scratched encoder strip.
motor.
ASF, PF, or CR encoder Replace the ASF motor ASSY,
defective PF encoder/registration sensor
harness unit, or carriage PCB.

ASF, PF, or CR motor Check the ASF motor, paper

defective feed motor, and carriage motor,
then replace the defective
one(s).

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

40 The casing internal Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.
temperature thermistor
has detected abnormal Casing internal temperature Replace the ink refill ASSY.
temperature in the thermistor defective
machine.

41 Not used.

4-9 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
42 The head drive voltage Piezoelectric ceramic Replace the head/carriage unit.
has not dropped from the actuator or head driver
high to low level within defective
the specified period.
Carriage PCB defective Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

43 The head thermistor has Head flat cables not Correct those flat cables.
been opened or shorted connected correctly
abnormally.
Head flat cables broken Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.
Carriage PCB defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

44 The temperature of the Head property parameters Enter the correct parameter
print head driver has incorrect in the EEPROM values.
risen abnormally.
The head driver chip Air bubbles in the head/ Perform the initial purge.
temperature sensor in carriage unit
the head driver detects
Head flat cables and Correct those flat cables.
abnormally high
carriage-head flat cable not
temperature.
connected correctly

Head flat cables broken Replace the carriage PCB

ASSY.

Carriage-head flat cable Replace the head/carriage unit.

broken

Head/carriage unit broken

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

45 Not used.

46 The number of Purge counter overflown Replace both the ink absorber
performed purge box and flushing box and reset
sequences has reached their counters. (When you need
the limit. to replace the ink absorber box
The ink absorber box or flushing box, replace both.)
may be filled with (Refer to page 7-36 or page 9-
drained ink. 49.)

The number of flushing Flushing counter overflown

operations has reached
the limit.
The flushing box may be
filled with drained ink.

47 Not used.

4-10 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
48 Weak connection of the Head flat cables or carriage- Correct the connection of the
head flat cables. head flat cable broken or not head flat cables.
connected
Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Replace the head/carriage unit.

Replace the main PCB.

49 The head drive voltage Head flat cables and Correct those flat cables.
has not risen to the carriage-head flat cable not
specified level. connected correctly

Head/carriage unit defective Replace the carriage PCB

ASSY.

Replace the head/carriage unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB defective Replace the power supply

PCB.

4A-4E Not used.

4F The head drive voltage Piezoelectric ceramic Replace the carriage PCB
has dropped from the actuator defective (Cracks or ASSY.
high to low level in an rare short)
abnormally short period. Replace the head/carriage unit.
The head drive voltage
Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.
has not risen to the
specified level within
the specified period in
the self-diagnosis.

50 The purge cam switch Planetary arm assembly not Set the maintenance unit into
51 does not come ON or engaged correctly place.
OFF even after the purge
cam has been driven by If the planetary arm does not
the specified number of move smoothly, clean it.
pulses.
Purge cam switch harness Correct the connection.
not connected correctly

Purge cam switch broken Replace the maintenance unit.

Gear(s) on the maintenance

unit broken

Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

Power supply PCB defective Replace the power supply

PCB.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

4-11 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
52 The purge cam switch Planetary arm assembly not Set the maintenance unit into
does not come ON at engaged correctly place.
each detection point.
If the planetary arm does not
move smoothly, clean it.

Purge cam switch harness not Correct the connection to the

connected correctly main PCB.

PF encoder sensor defective Replace the PF encoder/

registration sensor harness unit.

ASF motor defective Replace the ASF motor.

Purge cam switch broken Replace the maintenance unit.

Gear(s) on the maintenance

unit broken
Abnormal load applied to the
purge cam

Paper feed motor broken Replace the engine unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

53-56 Not used.

57 The head/carriage unit Head cap unit, head wiper or Set these parts back into place.
does not return to the other parts on the If any part on the maintenance
home position (capping maintenance unit interfering unit does not operate smoothly,
position). with the head/carriage unit replace the unit.

ASF motor defective Replace the ASF motor.

CR encoder strip stained Replace the CR encoder strip.

Any obstacles on the travel Clean the CR guide rail and CR

path of the head/carriage unit support chassis.

Carriage PCB ASSY Replace the carriage PCB

defective ASSY.

Carriage motor defective Replace the carriage motor.

Head/carriage unit defective Replace the head/carriage unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB defective Replace the power supply

PCB.

4-12 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
58, 59 Not used.

5A Abnormal stop of purge Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials.

5B cam being driven machine
5C
PF encoder disk being in Replace the PF encoder disk.
contact with the upper cover
and deformed

PF encoder PCB defective Replace the PF encoder PCB.

Main drain tube bent Replace the ink absorber box.

Clutch gear broken Replace the maintenance unit.

Purge cam gear broken

Abnormal load applied to the

purge cam

Planetary arm assembly

broken

Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

PF roller gear L broken

Engine unit defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

Power supply PCB defective Replace the power supply

PCB.

5D Current protection for The driving current has Remove foreign materials.
the driver IC activated exceeded the limit due to an
when the purge cam was abnormal load applied to the Replace the clutch gear.
being driven. maintenance unit.
Replace the PF encoder disk.

Replace the PF encoder PCB.

Replace the ink absorber box.

5E Current protection for Replace the maintenance unit.

the driver IC activated
when the pump was in Replace the main PCB.
operation.
Replace the power supply
PCB.

Replace the engine unit.

4-13 Confidential
Error Code
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)

5F Not used.

60 Paper width sensor Paper width sensor (media Readjust the left and right
61 (media sensor) error. sensor) adjustment failure margins.
62
Paper width sensor defective Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.
Head flat cables broken

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

63-6B Not used.

6C Current protection Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials and

activated due to an paper path close the scanner cover
overload applied to the (scanner unit).
paper feed motor.
Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

6D, 6E Not used.

6F ASF motor does not stop Malfunction caused by Open and close the scanner
at the intended timing. overload cover (scanner unit).
Unplug and plug the AC cord.

Relevant motor harness not Correct the connection.

connected correctly

ASF encoder sensor Replace the ASF motor ASSY.

defective

ASF motor defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

70 Cannot detect the ON/ Cap lift cam switch defective Replace the maintenance unit.
71 OFF state of cap lift cam
switch. ASF encoder sensor Replace the ASF motor ASSY.
defective

ASF motor defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

4-14 Confidential
Error Code
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)

72 Cannot detect the origin Cap lift cam switch defective Replace the maintenance unit.
of the cap lift cam.
ASF encoder sensor Replace the ASF motor ASSY.
defective

ASF motor defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

73 Fails to switch the cap Cap lift cam switch defective Replace the maintenance unit.
lift cam positions.
ASF encoder sensor Replace the ASF motor ASSY.
defective

ASF motor defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

74-79 Not used.

7A Abnormal stop of cap Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials and
lift cam. head capping mechanism clean the mechanism.

ASF encoder sensor Replace the ASF motor ASSY.

defective

ASF motor defective

Cap lift cam switch defective Replace the maintenance unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

7B-7C Not used.

7D Current protection for Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials and
the driver IC activated head capping mechanism. clean the mechanism.
when the cap lift cam
was being driven. ASF encoder sensor Replace the ASF motor ASSY.
defective

ASF motor defective

Cap lift cam switch defective Replace the maintenance unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

7E No head parameters No head property data has Enter the head property data.
stored in the EEPROM. been entered
(This code may appear
only in the maintenance Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.
mode.)

7F Not used.

4-15 Confidential
 Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
80 At the start of FAX Paper smaller than the Load the correct size of paper.
message printing, the specified size loaded in the
controller detects that paper tray
paper is smaller than A4
size in width.* Paper width sensor (media Adjust the margin for
sensor) not adjusted borderless printing with
Function code 66 in the
maintenance mode.

Paper width sensor defective Replace the carriage PCB

ASSY.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

81 In printing except FAX Paper smaller than the - Load the correct size of
and list printing, the specified size loaded in the paper.
controller detects that paper tray - Press the Color Start or
paper is smaller than the Black Start key.
specified size in width.
Paper width sensor not Adjust the margin for
adjusted borderless printing with
Function code 66 in the
maintenance mode.

Paper width sensor defective Replace the carriage PCB

ASSY.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

82 Recording paper jam in Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials.

paper pull-in operation. paper path
(Although the
registration sensor Paper printed or paper with Replace the paper with blank
detects the paper, the blackish leading edge fed paper.
paper width sensor fails
Head flat cable connection Insert the head flat cables
to detect the leading
failure correctly.
edge of paper.)
Paper width sensor defective Replace the carriage PCB
ASSY.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

* For MFC only

4-16 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
83 Recording paper jam. Paper double feeding caused Reload paper.
(At the start of paper by incorrect loading in the
feeding, the registration paper tray
sensor is already ON.) Bank ASSY
Paper

Correct

Wrong

Bank ASSY deformed Replace the bank ASSY.

Bank ASSY

Paper tray

Registration sensor actuator Set the registration sensor

unhooked actuator into place.

Registration sensor actuator Replace the registration sensor

defective actuator.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

Registration sensor defective Replace the PF encoder/

registration sensor harness unit.

4-17 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
84 Recording paper jam. Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials.
(The registration sensor paper path
sticks to ON after
completion of paper Registration sensor actuator Correct the surrounding parts
ejection operation.) caught on the surrounding on which the actuator caught.
parts

Registration sensor actuator Replace the registration sensor

defective actuator.

Registration sensor defective Replace the PF encoder/

registration sensor harness unit.

PF timing belt come off Set the PF timing belt into

place.

Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

The paper ejection roller

does not rotate correctly

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

85-87 Not used.

88 Recording paper jam. Jam clear cover not closed Close the jam clear cover
(Even after paper correctly correctly.
pulling-in operation, the
registration sensor is still Registration sensor harness Correct the connection.
OFF.) not connected correctly

Bank ASSY deformed Replace the bank ASSY.

Bank ASSY

Paper tray

Paper pull-in rollers Replace the paper pull-in

defective rollers.

Mode switching lever (at the Clean the mode switching

right end of CR guide rail) lever.
not sliding smoothly

At the ends of the paper feed Replace the engine unit.

roller shaft, any gear(s)
damaged

Paper feed motor defective

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

89 Not used.

4-18 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
8A The paper feed motor Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials.
does not rotate. machine

Paper feed motor harness not Reconnect the paper feed

connected correctly motor harness.

Abnormal load applied to the Replace the PF-related gear(s).

paper feed roller
PF-related gear(s) broken

PF encoder disk stained or Replace the PF encoder disk.

scratched

PF encoder sensor defective Replace the PF encoder/

registration sensor harness unit.

Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

8B The paper feed motor Abnormal load applied to the Replace the PF-related gear(s).
stops suddenly. paper feed roller
PF-related gear(s) broken

PF encoder disk stained or Replace the PF encoder disk.

scratched

PF encoder sensor defective Replace the PF encoder/

registration sensor harness unit.

Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

8C Current protection for The driving current has Replace the PF encoder disk.
the driver IC activated in exceeded the limit due to an
paper feeding operation. abnormal load applied to the Replace the engine unit.
PF-related gears and rollers.
Replace the main PCB.

8D The paper feed motor PF encoder disk stained or Replace the PF encoder disk.
rotates in the reverse scratched
direction.
PF encoder disk dislocated

PF encoder sensor defective Replace the PF encoder/

registration sensor harness unit.

Paper feed motor defective Replace the engine unit.

Abnormal load applied to the Check the PF roller gear and its
paper feed roller related gears.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

8E Not used.

4-19 Confidential
 Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
8F The paper feed motor is Software malfunction Open and close the scanner
being driven and cannot cover.
be stopped. Unplug and plug the AC cord.

Paper feed motor harness not Correct the connection.

connected correctly

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

90-A0 Not used.

A1 Scanner cover (scanner Scanner cover sensor Replace the control panel PCB.
unit) opened (carbon switch) broken

Scanner cover sensor Set the scanner cover sensor

actuator unhooked actuator into place.

Rubber keypad defective Replace the rubber keypad.

Control panel PCB defective Replace the control panel PCB.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

A2 During scanning or Document jam Remove the jammed

ejecting, a document of document.
90 cm* or longer is
detected. Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials.
machine

Document rear sensor Correct the surrounding parts

actuator caught on the on which the actuator caught.
surrounding parts

Document rear sensor Replace the document sensor

broken PCB.

Document ejection roller Replace the ADF unit.

defective or not rotating

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

* This value is default and can be modified by WSW16, selector 7.

4-20 Confidential
 Error Code
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
A3 The document rear Document jam Remove the jammed
sensor does not come document.
ON during document
Foreign materials in the Remove foreign materials.
pull-in operation.
machine
Document rear sensor Correct the surrounding parts
actuator caught on the on which the actuator caught.
surrounding parts
Document rear sensor Replace the document sensor
broken PCB.
ADF motor defective Replace the ADF motor.
ADF-related gear(s) broken Replace the lower ADF chute
ASSY.
Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.
A4 Not used.
A5 FAX scanning failure CIS defective Replace the scanner cover
(1st time)*. White reference film stained (scanner unit).
A6 FAX scanning failure in the scanner cover
(retry)*.
Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.
A7 Mismatch between the Scanner cover containing the Check the CIS type mounted
type of the CIS mounted improper CIS type mounted and enter the new CIS type into
and EEPROM data. at repair. the EEPROM with Function
code 59 in the maintenance
mode. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.17.)

A8 Color parameter --- Install the latest firmware.

matching error. (Used
for monitoring bugs at
the factory.)
A9-AE Not used.
AF CIS positioning error. CIS flat cable broken or not - Correct the cable connection.
connected properly - Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).
CIS motor harness not Correct the harness
connected properly connection.

CIS motor defective Replace the scanner cover

(scanner unit).
CIS drive unit defective
CIS defective
Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

B0-B8 Not used.

* For MFC only

4-21 Confidential
 Error Code
Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
B9 Light intensity error of CIS defective Replace the scanner cover
the LED array (scanner unit)
(Exceeding the upper
limit) Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

BA-BC Not used.

BD Black level data error. CIS defective Replace the scanner cover
(scanner unit).

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

BE-DE Not used.

DF, E0 Modem error. SDAA chip defective Turn the machine off and then
on.
Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

E1 Not used.

E2 Wired LAN MAC MAC address not written Replace the main PCB.
address not registered. into the main PCB correctly

E3 Wireless LAN MAC WLAN PCB defective Replace the WLAN PCB.
address not registered.

E4, E5 Not used.

E6 Write error in Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

EEPROM.

E7-E9 Not used.

EA Document removed at Document front sensor Correct the surrounding parts

phase B.* actuator caught on the on which the actuator caught.
surrounding parts

Document front sensor Replace the document sensor

defective PCB.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

EB Not used.

EC LCD connection LCD flat cable not connected Correct the connection.
detection failure. correctly

LCD unit defective Replace the LCD unit.

Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.

ED-F6 Not used.

F7 Media module detection Main PCB defective Replace the main PCB.
failure.

* Phase B: FAX negotiation stage between sending machine and receiving machine

4-22 Confidential
Error Code Symptom Probable Cause Solution
(Hex)
F8 Battery harness Battery harness not connected Correct the connection.
connection failure. correctly
(Available in the
maintenance mode only)

F9-FF Not used.

4-23 Confidential
4.1.2 Communications Errors
If a communications error occurs, the machine:
emits an audible alarm (intermittent beeping) for approximately 4 seconds,
displays the corresponding error message, and
prints out the transmission verification report if the machine is in sending operation.

4-24 Confidential
„ Definition of Error Codes on the Communications List

(1) Calling

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

10 08 Wrong number called.

11 01 No dial tone detected before start of dialing.

11 02 Busy tone detected before dialing.

11 03 2nd dial tone not detected.

11 05 No loop current detected.*

11 06 Busy tone detected after dialing or called.

11 07 No response from the remote station in sending.

11 10 Unobtainable tone detected after dialing.

17 07 No response from the calling station in receiving.

* Available in German models only.

(2) Command reception

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

20 01 Unable to detect a flag field.

20 02 Carrier was OFF for 200 milliseconds or longer.

20 03 Abort detected ("1" in succession for 7 bits or more).

20 04 Overrun detected.

20 05 A frame for 3 seconds or more received.

20 06 CRC error in answerback.

20 07 Error command received.

20 08 Invalid command received.

20 09 Command ignored once for document setting or for dumping-

out at turn-around transmission.

20 0A T5 time-out error.

20 0B CRP received.

20 0C EOR and NULL received.

4-25 Confidential
(3) Compatibility [checking the NSF and DIS]

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

32 01 Remote terminal only with V.29 capability in 2400 or 4800 bps

transmission.

32 02 Remote terminal not ready for polling.

32 10 Remote terminal not equipped with password function or its

password switch OFF.

32 11 Remote terminal not equipped with or not ready for confidential

mailbox function.

32 12 Remote terminal not equipped with or not ready for relay

broadcasting function.

32 13 No confidential mail in the remote terminal.

32 14 The available memory space of the remote terminal is less than

that required for reception of the confidential or relay broad-
casting instruction.

32 18 Remote terminal not equipped with color function.

4-26 Confidential
(4) Instructions received from the remote terminal [checking the NSC, DTC, NSS, and
DCS]

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

40 02 Illegal coding system requested.

40 03 Illegal recording width requested.

40 05 ECM requested although not allowed.

40 06 Polled while not ready.

40 07 No document to send when polled.

40 10 Nation code or manufacturer code not coincident.

Polled by any other manufacturers' terminal while waiting for

40 13
secure polling.

40 17 Invalid resolution selected.

40 20 Invalid full-color mode requested.

(5) Command reception [checking the NSF and DIS after transmission of NSS and DCS]

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

50 01 Vertical resolution capability changed after compensation of

background color.

4-27 Confidential
(6) ID checking

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

Password plus "lower 4 digits of telephone number" not

63 01
coincident.

63 02 Password not coincident.

63 03 Polling ID not coincident.

(7) DCN reception

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

74 DCN received.

(8) TCF transmission/reception

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

80 01 Fallback impossible.

4-28 Confidential
(9) Signal isolation

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

90 01 Unable to detect video signals and commands within 6 seconds

after CFR is transmitted.

90 02 Received PPS containing invalid page count or block count.

(10) Video signal reception

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

Error correction sequence not terminated even at the final

A0 03
transmission speed for fallback.

A0 11 Receive buffer empty. (5-second time-out)

Receive buffer full during operation except receiving into

A0 12
memory.

A0 13 Decoding error continued on 500 lines.

A0 14 Decoding error continued for 10 seconds.

A0 15 Time-out: 13 seconds or more for one-line transmission.

A0 16 RTC not found and carrier OFF signal detected for 6 seconds.

A0 17 RTC found but no command detected for 60 seconds.

AA 18 Receive buffer full during receiving into memory.

A0 19 No video data to be sent.

Unable to continue to receive color FAX. (Remaining ink

A0 20
insufficient)

A8 01 RTN, PIN, or ERR received at the calling terminal.*

A9 01 RTN, PIN, or ERR received at the called terminal.*

* Available in German models only

4-29 Confidential
(11) General communications-related

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

B0 02 Unable to receive the next-page data.

B0 03 Unable to receive polling even during turn-around transmission

due to call reservation.

B0 04 PC interface error.

Communication canceled by pressing the STOP key before

BF 01
establishment of FAX communication*.

Communication canceled by pressing the STOP key after

BF 02
establishment of FAX communication*.

Transmission canceled due to a scanning error caused by no

BF 03 document or document feed problem in ADF scanning in real
time transmission.

* Establishment of FAX communication

FAX communication is established when the calling station receives a DIS (reception capability) signal from the
called station and the called station receives an NSS or DCS (communications test) signal from the calling station.

(12) Maintenance mode

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

E0 01 Failed to detect 1300 Hz signal in burn-in operation.

E0 02 Failed to detect PB signals in burn-in operation.

(13) Equipment error

Code 1 Code 2 Causes

FF X X Equipment error. (For X X, refer to Section 4.1.1 [ 2 ].)

4-30 Confidential
4.2 TROUBLESHOOTING

4.2.1 Introduction
This section gives the service personnel some of the troubleshooting procedures to be followed
if an error or malfunction occurs with the machine. It is impossible to anticipate all of the
possible problems which may occur in future and determine the troubleshooting procedures, so
this section covers some sample problems. However, those samples will help service personnel
pinpoint and repair other defective elements if he/she analyzes and examines them well.

4.2.2 Precautions
Be sure to observe the following to prevent the secondary troubles from happening in addition
to the safety precautions given in Chapter 6, Section 6.1.

WARNING
Always unplug the AC power cord from the outlet when removing the covers and PCBs,
adjusting the mechanisms, or conducting continuity testing with a circuit tester.

(1) When disconnecting the connectors, do not pull the lead wires but hold the connector
housings.
(2) Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts.
Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static
electricity charged in your body. When transporting PCBs, be sure to wrap them in
conductive sheets.
When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
After repairing the defective section, be sure to check again if the repaired section works
correctly. Also record the troubleshooting procedure so that it would be of use for future trouble
occurrence.

4.2.3 Checking Prior to Troubleshooting

Prior to proceeding to the troubleshooting procedures given in Section 4.2.4, make the
following initial checks:

Environmental conditions
Check that:
(1) The machine is placed on a flat, firm surface.
(2) The machine is used in a clean environment at or near normal room temperature (10°C to
35°C) with normal relative humidity (20 to 80%).
(3) The machine is not exposed to direct sunlight or harmful gases.

Power requirements
Check that:
(1) The power supply specified on the rating plate on the machine is used. The supply voltage
stays within the rating ±10%.
(2) Each voltage level on AC input lines and DC lines is correct.
(3) All cables and harnesses are firmly connected.
4-31 Confidential
Recording paper
Check that:
(1) A recommended type of recording paper is used.
(2) The recording paper is not dampened.

Ink cartridges
(1) Check that all of four ink cartridges are loaded.

Head/carriage unit
(1) Repeat the purge operation (Function code 76) several times. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section
9.4.25.)
(2) Clean the print surface of the head/carriage unit.

4-32 Confidential
4.2.4 Troubleshooting Based on Problem Type
[ 1 ] Control panel and LCD problems

Problem Check:

(1) LCD shows nothing. • LCD and its flat cable

• Panel-main harness
• Control panel PCB
• Power supply PCB
• Main PCB

(2) Control panel inoperative. • Panel-main harness

• Control panel PCB
• Rubber keypads
• Main PCB

[ 2 ] FAX problems

Problem Check:

(1) No faxes will be able to be sent. • Rubber keypads

• Control panel PCB
• Main PCB
• MJ PCB

(2) Speed dialing will not work. • Ordinary dialing function

If it works normally, check the main PCB; if not, refer to item
(1) above.

(3) Dial does not switch between • Main PCB

tone and pulse.

(4) The ringer does not sound. • Speaker

• Main PCB
• MJ PCB

[ 3 ] Communications problems

Problem Check:

(1) No tone is transmitted. • Main PCB

• MJ PCB

4-33 Confidential
[ 4 ] Paper/document feeding problems

Problem Check:

(1) The "Enter Fax No." message • Sensors by using Function code 32 in the maintenance mode
does not appear although (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.9.)
documents are set. • Document front sensor actuator
• Document sensor PCB
• Main PCB

(2) Document not fed. • ADF and its related sections

• Foreign materials in the document path
• ADF motor and its harness
• Document feed roller and its related gears
• Document sensor PCB
• Main PCB

(3) Document double feeding • ADF parts

(4) Document jam • Document rear sensor actuator

• Foreign materials in the document path
• Sensors by using Function code 32 in the maintenance mode
(Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.9.)
• ADF motor
• Main PCB

(5) Recording paper not fed. • Paper pull-in roller holder

• Base pad in the paper tray
• Jam clear cover
• PF-related gears
• Main PCB
• Paper feed motor
• Paper tray
• ASF-related gears
• ASF motor

(6) Recording paper jam • Paper feeding mechanism

• Foreign materials in the paper path
• Check that the carriage-head flat cable is connected to the
carriage PCB.
• Carriage PCB
• Main PCB

4-34 Confidential
[ 5 ] Print-image problems
If there is any problem with any image printed, first make a copy using the machine.
If the copied image is normal, the cause of the problem may be the sending station (e.g., PC and
digital camera) or the memory card inserted; if it is abnormal, proceed with the following
checks:

Examples of Defective Images

Completely blank All black Random color Light Dark

Straight vertical Blurred vertical White vertical

Ink splash Ink splash
stripes stripes streaks

Stained leading Overlapping

Print edges not Random missing White horizontal
edge of recording lines over the
aligned dots streaks
paper whole page

Stains in the
Overlapping lines Separated lines at
Separated lines Characters center of, or over
at the trailing the trailing edge
over the whole having shadows the whole page
edge of the of the recording
page (ghost) of, the recording
recording paper paper
paper

VWXYZ

4-35 Confidential
 Problem Action to be taken

(1) Completely blank At the scanner

Check that the document is placed facing in the correct direction.
In ADF scanning, is the document placed face up in the document tray?
In flat-bed scanning, is the document placed face down on the scanner
glass?

Check the following components:

- Scanner cover (CIS flat cable)
- Main PCB
(2) Random color
At the printer
• Check the ink cartridges. If any cartridges have run out of ink, replace
them.
• Perform a head cleaning operation.
• Check the connection of the head flat cables on the main PCB. (If
either of those cables is broken or damaged, replace it.)
• Check the head property data. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.21.)
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Replace the main PCB.
• Clean the head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a Rubycel
stick. For the cleaning procedure, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.2
"CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT."
• Replace the maintenance unit.
• Check that the drain tubes are not bent.

(3) All black At the scanner

Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS flat cable)
- Main PCB

At the printer
Check the following components:
- Head/carriage unit and carriage PCB ASSY
- Main PCB

4-36 Confidential
 Problem Action to be taken

(4) Light At the scanner

Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS unit)
- Main PCB

At the printer
Check the following components:
- Ink cartridges
- Head/carriage unit and carriage PCB ASSY
- Main PCB
- Power supply PCB
- Head property data (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.21.)
- Maintenance unit

(5) Dark At the scanner

Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS unit)
- Main PCB

At the printer side

• Perform the purge operation (Function code 76) several times to
remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. If the problem persists,
replace the head/carriage unit. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.25.)
Check the following components:
- Ink cartridges
- Head/carriage unit and carriage PCB ASSY
- Main PCB
- Power supply PCB
- Head property data (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.21.)
- Maintenance unit

(6) Straight or blurred, black or Scanner

white, vertical stripes Check the following components:
- Scanner cover (CIS unit)
- Scanner glass

Printer
• Check whether paper is coming into contact with any components
other than the ones it should during ejecting.
• Check the CR encoder strip for stains or scratches. (If the CR encoder
strip is not hooked properly, correct it.)

4-37 Confidential
 Problem Action to be taken

(7) Ink splash Printer

• Perform the purge operation (Function code 76) several times to
remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.25.)
• Check the ink cartridges. Any of them has run out of ink or the ink
viscosity has been increased, so replace it.
• Check the head property data (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.21.)
• Check that the main drain tube is not bent.
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Replace the main PCB.
• Replace the power supply PCB.
• Replace the maintenance unit.

(8) Print edges not aligned Printer

• Check the alignment of vertical print lines with Function code 65 in the
maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.19.)
• Perform the print head skew compensation with the head skew adjuster
knob. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].
• Check the head/carriage unit.
• Check the CR encoder strip for stains or scratches. (If the CR encoder
strip is not hooked properly, correct it.)
• Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit. (Refer to
Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].)
• Check the height adjustment mechanism of the head/carriage unit
(Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2.3.)
• If the "head-platen gap offset" is enabled with assurance mode switch
AMS 02 (Function code 88), align the vertical print lines (Function
code 65). (Refer to Chapter 9, Sections 9.4.30 and 9.4.19.)

(9) Random missing dots Printer

• Perform the purge operation (Function code 76) several times to
remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.25.)
• Check the ink cartridges. If any cartridges have run out of ink, replace
them.
• Check that the carriage-head flat cable is connected to the carriage
PCB.
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Check the connection of the head flat cables on the main PCB. (If
either of those cables is broken or damaged, replace it.)
• Replace the main PCB.
• Clean the head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a Rubycel
stick. For the cleaning procedure, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.2
"CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT."
• Replace the maintenance unit.

4-38 Confidential
 Problem Action to be taken

(10)White horizontal streaks • Perform the purge operation (Function code 76) several times to
remove dust or air bubbles from its nozzles. (Refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.25.)
• Replace the head/carriage unit.
• Check the paper feed-related rollers.
• Perform the print head skew compensation with the head skew adjuster
knob. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].
• Clean the head caps and wiper of the maintenance unit with a Rubycel
stick. For the cleaning procedure, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.2
"CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT."

(11)Stained leading edge of Printer

recording paper • Perform a head cleaning operation.
• Check that the head/carriage unit is set into place.
• Check the height adjustment mechanism of the head/carriage unit
(Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.2.3.)
• If the "head-platen gap offset" is enabled with assurance mode switch
AMS 02 (Function code 88), align the vertical print lines (Function
code 65). (Refer to Chapter 9, Sections 9.4.30 and 9.4.19.)

(12)Overlapping or separated lines • Adjust the paper feeding correction value of the paper feed roller with
over the whole page Function code 58 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 7,
Section 7.2, [ 5 ].)
• Perform the print head skew compensation with the head skew adjuster
knob. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 4 ].

(13)Overlapping or separated lines • Adjust the paper feeding correction value of the paper ejection roller
at the trailing edge of the with Function code 58 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 7,
recording paper Section 7.2, [ 5 ].)

4-39 Confidential
 Problem Action to be taken

(14)Characters having shadows • Adjust the paper feeding correction values of the paper feed roller and
(ghost) paper ejection roller with Function code 58 in the maintenance mode.
VWXYZ
(Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2, [ 5 ].)
• Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit with Function
code 63 in the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2,
[ 4 ].)
• Replace the PF encoder disk.
• Replace the PF encoder PCB.

(15)Stains in the center of, or over • Use the specified type of paper. (Do not use short grain paper.)
the whole page of, the • Enable the "secure paper feed mode" referring to the USER’S GUIDE.
recording paper

[ 6 ] PC-driven printing problems

Problem Action to be taken

(1) PC-driven printing is • Interface with the host computer

impossible. • PC interface cable
• Main PCB
• USB interface
• Network interface

4-40 Confidential
 [ 7 ] Printing from memory cards--Compact Flash, Memory Stick, SD Memory Card,
xD-Picture Card and USB flash memory drive

Problem Action to be taken

(1) No image data can be read. • Insertion direction of memory cards

- Insert a Compact Flash card, SD Memory Card, or xD-Picture Card
with the label side facing up.
- Insert a Memory Stick card with the cutout corner leading and
facing towards the left.
• Memory cards
- Formatted?
- Any data in the memory card?
- Images stored in the memory card are in EXIF2.0-compliant JPEG
file format (having extension .JPG)?
• Main PCB

(2) More than one memory card • The machine can recognize only a single memory card at a time even if
cannot be recognized. it has two cards in the two slots. Only the first inserted one can be
recognized.
If only a single memory card is inserted, refer to item (1) above.

(3) Media printing is impossible. • Check whether the memory is full.

[ 8 ] Wireless LAN (WLAN)*

Problem Action to be taken

(1) PC-driven printing via the Check the following:

wireless LAN is impossible. - The address has not been changed at both the machine and PC.
- Connection between the WLAN PCB and the main PCB
- WLAN PCB

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

[ 9 ] Others

Problem Action to be taken

(1) When the power is turned on Check the following components:

(when the AC power cord is - Scanner cover (CIS flat cable)
plugged into an electrical - Main PCB
outlet), the scanner makes a
grating noise.

4-41 Confidential
4.2.5 Problems Encountered Frequently in the Past
This section lists the three problems most frequently encountered during on-site service in the
past.
- Paper jams
- Ink-related problems
- Auto document feeder (ADF) failure

[ 1 ] Paper jams
A paper jam may occur not only due to machine malfunction but also to the user's actions.
NOTE: In some cases, foreign material that has found its way into the machine without the user
realizing can be the cause of a paper jam. Instruct the user to place nothing on top of the
machine that might fall into it.
NOTE: When removing foreign materials from the machine, take special care not to
contaminate or scratch the CR encoder strip. If the encoder strip is contaminated or scratched,
replace it. (Refer to Chapter 6, Section 6.1.11.)
NOTE: After removing jammed paper from the machine, be sure to check that no fragment of
paper remains in the machine.

Problems due to the user's actions

Check Possible causes Problems that may result

Recording paper Paper not suited to use with the machine Paper with labels attached, for
was used. example, may leave labels inside
the machine.

For foreign materials Fragments of paper that were left behind Foreign materials can hinder the
when previous paper jams occurred. paper feed.
Foreign materials such as tacks have
found their way into the machine.

Problems due to machine malfunction

Check Possible causes Problems that may result

Star wheels on star Star wheels became dislocated when Dislocated star wheels can hinder
wheel holder paper jam occurred. paper feed.

Sensors and actuators Any sensor(s) not working. If a sensor does not turn on, the
related roller(s) will not rotate.
Bank ASSY The bank ASSY is deformed. A deformed section on the bank
Bank ASSY
ASSY can cause double-feeding.

Paper tray

CR encoder strip The CR encoder strip is stained. A stained CR encoder strip can
cause a carriage drive error during
printing that will stop the printing
operation.

4-42 Confidential
[ 2 ] Ink-related problems
Problems of this nature may arise not only due to machine malfunction but also to the user's
actions.
IMPORTANT: In many cases, the user fails to set ink cartridges in place.
Problems due to the user's actions
Check Possible causes Problems that may result
Ink cartridges - Ink cartridges are not inserted fully The machine will not be able to
into the ink refill ASSY. print.
- One or more of the ink cartridges are
not loaded.
- One or more of the ink cartridges has
run out of ink.

Problems due to machine malfunction

Check Possible causes Problems that may result
Head/carriage unit - Air bubbles, high viscosity ink, or Dot missing occurs on the
foreign materials have found their printout.
way into the head/carriage unit. The machine will not be able to
- Head flat cables are broken. print or drive the head/carriage
- The carriage-head flat cable has not unit.
been inserted into the carriage PCB.
Maintenance unit - Air bubbles, high viscosity ink, or Head cleaning operation will not
foreign materials get into the be possible and/or the
maintenance unit. maintenance unit will not work.
- Torque not transmitted.
- Drain tube bent or pinched.
FB unit The CIS unit is weak in identifying The quality of print colors in
colors. copying operation will be low.

4-43 Confidential
[ 3 ] Auto document feeder (ADF) malfunction
An ADF failure may occur not only due to machine malfunction but also to the user's actions.
Problems due to the user's actions

Check Possible causes Problems that may result

Document guides The document guides are not positioned Documents will skew.
to match the width of document(s)
loaded.
Inside the ADF - Foreign materials have found their Foreign materials can hinder
way into ADF. document feeding.
- The size of the document loaded is The document will jam inside the
smaller than the specified size. ADF.

Problems due to machine malfunction

Check Possible causes Problems that may result

ADF The spring plates of the ADF parts are A document will stop halfway
deformed. through feeding.
The ADF parts are deformed or worn. Two or more sheets of documents
will be fed through at once.
Document front sensor - The document front sensor is No document will be drawn in or
defective. recognized by the machine.
- The document front sensor actuator is Even placing a document in the
deformed. ADF cannot switch to "ADF
scanning."
Document rear sensor - The document rear sensor is defective. A document will stop halfway
- The document rear sensor actuator is through feeding or will not be
deformed. recognized by the machine.

ADF motor The ADF motor does not rotate. No document will be drawn in.
Main PCB The motor driver IC is defective. No document will be drawn in.

4-44 Confidential
4.2.6 Possible Component Defects and Resulting Problems
This section lists possible component defects and what happens due to them. It also describes
what happens if the necessary adjustments or data settings into the memories is not made.

[ 1 ] ADF mechanism

Defective component Result Error codes

ADF motor - Document will not be able to be fed. ---

Document feed roller - Documents will jam. A2, A3

- Documents will skew.
- Documents will not be able to be fed.

Separation pad - Two or more sheets of documents will be fed at once. ---

Document front sensor - Document draw-in operation will not start even though A3
actuator documents have been set.

Document rear sensor - Document draw-in operation will continue even though A2, A3
actuator all documents have been fed into the machine.

4-45 Confidential
[ 2 ] Scanner mechanism

Defective component Result Error codes

CIS unit - Any of the following images may appear on the printout: BD, AF

- When the power is turned on, abnormal noises will be

heard from the machine.
- Any of the following errors occurs:
- Dark level offset data level error for scanning
- Gain control data level error for scanning
- Scan area right/left edge detection error
- Horizontal scanning edge reduction/enlargement
detection error in scanning area setting
- White/black level data error
- Scan starting edge detection error

CIS flat cable - When the power is turned on, the "Unable to Init. AF" AF
appears on the LCD.

Scanner drive unit - When the power is turned on, abnormal noises will be ---
heard from the machine.

4-46 Confidential
[ 3 ] Head/carriage unit drive and purge mechanisms

Defective component Result Error codes

Head/carriage unit - Any of the following images may appear on the printout: ---

Carriage motor - The head/carriage unit will not be able to travel 30, 31, 32, 33
normally.
- When the power is turned on, the "Unable to Init. 3"
appears on the LCD.
- The following image may appear on the printout:

CR encoder strip - The head/carriage unit will not be able to travel 30, 31, 32, 33
normally.
- Any of the following images may appear on the printout:

Ink cartridge PCB - The "Cannot Print" message will appear even though 26, 27, 28, 29
there is ink.
- Even though the ink has run out, the "Cannot Print"
message will not appear.

Paper width sensor - A paper jam will occur. 80, 82

(Media sensor)
- Print on the platen without paper. ---

4-47 Confidential
 Defective component Result Error codes

Maintenance unit - Any of the following images may appear on the printout: ---
Head caps or wiper

Tube pump - The tube pump will not draw out ink from the head ---
nozzles.

Purge cam switch - The purge cam switch will not detect the purge cam ON/ 50, 51, 52
OFF timing.

Cap lift cam switch - The cap lift cam switch will not detect the ON/OFF 70, 71, 72
timing of the cap lift cam.

[ 4 ] Print head mechanism

Defective component Result Error codes

Head/carriage unit and - Any of the following images may appear on the printout: ---
carriage PCB ASSY

4-48 Confidential
[ 5 ] Sheet feeder (SF) mechanism

Defective component Result Error codes

Bank ASSY - Two or more sheets of paper will be fed at once. 82, 83, 88
(shown on page 4-42) - No paper will be fed.

[ 6 ] Paper feeding mechanism

Defective component Result Error codes

Paper feed roller - Any of the following images may appear on the printout: ---
Paper ejection roller
(If the paper feed roller or
paper ejection roller is
defective, it is necessary
to replace the engine
unit.)

PF encoder disk - The following image may appear on the printout: ---
PF encoder sensor VWXYZ

[ 7 ] Speaker

Defective component Result Error codes

Speaker - No key clicks will be heard. ---

- The ringer will not sound.
- No tone will be transmitted.

4-49 Confidential
[ 8 ] Control panel

Defective component Result Error codes

Rubber keypad - Keys will not work. ---

Control panel PCB - Keys will not work. ---

- The LEDs will not light.

LCD - The LCD will show nothing. ---

[ 9 ] PCBs

Defective component Result Error codes

Main PCB - No faxes will be able to be sent. ---

- No phone calls will be able to be made.
- Copying will not be possible.
- PC-driven printing will not be possible.
- Scanning will not be possible.
- The machine will not be able to be turned on.
- Any of the following images may appear on the printout:

- The ringer will not sound.

MJ PCB - No faxes will be able to be sent. D*

- The ringer will not sound.
- No tone will be detected.
- The machine will not be able to switch to the external
telephone.

Power supply PCB - The machine will not be able to be turned on. ---
- The LED will not light.
- The LCD will show nothing.

4-50 Confidential
[ 10 ] Adjustments/data in the memories

Adjustment/data
setting error in the Error
following Result Refer to: codes
components:

EEPROM customizing - The machine will not work as specified - Chapter 9, Section
code for that model or that shipping 9.4.23
destination. - Appendix 3

ID code - The machine will not be able to be - Chapter 7, Section

identified by the PC connected to it via 7.3, [ 9 ]
USB.

Head property data (in - The print quality will deteriorate. - Chapter 7, Section
the EEPROM) 7.2, [ 1 ]
- Chapter 9, Section
9.4.21

Correction of head - Any of the following images may appear - Chapter 7, Section
positioning error on the printout: 7.2, [ 4 ]

Updating of the paper - Any of the following images may appear - Chapter 7, Section
feeding correction on the printout: 7.2, [ 5 ]
value for the paper feed - Chapter 9, Section
roller/paper ejection 9.4.16
roller (Function code
58)

Setting of the CIS - The white and black level data will not - Chapter 9, Section
scanner area be compensated properly. 9.4.15
- The scanning center position will not be
centered.
- The enlargement/reduction ratio of
copies will go wrong.

Alignment of vertical - The following image may appear on the - Chapter 7, Section
print lines printout: 7.2, [ 6 ]
- Chapter 9, Section
9.4.19

4-51 Confidential
 CHAPTER 5
HANDLING DATA HELD IN THE MACHINE
PRIOR TO REPAIR

Confidential
CHAPTER 5 HANDLING DATA HELD IN THE MACHINE PRIOR TO
REPAIR

This chapter describes how to handle data held in the machine to be repaired.
At the user site, if the machine cannot print FAX data received and left in the machine due to the
printing mechanism defective, the service personnel should instruct the end user to follow the transfer
procedure given in this chapter to transfer the FAX data to another machine before sending the machine
for repair.
At the service site, the service personnel should back up the machine information and user setting
information held in the machine into an external memory for restoration after repair, using the backup
procedure given in this chapter.

CONTENTS

5.1 AT THE USER SITE ............................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Transferring Received FAX Data............................................................... 5-1
5.2 AT THE SERVICE SITE ......................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Backing up Machine Information ............................................................... 5-2

Confidential
5.1 AT THE USER SITE

5.1.1 Transferring Received FAX Data

When the machine at the user site requires to be repaired, unplugging the power cord from the
electrical outlet for sending the machine for repair will lose received FAX data if left in the
machine.
To prevent such data loss, the service personnel should instruct end users (e.g., by telephone) to
transfer data to another facsimile machine using the procedure below.
Note: The number of files that can be transferred at a time is 99. To transfer 100 files or more,
carry out the following procedure more than one time.
Tip: If there are both color and monochrome data in a file to be transferred, the monochrome
data will be transferred first. If the receiver machine does not support the color function, the
sender machine cannot transfer color data, resulting in an error.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Connect the machine (that has received data in the memory) to be repaired to the telephone
line.
(2) Switch the machine on.
(3) Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start), and Menu keys in this order.
TIP: For models with numerical keypad, you may press the Menu, Black Start (Mono
Start), and 0 keys instead in the same way as conventional models.
The machine displays " " on the LCD, indicating that the machine is
ready to accept function codes from the keys.
(4) Transfer received FAX data to another facsimile machine, referring to Chapter 9, Section
9.4.13 "Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log (Function code 53) (User-
accessible)."

5-1 Confidential
5.2 AT THE SERVICE SITE

5.2.1 Backing up Machine Information

Before starting repair, the service personnel should back up the following machine information
and user setting information into an external memory (memory card or USB flash memory).
- Machine information (Preset values, counter values, error information, machine
specifications data, etc.)
- User setting information (telephone directory, password, station ID, transfer information,
telephone area code, user settings, etc.)
- Other data (Received fax data, ICM/OGM data, etc.)

Note that the following information cannot be backed up.

- Serial number of the machine
- MAC address
- Call and caller ID records
- Activity report
- Fax data sent (Delayed-timer sent data, redialed sent data, and polled sent data)

„ Operating Procedure

(1) On the PC, create a "Brother" folder in an external memory to be used for saving backup
data.
(2) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(3) Back up the machine information and user setting information, referring to Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.11 "Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)."

5-2 Confidential
 CHAPTER 6
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND
LUBRICATION

Confidential
 CHAPTER 6 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND LUBRICATION

This chapter details procedures for disassembling and reassembling the machine together with related
notes. The disassembly order flow provided enables you to see at a glance the quickest way to get to
component(s) involved.
At the start of a disassembly job, you check the disassembly order flow that guides you through a
shortcut to the target components.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points to which the specified
lubricants should be applied during reassembly jobs.

CONTENTS

6.1 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ............................................................................. 6-1

„ Safety Precautions.............................................................................................. 6-1
„ Tightening Torque ............................................................................................... 6-2
„ Preparation ......................................................................................................... 6-3
„ How to Access the Target Component................................................................ 6-4
„ Disassembly Flowchart ....................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.1 Jam Clear Cover and Inner Back Cover.................................................... 6-6
6.1.2 Scanner Cover (Scanner Unit) .................................................................. 6-7
6.1.3 ADF & Document Cover ASSY ................................................................. 6-12
6.1.4 Disassembly of ADF & Document Cover ASSY ....................................... 6-14
6.1.5 Control Panel ASSY .................................................................................. 6-25
6.1.6 Disassembly of Control Panel ASSY......................................................... 6-26
6.1.7 Backup Battery, Front Cover, Side Covers, Speaker, Upper Cover,
MJ Side Cover, Encoder Guard Film, and WLAN PCB*............................ 6-28
6.1.8 Ink Cartridge Cover and Media Module Cover .......................................... 6-35
6.1.9 Main PCB .................................................................................................. 6-36
6.1.10 MJ/PS Shield Unit (MJ PCB and Power Supply PCB) .............................. 6-39
6.1.11 Head/Carriage Unit and Ink Refill ASSY ................................................... 6-44
6.1.12 Ink Absorber Box, Ink Absorber Felts, and PF Encoder Disk.................... 6-56
6.1.13 Engine Unit and Flushing Box ................................................................... 6-58
6.1.14 Components on the Engine Unit (Earth spring, Maintenance unit,
ASF motor*, Carriage motor, Star wheel holder, Paper ejection roller,
Platen, Inner chute ASSY, Sub chute cover,
Registration sensor actuator, Registration sensor PCB,
PF encoder PCB, Paper pull-in rollers R and L,
ASF gear shaft outer, and PE actuator) .................................................... 6-61
6.1.15 Bank ASSY and Base Pad on the Paper Tray ASSY................................ 6-73
6.1.16 Routing of the Harnesses, Flat Cables, and Ink Supply Tubes ................. 6-74
6.2 LUBRICATION........................................................................................................ 6-85
Confidential
6.1 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

„ Safety Precautions

To prevent the creation of secondary problems by mishandling, observe the following

precautions during maintenance work.

WARNING
Before replacing parts or units, unplug the power cord and telephone line.
In particular, when having access to the power supply inside the machine, make sure
that the power cord is unplugged from the electrical outlet; when having access to the
main PCB or MJ PCB, make sure that both the power cord and telephone line are
unplugged from the electrical outlet.

(1) Be careful not to lose screws, washers, or other parts removed for parts replacement.
(2) When using soldering irons and other heat-generating tools, take care not to damage the
resin parts such as wires, PCBs, and covers.
(3) Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts.
Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static
electricity charged in your body. When transporting PCBs, be sure to wrap them in
conductive sheets.
When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
(4) Be sure to reinsert self-tapping screws correctly, if removed.
(5) Tighten screws to the torque values listed on the next page.
(6) When connecting or disconnecting cable connectors, hold the connector bodies not the
wires. If the connector has a lock, always slide the connector lock to unlock it.
(7) Before reassembly, apply the specified lubricant to the specified points. (Refer to Section
6.2 in this chapter.)
(8) After repairs, check not only the repaired portion but also that the connectors and other
related portions function properly before operation checks.
(9) Once the head/carriage unit prints, it will start head locking operation after five seconds
from the end of printing. The head locking operation will take 5 to 10 seconds. NEVER
unplug the power cord before the machine completes the head locking operation; doing so
will make the head/carriage unit unusable and require replacement with a new head/
carriage unit.
When you receive the machine from the user or when you pack it for sending it back to the
user, check the head locking state.
(10) After disconnecting flat cables, check that each cable is not damaged at its end or short-
circuited.
When connecting flat cables, do not insert them at an angle. After insertion, check again
that the cables are not at an angle.
(11) If ink gets on your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, you need the following treatment.
- If ink gets on your skin, wash it off immediately with soap and water.
- If ink gets into your eyes, flush them immediately and thoroughly with water. If left
untreated, the eyes may become bloodshot or mildly inflamed. If you feel any
discomfort, consult a doctor immediately.
- If ink gets into your mouth, immediately spit it out and consult a doctor.
6-1 Confidential
 (12)

CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING

„ Tightening Torque
Tightening torque
Location of screw Screw type Q'ty Nm (kgfcm)
Grounding wire Taptite, cup S M3x6 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
(for ADF drive unit and CIS motor)
ADF & document cover ASSY Taptite, bind B M4x12 1 0.80±0.1 (8±1)
Hinge arm L Taptite, bind B M4x12 3 0.80±0.1 (8±1)
Upper ADF chute Taptite, cup B M3x10 4 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
Lower ADF chute Taptite, cup B M3x10 2 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
Grounding wire (for ADF drive unit) Taptite, cup S M3x6 1 0.80±0.1 (8±1)
ADF drive unit Taptite, cup B M3x10 2 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
ADF motor Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x6 1 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
Control panel ASSY Taptite, cup B M3x10 4 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Control panel base Taptite, bind B M3x8 2 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Side covers (L and R) Taptite, bind B M4x12 2 0.70±0.1 (7±1)
Upper cover Taptite, bind B M4x12 9 0.70±0.1 (7±1)
Main PCB shield Taptite, cup B M3x10 2 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Taptite, cup S M3x6 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Main PCB Taptite, cup B M3x10 2 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Main PCB shield frame Taptite, cup B M3x10 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
(Together with MJ/PS shield unit) Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
MJ/PS shield unit Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
(Together with engine unit)
Taptite, cup S M3x6 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Grounding wire (for power cord)*1 Screw, pan (washer) M4x8DB 1 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
Power supply PCB Taptite, cup S M3x8 3 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
MJ shield Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
MJ PCB Taptite, cup S M3x6 1 0.40±0.1 (4±1)
Engine unit Taptite, cup B M3x12 1 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
Chassis support Taptite, cup B M3x12 1 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
Maintenance unit Taptite, cup B M3x10 3 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
*2
ASF motor Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x5 2 0.70±0.1 (7±1)
Carriage motor Screw, bind M3x6 2 0.60±0.1 (6±1)
PF encoder PCB Screw, bind M2x12 1 0.15±0.05 (1.5±0.5)

*1 For 200 V series only

*2 ASF motor: Auto Sheet Feeder motor

6-2 Confidential
„ Preparation
Prior to proceeding with the disassembly procedure,
(1) Be sure to back up the machine information and user setting information into an external
memory. If the main PCB is replaced, restore the backup data to the new main PCB after
completion of reassembling. Failure to back up the machine information requires the ink
absorber box and flushing box to be replaced after replacement of the main PCB.
For detailed backup and restoration procedures, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.11 "Backup
of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)."
(2) Unplug the following:
- Power cord from the electrical outlet (or from the machine in the case of 200 V series)
- Modular jack of the telephone line
- USB cable, if connected
- LAN cable, if connected
- Digital camera USB cable or USB flash memory drive, if connected
- Modular jack of the external telephone set from the external telephone line jack, if
connected (if not, remove the EXT cap)
(3) Remove the paper tray ASSY.
(4) Remove memory cards if inserted in the machine.

EXT cap Paper tray ASSY

200 V series

Telephone line cord

Power cord (6_01_BHL9_A3)

(5) Remove all four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead. Check that the small tabs
on both sides of the protective part fit in the holes provided in the ink refill ASSY.

(protective_part)
Protective part
6-3 Confidential
„ How to Access the Target Component

• On the next page is a disassembly flowchart which helps you access the target components.
To remove the maintenance unit, first find it on the flowchart and note its section number
(Section 6.1.14 in this case). To access it, you need to remove all the parts above the
maintenance unit on the flowchart (Sections 6.1.1, 6.1.2, 6.1.5, 6.1.6, 6.1.7, 6.1.10 and 6.1.13
in this case) before the unit itself can be removed.
• Unless otherwise specified, all parts should be replaced in the opposite order to which they
were removed to reassemble the machine.

6-4 Confidential
 „ Disassembly Flowchart
6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.15
Scanner cover Disassembly of
Disassembly/reassembly
ADF & document Paper tray ASSY standard time (seconds)
(Scanner unit) ADF & document
cover ASSY
(including ADF) cover ASSY 35/40
35/55 -/-
80/80

6.1.2 (Note 1)

Scanner cover
support/damper
30/30

6.1.5, 6.1.6

Control panel ASSY

25/25
6.1.7 6.1.7 6.1.8
(Note 2)
Side cover L/R Upper cover Ink cartridge cover
6.1.7
10/10 35/35 10/10

Backup battery
10/10

6.1.9 6.1.8
6.1.7
Main PCB shield Media module cover
Speaker 15/15 5/5
10/20

6.1.9

Main PCB
45/45

6.1.9

Main PCB
shield frame
15/15
6.1.1 6.1.8

Jam clear cover Front cover

15/10 10/10

6.1.11 6.1.12 6.1.12 6.1.13 6.1.7

CR encoder strip Ink absorber box PF encoder disk Engine unit WLAN PCB*
5/5 5/10 5/10 30/40 10/10

(Note 3)
6.1.11 6.1.12 6.1.10

Head cover Ink absorber felt MJ PCB

30/10 5/5 35/35

6.1.11 6.1.11 6.1.14 6.1.13 6.1.10

Carriage PCB ASSY Ink refill ASSY Maintenance unit Flushing box Power supply PCB
20/20 30/50 20/50 5/5 50/50

(Note 4) (Note 5) (Note 6)

6.1.11

Print head
15/20 (BHL9A3_Flow)

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

Sensors, encoders, and thermistors

(Note 1) The ADF unit has the document sensor PCB.
(Note 2) The control panel PCB has the scanner cover sensor and ink cartridge cover sensor.
(Note 3) The engine unit has the registration sensor PCB and PF encoder PCB (having PF encoder sensor).
(Note 4) The carriage PCB in the head/carriage unit has the paper width sensor, head thermistor, and CR encoder sensor.
(Note 5) The ink refill ASSY has the ink cartridge detection sensor PCB (having four ink cartridge detection sensors) and ink
empty sensor PCB (having four ink empty sensors and the casing internal temperature thermistor).
(Note 6) The maintenance unit has the purge cam switch and cap lift cam switch. The ASF motor unit has the ASF encoder
sensor.

6-5 Confidential
6.1.1 Jam Clear Cover and Inner Back Cover
(1) Open the jam clear cover.
(2) Press the left end of the inner back cover (inside the jam clear cover) inwards with the tip of
a flat screwdriver to release the left boss from the lower cover.
ADF & document cover ASSY

Lower cover

Boss

Jam clear cover

Boss
(6_02)
Inner back cover

(3) Detach the inner back cover from the jam clear cover with the following steps.
1) Pull the left and right latches of the jam clear cover outwards to release the upper end of
the inner back cover.
2) Turn the inner back cover as shown below to release it from the three clamps on the
jam clear cover.
Latch

Jam clear cover

Latch

Clamp

Clamp

Inner back cover

Clamp
(6_02_1)

6-6 Confidential
6.1.2 Scanner Cover (Scanner Unit)
The scanner cover should be removed together with the ADF & document cover ASSY whose
removal procedure is given in Section 6.1.3. The disassembly of the ADF & document cover
ASSY is detailed in Section 6.1.4.
(1) Open the scanner cover until it locks.
(2) Remove the CIS flat cable cover and the harness cover by pulling up their rear ends.

CIS flat cable cover

Harness cover

Pawl

Pawl
ADF & document cover ASSY

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

(6_03_BHL9_A3_J)
Upper cover

6-7 Confidential
 (3) Disconnect the CIS flat cable from the main PCB, pull it to the rear through the two flat
cores, and then release it from the cable guides. Unlatch the flat cores and take them out of
the upper cover.
NOTE: After disconnecting the flat cable(s), check that each cable is not damaged at its
end or short-circuited. When connecting the flat cable(s), do not insert it at an angle. After
insertion, check again that it is not at an angle.
(4) Release the two grounding wires by removing the screw.
(5) Disconnect the following harnesses from the main PCB.
- ADF motor harness (4-wire)
- CIS motor harness (4-wire)
- Document sensor PCB harness (5-wire)
Taptite, cup S M3x6

CIS flat cable

Flat cores
Latch

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Document sensor
PCB harness
CIS motor harness
ADF motor harness

CIS motor harness

Grounding wire
Document sensor
PCB harness

Upper cover

Grounding wire
Ferrite core
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness

Grounding wire (6_04)

Document sensor PCB harness

(5-wire) CIS flat cable (12-wire)

ADF motor harness

(4-wire)
CIS motor harness
(4-wire) Main PCB

(Main_PCB_BHL9_A3_2)

6-8 Confidential
(6) Release the harnesses and grounding wires from the cable guides provided at the left end of
the upper cover.

Upper cover

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Document sensor
PCB harness
ADF motor harness
CIS motor harness
Grounding wire
Grounding wire (6_05)

Assembling Note: Route the document sensor PCB harnesses, ADF motor harness, CIS
motor harness, and grounding wires as shown below.
Cable guide

Cable guides

Cable guide

Route the bundle of ADF motor

harness and its grounding wire, Route the document
the CIS motor harness, and the sensor PCB harness
grounding wire on this left side. on this right side.
CIS motor harness
Cable guides Grounding wire
Document sensor
PCB harness
Cable guides Main PCB

Ferrite core

Grounding wire

ADF motor harness Upper cover

(6_08)

6-9 Confidential
(7) While supporting the scanner cover by hand, pull the lock arm provided on the rear of the
scanner cover damper and release the damper from the scanner cover.

ADF &
document cover ASSY

Upper cover
Scanner cover
damper

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

Scanner cover Lower cover

damper

Scanner cover support

Lock arm (6_06)

(8) Fully open the scanner cover and pull it to the rear and off the machine.

Scanner cover
(Scanner unit)

CIS flat cable

Document sensor
PCB harness
ADF motor harness Upper cover
Grounding wire CIS motor
harness
Grounding wire (6_07)

Assembling Note: If you replace the scanner cover, specify the CIS type into the
EEPROM in the maintenance mode (Function code 59), referring to Chapter 9, Section
9.4.17. After that, acquire the white level data and set the CIS scanner area in the
maintenance mode (Function code 55), referring to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.15.
6-10 Confidential
(9) Turn the scanner cover support upright and pull it out of the upper cover together with the
scanner cover damper.
(10) Remove the scanner cover damper from the scanner cover support.

Scanner cover damper

Scanner cover support

Upper cover (6_27)

6-11 Confidential
6.1.3 ADF & Document Cover ASSY
(1) Place the scanner cover upside down.
(2) Insert the tip of a flat screwdriver into the slit provided in the harness support and twist it to
release the two latches and then take the harness support out of the scanner cover.

CIS motor harness

Grounding wire

Bundle of harnesses Harness support

(Document sensor PCB harness,
ADF motor harness,
and grounding wire)

Guide curve
Latches

Harness support

Flat screwdriver
Scanner cover
(placed upside down) (6_09)

Assembling Note: Before fitting the harness support (shown above) into the scanner
cover, route the document sensor PCB harnesses and the bundle of ADF motor harness and
its grounding wire through the guide curve provided in the harness support. The CIS motor
harness and the grounding wire should be placed at the rightmost position (viewed from the
bottom) in the square opening in the scanner cover.

6-12 Confidential
 (3) Turn the scanner cover right side up.
(4) Remove the screw "a" from the rear of the scanner cover.
(5) Fully open the ADF & document cover ASSY.
Note: Lifting up the ASSY without fully opening it in step (6) opens the hinge arm L
suddenly and unexpectedly with great force. It is DANGEROUS!
(6) Slightly lift up the ADF & document cover ASSY, insert the tip of a flat screwdriver into
the slit at the front of the hinge arm R, and push the latch provided inside the scanner cover
to the front to release the hinge arm R. Then pull the ADF & document cover ASSY up and
off the scanner cover.
(7) Slightly turn the hinge arm R inwards and remove it from the ADF & document cover
ASSY.
(8) Remove the three screws "b" from the hinge arm L and release it from the ADF &
document cover ASSY.

ADF & document cover ASSY

Hinge arm R

Hinge arm R

Grounding wire Hinge arm L

ADF motor "b"

harness Latch inside the
"a" "b" "b" scanner cover

Document sensor
PCB harness

Scanner cover
(scanner unit)

CIS flat cable

(6_10)
Grounding wire CIS motor harness

"a" and "b": Taptite, bind B M4x12

6-13 Confidential
6.1.4 Disassembly of ADF & Document Cover ASSY
Brother emblem, document support, and document stopper
(1) Remove the brother emblem from the upper ADF chute.
Note: Remove the brother emblem only when it should be replaced. Once removed, it will
become unusable and a new one will have to be put back in.
(2) Open the document support, warp it slightly, and remove its front and rear bosses from the
holes provided in the upper ADF chute.
(3) Remove the document stopper.
Boss Document support

Boss

Document
stopper

ADF & document

cover ASSY

Grounding wire Upper ADF chute

ADF motor harness Emblem

Document sensor
PCB harness (6_11)

ADF cover
(4) Open the ADF cover, warp it slightly, and remove it from the front and rear bosses
provided on the upper ADF chute.
Document cover

ADF rear cover

Boss

Upper ADF chute

Boss
ADF cover

Hinge (6_12)

6-14 Confidential
ADF rear cover
(5) Turn the ADF & document cover ASSY upside down with the ADF unit facing to the left.
(6) As shown below, press the lock on the upper ADF chute to the left with the tip of a flat
screwdriver to release the right rear corner of the ADF rear cover (c). Next, release latch
"a" on the document cover inwards (d) and latch "b" on the ADF rear cover outwards (e)
through the square openings provided in the document cover, using the tip of a flat
screwdriver.

Viewed from the bottom

Document cover

1 Lock on the upper ADF chute

ADF rear cover

1 Release here from the

ADF rear cover lock on the upper ADF
chute.

Document cover
2 Boss
1 Lock on the
upper ADF
chute

3 Latch "b"

Square hole (Front)

Upper ADF chute Document pull-in/

Viewed from the bottom separation roller ASSY

2 Latch "a"

3 Latch "b"
(Rear) 2 Boss (6_13)

6-15 Confidential
Document pull-in/separation roller ASSY, separation rubber and plate
(7) At the rear end of the shaft of the document pull-in/separation roller ASSY, release the lock
arm of the bushing from the hole provided in the ADF drive unit and turn it up. Pull the
document pull-in/separation roller ASSY up and out of the upper ADF chute.
NOTE: Take care not to drop the bushing at the front end of the roller shaft.
(8) Lightly pull up the left end of the separation pad and out of the upper ADF chute together
with the separation rubber.

Document pull-in/
separation roller ASSY
Lock arm of bushing

Bushing

ADF drive unit

Separation rubber
Cutout (Front)

Separation plate
Upper ADF chute (6_14)

Assembling Note: When putting the separation plate and its rubber back into place, fully
insert the plate until the cutout becomes fitted over the boss on the upper ADF chute.

6-16 Confidential
Upper ADF chute
(9) Remove the four screws from the upper ADF chute.
(10) Release the latch "a" on the left rear of the document cover (c), insert the tip of a flat
screwdriver from the two square holes provided on the bottom of the document cover to
release the latches "b" (d) and "c" (e) and lift the upper ADF chute up and off the
document cover.

Taptite, cup B
M3x10

Upper ADF chute

3 Latch "c"

1 Latch "a"

Document cover
(Left)
Square hole

2 Latch "b" (6_15)

Square hole

6-17 Confidential
Lower ADF chute
(11) Cut off the cable tie that binds a bundle of harnesses (ADF motor harness and its grounding
wire, and document sensor PCB harness) to the document cover.
(12) Remove the two screws from the lower ADF chute, and take the lower ADF chute off the
document cover.
Bundle of harnesses
(ADF motor harness, grounding wire, Taptite, cup B
and document sensor PCB harness) M3x10

Cable tie Document cover

Lower ADF chute

Tab

Square
hole

Tab

(Left)
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness
Square hole
Document sensor PCB harness Document cover (6_16)

Assembling Notes:
• When mounting the lower ADF chute on the document cover, insert the two tabs
provided on the left side of the lower ADF chute into the square holes in the document
cover.
• After mounting the lower ADF chute, be sure to route a bundle of harnesses (ADF motor
harness and its grounding wire, and document sensor PCB harness) on the underside of
the document cover and secure the bundle with a cable tie as shown below. After binding,
cut off the excess of the cable tie with nippers.
Document cover

Cable tie

Cut off the excess of the

cable tie with nippers.

Bundle of harnesses
(ADF motor harness, grounding wire,
and document sensor PCB harness)

(6_25)

6-18 Confidential
Document feed roller
(13) At the front end of the document feed roller shaft, squeeze the lock bushing and slide the
shaft to the rear. Then slide the rear bushing to the rear.
(14) At the rear end of the document feed roller shaft, slightly lift up the shaft and slide it to the
rear until its front end comes off the lower ADF chute.
(15) Release the grounding wire from the ADF drive unit by removing the screw.
Lock bushing

Document feed roller

Rear bushing

(Front)
Taptite, cup S
Grounding wire M3x6

ADF drive unit

Lower ADF chute

(6_17)

Document ejection roller ASSY

(16) At the front end of the document ejection roller ASSY, squeeze the lock bushing and slide
the ASSY to the rear. Then slide the rear bushing to the rear.
(17) At the rear end of the document ejection roller ASSY, slightly lift up the ASSY and slide it
to the rear until its front end comes off the lower ADF chute.
Lock bushing

Document ejection (Front)

roller ASSY

Rear bushing

ADF drive unit Lower ADF chute

(6_18)

6-19 Confidential
ADF drive unit and ADF motor
(18) Peel off the adhesive tape securing the ADF motor harness. Then remove the two screws
from the ADF drive unit and take it off the lower ADF chute.
Grounding wire

ADF motor

Taptite, cup B
M3x10

(Rear)

Lower ADF chute

ADF drive unit (6_19)

(19) Disconnect the ADF motor harness from the motor.

(20) Release the ADF motor from the drive unit by removing the screw.
Planetary arm
When mounting the lower ADF chute on
the document cover, turn the planetary arm
clockwise (viewed from the rear) to put
the planetary gear in the upper position.

Planetary gear

ADF motor

ADF motor harness

Screw,
pan (s/p washer)
M3x6

ADF drive unit Hook (6_20)

6-20 Confidential
Assembling Note: When mounting the lower document chute on the document cover, turn
the planet gear clockwise (viewed from the rear) to put it in the upper position beforehand.
(See the illustration below.)

Viewed from the rear

ADF motor pulley Planet gear

Sun gear
Separation roller gear
ADF drive unit

Document feed roller

(Left)

Document ejection roller

Idle gears
(6_26)
Idle gears

6-21 Confidential
 Document front and rear sensor actuators and document sensor PCB
(21) At each of the document front and rear sensor actuators, lightly press the corresponding
lock arm, slide the actuator towards the lock arm, and remove it together with the
corresponding actuator spring.
Document front sensor actuator
Lock arm
Actuator spring
Actuator spring

(Left)

Document rear
sensor actuator

Lower ADF chute

Lock arm (6_21)

.
(22) Press the lock arm and pull the left edge of the document sensor PCB to the front and
upwards to remove the PCB. Then disconnect the document sensor PCB harness from the
PCB.

Document sensor PCB harness

Document sensor
PCB

Lock arm
(Rear)

Lower ADF chute

(6_22)

6-22 Confidential
 Assembling Note: Route the ADF motor harness and its grounding wire, and document
sensor PCB harness through the cable guides on the lower ADF chute as shown below.

Lower ADF chute Document front

Ferrite core sensor actuator

Document sensor
PCB

ADF motor
harness

Cable Document rear

guides sensor actuator
Ferrite core
Grounding Document sensor
wire PCB harness

Document sensor PCB harness (6_24)

Grounding wire ADF motor harness

6-23 Confidential
Document pressure bar
(23) Turn the lower ADF chute upside down.
(24) Pull either one of the lock arms on the underside of the lower ADF chute inwards and
release the document pressure bar. The pressure bar spring also comes off.

Document pressure bar

Tab
White reference film

Tab

Tab

Spring

Lower ADF chute

(placed upside down)

Boss

Lock arm
Lower ADF chute

Boss

Lock arm (6_23)

6-24 Confidential
6.1.5 Control Panel ASSY
(1) Remove four screws from the control panel ASSY.
(2) Pull up the rear end of the control panel ASSY and turn it up slightly.
NOTE: Do not pull the control panel ASSY away from the machine since it is connected to
the machine with the panel-main harness.
(3) Hold the control panel ASSY at an angle of approx. 45° and slide it to the rear
approximately 10 mm to release the nine hooks from the upper cover. Then disconnect the
panel-main harness and LCD flat cable from the main PCB.
NOTE: After disconnecting the flat cable(s), check that each cable is not damaged at its
end or short-circuited. When connecting the flat cable(s), do not insert it at an angle. After
insertion, check again that it is not at an angle.

Taptite, cup B
M3x10
Hooks
Control panel ASSY

LCD flat cable

Ink cartridge cover

Panel-main connector

Upper cover

Panel-main harness

Main PCB

Battery connector

Speaker connector
(6_28)

Assembling Note: After mounting the control panel ASSY, check that there is no gap
between the front end of the control panel ASSY and that of the upper cover.

6-25 Confidential
6.1.6 Disassembly of Control Panel ASSY
(1) Place the control panel ASSY upside down.
(2) Pull the three "x" latches outwards and remove the control panel PCB ASSY (consisting of
two PCBs).
NOTE: Do not pull the cables connecting the two PCBs or hold them when handling the
PCB ASSY.
(3) Remove the three rubber keypads.
(4) Remove the actuator rubber from the ink cartridge cover sensor actuator.

Panel-main harness
Control panel PCB ASSY

Rubber keypad
Rubber keypad

Tab
Rubber keypad
Tab

Actuator rubber Tab

Latch "x"

Tab
LCD flat cable
(Front)

Control panel base

Latch "x"
(6_29)
Latch "x" Ink cartridge cover
sensor actuator

Assembling Note: When mounting the control panel PCB ASSY, first fit it below the four
tabs (see the illustration above) on the control panel base and then secure it with three "x"
latches.

6-26 Confidential
(5) Remove the two screws from the control panel base.
(6) Release the eight "y" latches and remove the control panel plate from the control panel
base.
NOTE: Take care not to drop the color LCD unit.
(7) Take the color LCD unit out of the control panel base.
Note: The latch spring may pop out of the control panel base. Take care not to lose it.
(8) If the control panel ASSY or the control panel base needs to be replaced, be sure to place
an order for an LCD back film also and attach a new film on the control panel base.

Latches "y"
Latches "y"

Panel plate

Latches "y" Latches

"y"

Latch
spring
Color LCD unit

LCD flat cable

LCD back film

Control panel base

Bosses
Square opening

Taptite, bind B
M3x8 (6_30)

Assembling Notes:
• When attaching a new LCD back film on the control panel base, face the black side of the
film upwards.
• Before mounting the color LCD unit onto the control panel base, set the latch spring with
its convex section facing upwards, fitting its hole and cutout over the front and rear
bosses of the control panel base, respectively.
• A new color LCD unit is covered with a protection sheet. Before setting it, remove the
protection sheet.
• When mounting the color LCD unit, route the LCD flat cable through the square opening
of the control panel base.
• After setting the color LCD unit back into place, wipe fingerprints or dust off the LCD
surface with a soft cloth.
6-27 Confidential
6.1.7 Backup Battery, Front Cover, Side Covers, Speaker, Upper Cover, MJ
Side Cover, Encoder Guard Film, and WLAN PCB*
* For wireless LAN-enabled model.
NOTE: Make sure that the jam clear cover is open.
(1) Disconnect the battery harness from the main PCB and remove the backup battery from the
upper cover.

Battery harness
Backup battery

Connector for
battery harness

Main PCB
Upper cover
Cable guide
Backup battery

(6_31)

WARNING
- Explosion hazard! Never disassemble or recharge the battery.
- Explosion hazard! Never dispose of the battery in fire.
- There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
- When replacing the battery, use the spare part authorized by Brother Industries.

CAUTION
- Batteries used should be disposed of in accordance with the local codes and
regulations.

WARNUNG
- Die Batterie niemals zerlegen oder wieder aufladen.
- Die Batterie niemals durch Verbrennen entsorgen.

VORSICHT
- Wenn die Batterie inkorrekt ausgewechselt wird, besteht Explosionsgefahr.

6-28 Confidential
 Assembling Note: When setting the backup battery, route the battery harness through the
cable guides on the upper cover as shown below.

Backup battery

Cable guide

Speaker Cable guide

Cable guide

Cable guides
Main PCB

Cable guide Battery harness

Upper cover Speaker harness (6_37)

6-29 Confidential
(2) Lightly pull up the two retainers on the inside of the front cover to release them from the
lower cover. Then lightly lift up the front end of the lower cover and remove the front
cover, together with the WLAN PCB*.
(3) Remove the screw and remove the side cover L.
(4) Open the ink cartridge cover. Then remove the screw and remove the side cover R.
* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

Side cover R

Taptite, bind B
M4x12

Side cover L
Tab

Cutout

Ink cartridge cover

Lower cover

Upper cover
Openings

Front cover
Retainers
(6_32)

Assembling Notes:
• When mounting the side cover R, make sure that the ink cartridge cover is open and fit
the front tab provided on the side cover R into the cutout of the upper cover.
• After mounting the side covers L and R, check that there is no gap between each of them
and the upper cover.
• When mounting the front cover, lightly lift up the front end of the lower cover and fit the
bottom edge of the front cover over the bottom of the lower cover.

6-30 Confidential
(5) Release the two latches on the front cover and take out the WLAN PCB.*
(6) Disconnect the WLAN PCB harness* from the WLAN PCB.*

WLAN PCB

Linear bosses

WLAN PCB harness

Latch

Tab

Latch
Front cover
(WLAN_PCB)

Assembling Note*: When mounting the front cover and WLAN PCB onto the lower
cover, route the WLAN PCB harness as shown on page 6-77.

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

6-31 Confidential
(7) Disconnect the speaker harness from the main PCB and release it from the cable guides
provided on the upper cover.
(8) Remove the speaker spring (wire spring) and the speaker from the pocket provided on the
upper cover.

Speaker Speaker harness

Speaker spring

Main PCB

Upper cover Lower cover

Connector for speaker harness

Speaker (6_33)

Cable guides

Assembling Note: After mounting the speaker and its spring into the pocket provided on
the upper cover, route the speaker harness through the cable guides on the upper cover as
shown on page 6-29.

6-32 Confidential
(9) Check that the ink cartridge cover is open.
(10) Remove the nine screws from the upper cover.
(11) Lift the upper cover up and off the lower cover.
NOTE: When lifting up the upper cover, do not put your hands in the opening above the
platen (shown below). Doing so may damage or stain the CR encoder strip inside.
Opening above the platen

Upper cover Taptite, bind B M4x12

Peep hole

PF encoder disk
Ink cartridge cover

(6_34)
Lower cover

Assembling Notes:
• When mounting the upper cover:
- Make sure that the jam clear cover and the ink cartridge cover are open.
- Make sure that the head/carriage unit is placed in the head capping position (home
position). This prevents the ink supply tubes from getting crushed between the upper
and lower covers.
- Take care not to deform the PF encoder disk.
• After mounting the upper cover, check that the PF encoder disk is not bent or deformed
through the peep hole. (See the illustration above.)

6-33 Confidential
 (12) Place the upper cover upside down.
(13) Remove the MJ side cover from the upper cover.
MJ side cover

Upper cover
(placed upside down)

(6_35)

(14) Release the rear end and the loop of the encoder guard spring from the spring guide and
boss on the upper cover, respectively.
(15) Unhook the encoder guard spring from the encoder guard film.
(16) Slide the film inwards, turn it to the front by 90°, and release the opposite end (no spring)
of the film from the boss on the upper cover.
Spring guides Encoder guard spring

Square hole

Encoder guard film

Boss
Encoder guard film
(Front)
Boss
Upper cover
(placed upside down)

(Front)

(6_36)

6-34 Confidential
6.1.8 Ink Cartridge Cover and Media Module Cover
(1) Open the ink cartridge cover fully, warp its center upward as shown below, pull its left edge
to release the left boss from the lower cover and then remove the ink cartridge cover.
(2) Release the left and right lock arms of the media module cover and pull the cover to the
front.

Boss

Slit

Lock arm

Cover arm
Boss
Retainer
Boss

Ink cartridge cover

Media module cover

Lower cover
Lock arm (6_38)

Assembling Note: When mounting the ink cartridge cover, first insert the cover arm into
the slit provided in the right side of the lower cover and fit the right boss into the right hole
in the lower cover. Then warp the center of the ink cartridge cover upward as shown above
and fit the left boss into the left hole.

6-35 Confidential
6.1.9 Main PCB
Caution: Before replacement of the main PCB, back up the machine information and user
setting information, referring to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.11 "Backup of Machine
Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)." After replacement, restore the backed
up information to the new PCB. Failure to do so requires replacing also the ink absorber
box and flushing box after replacement of the main PCB.
Caution: Before accessing the main PCB, make sure that the power cord is unplugged from the
electrical outlet and the telephone line is disconnected; otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
Caution: At the time of removal of the main PCB, untightening screws should be preceded by
disconnection of the harnesses and flat cables, and at the time of installation, connection of the
harnesses and flat cables, by tightening of screws. Observing this sequence prevents harnesses
and flat cables from getting crushed or damaged by screws or screwdrivers.
(1) Disconnect the following harnesses and flat cables from the main PCB
Caution: Do not remove the screws from the main PCB before disconnecting harnesses
and flat cables.
Note: After disconnecting the flat cables, check that each cable is not damaged at its end or
short-circuited. When connecting the flat cables, do not insert them at an angle. After
insertion, check again that they are not at an angle.
- Ink cartridge detection sensor harness (7-wire)
- Ink empty sensor harness (9-wire)
- ASF* encoder harness (4-wire) (*Auto Sheet Feeder)
- Purge cam switch harness (2-wire)
- Cap lift cam switch harness (2-wire)
- Power supply harness (5-wire)
- PF encoder/registration sensor harness (7-wire)
- Paper feed motor harness (2-wire)
- ASF* motor harness (2-wire)
- Carriage motor harness (2-wire)
- Head flat cable 1 (13-wire)
- Head flat cable 2 (12-wire)
- Head flat cable 3 (11-wire)
- WLAN PCB harness (6-wire)*1
Main-MJ (EXT) harness
(2-wire, black)
(Document sensor PCB harness)
(5-wire) Main-MJ (LINE) harness Head flat cable 3 (11-wire)
Carriage motor harness (2-wire, yellow) Head flat cable 1 (13-wire)
(2-wire) For debugging at Head flat cable 2 (12-wire)
the factory. (CIS flat cable) (12-wire)
Do not disturb it.
(USB interface)
(ADF motor harness) (LAN interface)
(4-wire)
ASF encoder harness
(CIS motor harness) (4-wire)
(4-wire)
Purge cam switch
ASF motor harness harness
(2-wire) (2-wire)
Cap lift cam
Paper feed motor switch harness
harness (2-wire)
(2-wire) Main PCB
Ink cartridge
PF encoder/ detection sensor
registration harness
sensor harness (7-wire)
(7-wire)
Ink empty
Power supply sensor
harness harness
(5-wire) (9-wire)
WLAN PCB harness*1 (Speaker harness) (Panel-main harness)
(6-wire) (2-wire) (5-wire) For debugging at the factory.
(Battery harness) (Color LCD flat cable) Do not disturb it.
(5-wire) (28-wire)
(Main_PCB_BHL9_A3_1)
*1 For wireless LAN-enabled model.
6-36 Confidential
 (2) Remove the three screws (two "a" and one "b" screws) from the main PCB shield and lift it
up.
"a" Main PCB shield
"a"

"b"

ASF encoder harness

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness Purge cam switch harness
Main-MJ (LINE) SDAA Cap lift cam switch harness
harness enclosure Ink cartridge detection
Carriage motor sensor harness
harness

ASF motor
harness Ink empty sensor
harness
Paper feed motor
harness

Main PCB

Lower cover
"a": Taptite, cup B M3x10
"b": Taptite, cup S M3x6
PF encoder/registration Power supply harness (6_39)
sensor harness

Assembling Notes: Before securing the main PCB shield, route the harnesses on the top of
the lower cover as shown below. Make sure that the main-MJ (EXT) harness and main-MJ
(LINE) harness are routed through the SDAA enclosure. (See the illustration given on page
6-40 for the routing of those harnesses on the left side of the lower cover.)
Carriage motor harness Main-MJ (LINE)
Paper feed motor harness harness (yellow)
ASF motor harness SDAA enclosure
Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness
Main PCB

Power supply harness (6_41)

6-37 Confidential
 (3) Disconnect the main-MJ (EXT) harness from the main PCB and release it from the cable
guides provided on the SDAA enclosure.
(4) Press the right and left ends of the SDAA enclosure inwards and remove it from the main
PCB.
(5) Disconnect the main-MJ (LINE) harness (2-wire, yellow) from the main PCB.
(6) Remove two "c" screws from the main PCB, then lift up the PCB.
(7) Remove screw "d" and "e" from the main PCB shield frame, then lift up the shield frame.
(The screw "d" also secures the MJ/PS shield unit.)

SDAA enclosure "c"

Main PCB

"c"

Main PCB shield frame

"e"
ASF encoder harness
"d" Purge cam switch harness
Cap lift cam switch harness
Ink cartridge detection
sensor harness
Main-MJ (EXT) Ink empty sensor
harness harness

Main-MJ (LINE)
harness

Carriage motor
harness

ASF motor
harness
Paper feed motor
harness

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness
Power supply harness (6_40)

"c" and "e": Taptite, cup B M3x10

"d": Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8

Assembling Note: If you replace the main PCB, you need to load programs onto the flash
ROM, restore the machine information that has been backed up in an external memory, and
make specified adjustments of various settings (refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.3). Make sure
beforehand that the head/carriage unit has been mounted.

6-38 Confidential
6.1.10 MJ/PS Shield Unit (MJ PCB and Power Supply PCB)
(1) If the main PCB shield frame has not been removed, disconnect the power supply harness,
main-MJ (LINE) harness and main-MJ (EXT) harness from the main PCB, then remove
screw "d" (shown on the previous page) from the main PCB shield frame.
(2) Remove the two screws ("f" and "g") as shown below.
(3) Release the harnesses from the cable guides provided on the lower cover and remove the
MJ/PS shield unit from underside of the lower cover.

"g" "f"

Lower cover

Hook

MJ/PS shield unit

Main-MJ (LINE) harness

Main-MJ (EXT) harness U-shaped cutout

Power supply harness
(6_46_J)

"f": Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8

"g": Taptite, cup S M3x6

6-39 Confidential
Assembling Notes:
• When mounting the MJ/PS shield unit onto the lower cover, route the power supply
harness through the U-shaped cutout (shown on the previous page) provided in the lower
MJ/PS shield.
After mounting the MJ/PS shield unit, route the power supply harness through the channel
and route the main-MJ (EXT) harness and main-MJ (LINE) harness on the left side of the
lower cover as shown below.

Main-MJ (LINE) harness (yellow) Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)

Carriage motor harness Paper feed motor harness
ASF motor harness
Main PCB

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

Channel (6_49_BHL9_A3)

6-40 Confidential
(4) Unlatch the power cord bushing and pull it up from the AC cord holder. Then release the
power cord from the cable guides provided on the AC cord holder (shown on page 6-43).
For 200 V series Remove screw "h" and the power inlet together with its bracket. For the
power inlet having no fuse, remove also the inlet holder cover. Release the power cord
from the cable guides. (See page 6-43.)
(5) Remove the AC cord holder from the lower MJ/PS shield.
(6) Remove the power supply shield from the lower MJ/PS shield.
(7) Disconnect the power supply harness from the power supply PCB.
(8) Remove three screws "i" from the power supply PCB.
(9) Detach the PS PCB insulator from the power cord.
(10) Remove screw "j" and remove the MJ shield from the lower MJ/PS shield.
(11) Remove screw "k" from the MJ PCB and take it off the lower MJ/PS shield.
(12) Remove the MJ PCB insulator from the lower MJ/PS shield.
For 200 V series

Power inlet "h" "j"

bracket
Power inlet
"j"
MJ shield

MJ shield

MJ PCB

Inlet holder cover

Lower MJ/PS shield "k" Main-MJ (LINE) harness (yellow)
Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)
"h" MJ PCB
Power inlet "j"
bracket CN1
CN2
Power inlet Latch MJ PCB insulator
with a built-in
fuse
Cable guide
MJ shield AC cord holder
MJ PCB

Lock
Lower MJ/PS shield
Lower MJ/PS
shield
Power cord

"i"
Bushing Slit
"i"
Square holes
Power supply shield
"i" Power supply PCB

PS PCB insulator
"h": Screw, pan (washer) M4x8DB
"i": Taptite, cup S M3x8
Shield supports "j": Screw, pan (s/p washer) M3x8
"k": Taptite, cup S M3x6
Power supply harness (6_47_BHL9_A3)

6-41 Confidential
Assembling Notes:
• Before mounting the MJ shield, route the main-MJ (LINE) and (EXT) harnesses through
the cable guide provided on the MJ PCB insulator. (See the previous page.)
• Route the power cord through the PS PCB insulator (see below) and the cable guides
provided on the AC cord holder (see the next page). Fit the corner of the PS PCB
insulator into the cutout provided in the lower MJ/PS shield as shown below.
• When mounting the power supply shield on the lower MJ/PS shield, insert two shield
supports of the power supply shield into the two square holes provided in the lower MJ/
PS shield. Make sure that the lock of the lower MJ/PS shield (as shown below) fits in the
slit provided in the top of power supply shield. (See the previous page.)
PS PCB insulator
Cable guide on the
MJ PCB insulator

Power supply PCB

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (yellow)

Lower MJ/PS shield

Power supply harness

Power supply PCB

PS PCB insulator
Lower MJ/PS shield

Fit the corner of the PS PCB insulator

into the cutout provided in the lower
Routing of power cord MJ/PS shield. (6_47_1_J)

Lock of the lower

MJ/PS shield

Power supply
shield

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)

Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (yellow)

Lower MJ/PS shield

Square hole provided in
the lower MJ/PS shield
Power supply harness
Shield support on the
power supply shield (6_47_2_J)

6-42 Confidential
 Top view
Ferrite core

MJ PCB

Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black) Cable guides on the

AC cord holder

Main-MJ (LINE) harness (yellow)

Cable guide on the Power cord

PS PCB insulator
MJ PCB insulator
Power supply PCB
Route the power cord
under this tab.

Power supply harness

For 200 V series Top view

Ferrite core

MJ PCB

Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)

Cable guides on the
AC cord holder

Main-MJ (LINE) harness (yellow)

Cable guide on the PS PCB insulator

MJ PCB insulator Power cord
Power supply PCB
Route the power cord
under this tab.

Power supply harness (6_48_BHL9)

Note for models with a power inlet having a built-in fuse

If the fuse built in the power inlet has blown, the power supply PCB could also be damaged.
Be sure to replace the whole power supply PCB ASSY, not just the fuse. Never use any
substitute or short-circuit the fuse terminals with conductors. Using a power inlet with an
unauthorized fuse will cause a fire or accident.

6-43 Confidential
6.1.11 Head/Carriage Unit and Ink Refill ASSY
During disassembly jobs, except when removing the ink refill ASSY or engine unit (including
the maintenance unit), leave the head/carriage unit in the machine.
Before removing the head/carriage unit, ink refill ASSY or engine unit, you need to remove all
four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead (see page 6-3). Be sure to insert the
protective part into place to prevent ink remaining in the ink supply tubes from leaking and the
machine from getting stained with leaked ink. (Check that the small tabs on both sides of the
protective part fit in the holes provided in the ink refill ASSY.)

Note: Make sure that the power cord is unplugged from the electrical outlet.
Note: When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
Note: During the removal or installation job for the head/carriage unit, take care not to
contaminate the CR encoder strip, PF encoder disk, or ASF encoder disk (in the ASF motor
unit) with ink or grease.
Note: If you replace the head/carriage unit, also replace the ink cartridges. This is because
sufficient ink volume is necessary for refilling the ink supply tubes after replacement of the
head/carriage unit.

CR encoder strip
(1) While lightly pushing the CR encoder strip support on the left end of the engine unit
inwards, unhook the right end of the CR encoder strip from the hook (c). (See the
illustration on the next page.)
(2) Slide the CR encoder strip to the left (d) and out of the head cover. At the left end of the
CR encoder strip, align the rectangular hole in the strip with the boss of the strip support
(e) and take the strip off.
Note: Take care not to scratch or damage the encoder strip. If it is stained or damaged,
replace it with a new one.

6-44 Confidential
Tube support plate and tube support wire
(3) Release the four ink supply tubes from the tube support wire.
(4) Pull up the latch and slide the tube support plate to the left, and then take the plate out of
the lower cover together with the tube support wire.
(5) Remove the tube support wire from the tube support plate.
This should point up.

CR encoder strip

Tube support wire

Ink supply tubes

Tube support plate

Latch Hook 1

CR encoder
strip support (front)

Lower cover
Engine unit
(6_50_BHL9)

Assembling Notes: After mounting the head cover, set the CR encoder strip so that the -
marked end is to the right (carriage motor side) and the mark points upwards as shown
above, using the following steps.
1) Hook the left end of the CR encoder strip on the left-hand strip support, aligning the
rectangular hole provided in the strip with the boss of the strip support.
2) Pass the strip through the CR encoder sensor located on the head/carriage unit by
inserting it into the opening of the head cover from left to right.
3) Hook the right end of the strip while pushing the left-hand strip support inwards.

6-45 Confidential
Assembling Note: After making sure that the ink supply tubes are routed between the
tube/cable guide and the lower cover, pass the ink supply tubes through the bent section of
the tube support wire as shown below.

(Front)
Tube guide

Sponge

Tube/cable guide

Tube support plate

Lower cover

Bent section of
tube support wire

Magenta
Tube support wire
Cyan Yellow Black
(6_64)

6-46 Confidential
Head cover
(6) Move the head/carriage unit to position "P" (shown below) by hand.
Note: If the head/carriage unit does not move, rotate the ASF/maintenance drive gear
counterclockwise (viewed from the left) by hand to unlock the head/carriage unit and move
it to position "P."
CR guide rail
ASF motor

Position "P"
(Here on the
engine chassis)
ASF motor
Head cover
(Rear)

ASF/maintenance
drive gear
Lower cover

Lower cover (6_51)

(7) Unlatch the head cover from the head/carriage unit and pull it up.
Tabs
Latch

Head cover
Latch Latch

Ink absorber box

Head/carriage unit

Lower cover (6_52)

Assembling Note: When accessing the head/carriage unit placed on the engine unit, put
the head/carriage unit in position "P" (on the right edge of the engine chassis) as shown
above.
6-47 Confidential
Carriage PCB ASSY (carriage PCB with head flat cables)
(8) Unlock the connector on the carriage PCB and disconnect the carriage-head flat cable.
Note: After disconnecting the flat cable, check that it is not damaged at its end or short-
circuited. When connecting the flat cable, do not insert it at an angle. After insertion, check
again that it is not at an angle.
(9) Release the head flat cables from the cable guides provided on the upper cover and take
them out together with the flat core.
Note: When replacing the carriage PCB ASSY, remove the flat core from the old head flat
cables and set it to the new ones.
(10) Release the head flat cables from the cable guide provided on the head/carriage unit and
release the film from the boss.
(11) Lift up the carriage PCB ASSY.

Carriage PCB ASSY

Film

Hole

Head flat cables

Boss

Flat core

Cable guide

Carriage-head Lower cover

flat cable (6_53)

Assembling Note: When mounting the carriage PCB ASSY, route the head flat cables,
observing instructions given on the next page.

6-48 Confidential
 Routing the Head Flat Cables When Mounting the Carriage PCB ASSY

1) Mount the carriage PCB ASSY on the head/carriage unit (see the previous page).
2) On the head/carriage unit, route the head flat cables through the cable guide and fit the hole in the
film over the boss as shown below.
Head flat cables
Hole

Carriage PCB ASSY Head flat cables

Cable guides

Film

Carriage-head flat cable

Boss

Carriage PCB ASSY

(6_62)
Cable guide
Viewed from the rear

3) Pass the head flat cables through the flat core, 4) Set the tube support wire onto the tube support
fit the folded section of them (with film) over plate. Then, mount the tube support plate so
the boss and set the flat core in the pocket on that the head flat cables (and ink supply tubes)
the lower cover, routing the cables through the pass between the tube/cable guide on the
cable guides. support plate and the lower cover.

Head flat cables Flat core

Folded section

Cable guides
Tube/cable guide
Boss
Lower cover
Pocket Cable guides
Head flat
cables

Cable guide

Cable guide

Cable guide
Lower cover (Rear)
Tube support plate Tube support wire (6_63)

6-49 Confidential
Head joint and ink refill ASSY
(12) Pull out the joint leaf spring to the right to release the head joint.
(13) Pull the head joint up and off the head/carriage unit.
Remove the head joint rubber (that is a part of the head/carriage unit but may come off with
the head joint) and put it on a clean vinyl sheet while taking care not to contaminate it.
Note: Wipe off the ink remaining on the section where the head joint was mounted with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
Note: Wrap the head joint in a clean, lint-free cloth and keep it higher than the ink supply
tubes to prevent ink remaining in the ink supply tubes from leaking and the machine from
getting stained with leaked ink.

Head joint

Ink supply tubes Joint leaf spring

Head joint rubber

Head/carriage unit

Joint leaf spring

Head/carriage unit

Head joint
(6_54)

Assembling Note: Before setting the head joint, make sure that the head joint rubber is set
on the head/carriage unit as shown above. Then secure the head joint to the head/carriage
unit with the joint leaf spring.

6-50 Confidential
(14) Take out the ink supply tubes routed on the lower cover.
(15) If the main PCB has not been removed, disconnect the ink cartridge detection sensor
harness and the ink empty sensor harness from the main PCB.
(16) Release the harnesses from the cable guide (see the illustration below). Then lift the ink
refill ASSY up and out of the lower cover
Note: On the back of the ink refill ASSY is an ink foam that may be stained with ink. If it
is excessively stained, replace it.
Head joint
Ink supply tubes Ink foam in this case

Ink cartridge detection

sensor PCB

Ink refill ASSY

Ink cartridge
detection sensor
harness
Ink empty sensor
harness

Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta

Cable guide

Lower cover

Tube guide
Tube guide

Lower cover

Magenta

Cyan

Yellow Black (Rear) Sponge

(6_55)

Assembling Note: After mounting the ink refill ASSY, route the ink supply tubes on the
lower cover, aligning the four colors in the order as shown above.
6-51 Confidential
 Head/carriage unit and CR timing belt
Note: During the removal or installation of the head/carriage unit, take care not to contaminate
the PF encoder disk with ink or grease.
(17) While pressing the idle pulley holder to the right, remove the CR timing belt from the
carriage motor pulley and idle pulley.
(18) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel by hand.
(19) Lift the head/carriage unit (with the CR timing belt) up and off the engine unit in the
direction of the arrow shown below.
(20) Remove the CR timing belt from the head/carriage unit.
Note: Do not touch the head nozzles (the printing ends) or ink supply ports (to which ink
supply tubes are connected) of the head/carriage unit; doing so will not only stain your
hands with ink but also damage the nozzles and supply ports. If you do touch them though,
perform a head cleaning operation.
Viewed from
Latches
the bottom

CR timing belt
When mounting a new
head/carriage unit, apply When mounting a new
grease here. head/carriage unit, apply
grease to the CR support chassis
(11 lubrication points).

Carriage motor pulley

CR guide rail

Cutouts
When mounting a new head/carriage
unit, apply grease to the front and rear
sides of the upright rear edge of the CR
support chassis (14 x 2 lubrication points).

When mounting a new head/carriage

(Front) unit, apply grease to the CR support
chassis (11 lubrication points).
CR support chassis
PF encoder
disk Idle pulley spring
Idle pulley Idle pulley holder (6_57)

Assembling Notes:
• When handling the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
• When mounting the CR timing belt, insert it into the slit provided in the head/carriage
unit so that the toothed side faces inwards as shown above. Make sure that the belt is
fully inserted inside the latches.

6-52 Confidential
• When mounting a new head/carriage unit, apply the specified lubricant to the specified
points, referring to Section 6.2.
Also, after mounting a new head/carriage unit, apply the specified lubricant to the
specified points on the sliding surfaces of the CR guide rail and CR support chassis,
referring to Section 6.2.
• Before mounting the head/carriage unit on the engine unit, be sure to move the front and
rear slider cams to the rightmost position to prevent them from scratching or damaging
the PF encoder disk.

Rear slider cam

Head/carriage unit

Front slider cam

(6_60)

• When mounting the head/carriage unit on the left end of the engine unit, first fit the front
end over the CR support chassis (shown on the previous page) and then set the rear end
onto the CR guide rail. Make sure that the two front bosses (see below) provided on the
bottom of the head/carriage unit catch the front edge of the CR support chassis and the
two rear bosses are fitted in the two cutouts (shown on the previous page) in the CR guide
rail.
Viewed from the bottom
Rear bosses

Front bosses (6_61)

• After mounting the head/carriage unit, slide it by hand to check that it smoothly moves to
the right and left ends of its travel.
• After replacement of the head/carriage unit, check that the CR encoder strip and PF
encoder disk are free of grease and ink. If they are stained with grease or ink, replace
them.

6-53 Confidential
(21) A head/carriage unit is assigned a property code that represents the properties unique to
that head/carriage unit. The property code is printed on head property labels--bar code label
and QR code label, each of which is attached to the lower cover and carriage-head flat
cable, respectively.
When you remove the head/carriage unit and store it separately from the machine, remove
the property label (bar code label) from the lower cover and store it together with the head/
carriage unit.
If you replace the head/carriage unit, attach the property label (bar code label) that comes
with the new head/carriage unit to the lower cover as shown below.

Lower cover

Head property label (Bar code)

Property code
(16-digit)

Carriage-head flat cable

Head property label (QR code)

Head/carriage unit

(6_42)

6-54 Confidential
Note: When storing the head/carriage unit for a long period, be sure to put a head joint
rubber and an air buffer cap on the head/carriage unit and store the unit in the head casing,
as shown below. Leaving the head/carriage unit out of the casing will cause the head
nozzles and ink supply ports to dry up, resulting in a damaged head.

Latch

Head casing (upper)

Air buffer cap

Head joint rubber

Head/carriage unit

Head casing (lower)

(6_59)

Assembling Note: After replacement of the head/carriage unit, make adjustments specified
in Chapter 7, Section 7.2. (For the head/carriage unit having a round, blue seal, perform the
head replacement purge; for the unit having no seal, perform the initial purge. See Section
7.2, [ 2 ].)

Blue seal

(head_blue_seal_BHM9)

6-55 Confidential
6.1.12 Ink Absorber Box, Ink Absorber Felts, and PF Encoder Disk
Note: Do not remove the ink absorber box unless it needs to be replaced.
Note: Once the main drain tube is removed from the ink absorber box for the replacement of the
ink absorber box, it will become unusable and new part will have to be put back in. Using the
removed tube again may result in an ink leakage.
(1) Pull out the main drain tube from the ink absorber box.
Note: Pinch the end of the main drain tube with a clip in order to prevent drained ink from
leaking and the machine from getting stained with leaked ink.
Note: Do not place the main drain tube that has been pulled out on the main PCB. If the
PCB is stained with leaked ink, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
(2) Pull the ink absorber box up and out of the lower cover.
(3) Immediately set a new ink absorber box. Then replace the tube; that is, pull it off the joint
on the rear of the maintenance unit and connect a new tube to the joint and new ink
absorber box as shown below.
Note: If the ink absorber box or its surroundings are stained with ink, wipe them off with a
cloth.
(4) Take the ink absorber felts (upper and lower) out of the lower cover.
Maintenance unit Pull up the main drain tube from the joint
on the rear of the maintenance unit and
immediately connect a new one.

Main drain tube Viewed from the right

Ink absorber
box
Ink Correct Wrong
absorber
felt
(upper)

Ink absorber Main drain tube

felt (lower)
Do not connect the main drain tube
at an angle.
Connect the tube all the way seated.

Main drain tube

Lower cover (6_65_r1)

Assembling Notes:
• When connecting the main drain tube to the ink absorber box, take care not to connect it
at an angle. The tube connected at an angle comes off easily, resulting in ink leakage.
After connection, check that there is no ink leakage.
• If you replace the ink absorber box (without replacing the main PCB), you also need to
replace the flushing box (see Section 6.1.13) and reset both the purge and flushing
counters as specified in Chapter 7, Section 7.5.
6-56 Confidential
(5) Peel off the PF encoder disk from the PF roller gear L only when it should be replaced.
Note: Once removed, the PF encoder disk will become unusable and a new disk will have
to be put back in.
Note: Remove any adhesive remaining left on the PF roller gear L.
PF roller gear L

PF encoder sensor

PF encoder disk

Lower cover

(6_66)

Assembling Note: When attaching the PF encoder disk to the PF roller gear L, using a
spatular tool makes the job easier. Put on clean gloves to protect the disk surface from dust
or fingerprints.

6-57 Confidential
6.1.13 Engine Unit and Flushing Box
During disassembly jobs, except when removing the ink refill ASSY or engine unit (including
the maintenance unit), leave the head/carriage unit in the machine.
Before removing the head/carriage unit, ink refill ASSY or engine unit, you need to replace all
four ink cartridges with the protective part (see page 6-3).

(1) If the MJ/PS shield unit has not been removed, you need to remove screw "f" shown on
page 6-39.
(2) Remove the screw from the rear of the engine unit.
(3) Take the carriage motor harness, ASF motor harness, purge cam switch harness, and cap
lift cam switch harness out of the harness guides provided on the lower cover.

ASF motor harness

Taptite, cup B
M3x12

Carriage motor
harness
Lower cover

Cap lift cam switch harness

Purge cam switch harness
ASF encoder harness

ASF encoder harness Carriage motor harness Ferrite cores

ASF motor harness
Cable guide
(on the maintenance
unit)

Cap lift cam

switch harness
Purge cam Note: When routing the cap lift cam
switch harness switch harness on the lower cover, Cap lift cam
pass it under the 2nd cable guide counted switch harness
from the rear without any slack, pulling it
with your fingers.
Cable guide
(on the lower cover)
(6_67_BHL9_A3_E)

Assembling Note: If you replace the engine unit, make adjustments specified in Chapter 7,
Section 7.2.
Assembling Note: When routing the cap lift cam switch harness, first check that it passes
through the cable guide on the maintenance unit and then pass it under the 2nd cable guide (on
the lower cover) counted from the rear, pulling it with your fingers as shown above.
After routing the harness, make sure that there is no slack in the harness. If slacked, the harness
interferes with the planet gear on the maintenance unit, causing MACHINE ERROR 50.

6-58 Confidential
(4) Take the paper feed motor harness and PF encoder/registration sensor harness out of the
cable guides provided on the lower cover.
Assembling Note: Route the harnesses as shown on the next page.
(5) Lift the engine unit up and out of the lower cover in the direction of the arrow shown
below, holding the inner chute located beneath the CR guide rail.
Note: Do not hold the CR guide rail.
Note: Take care not to touch the PF encoder disk.
Note: If the ink absorber box does not need to be replaced, be sure to take it out of the
lower cover together with the engine unit. Do not disconnect the main drain tube from the
ink absorber box. Once disconnected, the tube will become unusable and a new part will
have to be put back in.
Note: Do not place the engine unit directly on a flat surface; doing so may break the PF
encoder disk and gears. Be sure to place a support pad under the engine unit as shown
below.
(6) Remove the chassis support by removing the screw.
(7) Take the flushing box and ink absorber felt out of the lower cover.

PF encoder
disk

Support pad
Engine unit

CR guide rail Ink absorber felt

Engine unit Chassis support
Taptite,
cup B
PF encoder disk M3x12

Paper feed
motor harness
PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness

Flushing box

Lower cover
(6_68)

Assembling Notes:
• Before mounting the engine unit on the lower cover, make sure that the PF encoder/
registration sensor harness is routed through the cable guides on the inner chute as shown
on the next page and page 6-68.
• When mounting the engine unit on the lower cover, be careful not to crush the harnesses
between the unit and the cover. Mount the engine unit parallel to the lower cover so that
the screws are tightened securely.
• If you replace the flushing box (without replacing the main PCB), you also need to
replace the ink absorber box (see Section 6.1.12) and reset both the flushing and purge
counters as specified in Chapter 7, Section 7.5.
6-59 Confidential
 PF encoder disk
Registration sensor PCB CR guide rail Paper feed motor harness

Lower cover

(Left) PF encoder sensor

wires (4-wire) PF encoder/
(Rear) registration
sensor harness
(7-wire)
Registration sensor wires (3-wire)

ASF encoder harness ASF motor

ASF motor
harness

Cable guides

Hook (Rear)

ASF motor
harness

Paper feed Carriage motor harness ASF encoder harness

motor harness Cap lift cam switch harness
Lower cover
PF encoder/registration Purge cam switch harness
sensor harness
(6_69_BHL9_A3)

6-60 Confidential
6.1.14 Components on the Engine Unit
(Earth spring, Maintenance unit, ASF motor*, Carriage motor, Star wheel holder, Paper
ejection roller, Platen, Inner chute ASSY, Sub chute cover, Registration sensor actuator,
Registration sensor PCB, PF encoder PCB, Paper pull-in rollers R and L, ASF gear shaft
outer, and PE actuator)
*ASF motor: Auto Sheet Feeder motor
Earth spring
(1) Release the upper and lower ends of the earth spring from the CR guide rail and the ASF
motor holder, respectively.
CR guide rail

Maintenance unit

Earth spring

ASF motor

CR guide rail

Earth spring

ASF motor

(6_71_1)

Assembling Note: When mounting the earth spring, take care not to contaminate it with
grease.
First hook the upper end on the CR guide rail and insert the lower end under the ASF
motor. The earth spring twines around the ASF motor by itself with the spring force. After
mounting it, check that the earth spring is in contact with the metal part of the ASF motor.

6-61 Confidential
 Maintenance unit
(2) Release the right end of the switching lever guide from the maintenance unit and remove it.
(3) If the ink absorber box has not been removed, pull out the main drain tube from the ink
absorber box.
Note: Pinch the end of the main drain tube with a clip in order to prevent drained ink from
leaking and the machine from getting stained with leaked ink.
(4) Remove the three screws in the order of c to e (as shown below) from the maintenance
unit and detach the maintenance unit from the engine unit.
Remove these screws in the order of 1 to 3 .
Tighten them in the reverse order.
CR guide rail
Switching lever guide
3 Apply grease here.

2
Taptite, cup B
M3x10

Maintenance unit
CR support chassis
(Front)

ASF motor/encoder
harness
Cap lift cam
switch harness
Carriage motor harness Cable guide
(6_43)

Assembling Notes:
• When setting the switching lever guide back into place, apply the specified lubricant to
the specified point, referring to Section 6.2.
• When mounting the switching lever guide on the maintenance unit, put it on the CR
guide rail and then lightly press it.
• When mounting the maintenance unit on the engine unit, fit the two bosses of the shaft
holder (on the left side of the maintenance unit) into the two holes under the CR guide
rail.
• When securing the maintenance unit with three screws, tighten these screws in the order
of eJdJc as shown above.
• When routing the cap lift cam switch harness, pass it through the cable guide on the
maintenance unit. (See the illustration above and on page 6-58.)

6-62 Confidential
ASF motor
(5) Unlatch the shaft holder and remove it from the maintenance unit.
(6) Remove the idle gear 16 and the ASF/maintenance drive gear.
(7) Remove the ASF motor from the maintenance unit by removing the two screws.
(8) Disconnect the ASF motor/encoder harness from the ASF motor.

Shaft holder
Latch

Idle gear 16
Maintenance
unit
ASF/maintenance
drive gear

Screw, pan
(s/p washer)
M3x5

ASF motor/encoder ASF motor

harness
(6_71)

Assembling Note: When mounting the ASF motor on the maintenance unit, first fit the
small hole of the ASF motor on the small boss inside the ASF motor holder, then secure the
motor with the two screws.

6-63 Confidential
Carriage motor
(9) Remove the carriage motor from the engine unit by removing the two screws.

Screw, bind
M3x6

CR guide rail

CR support chassis

(Front)

Carriage motor

(6_44)

6-64 Confidential
Star wheel holder
(10) Remove two CR frame springs from the CR support chassis.
(11) Lift up the CR support chassis.
(12) While lightly pressing down the two bosses that fit in the oval holes provided in the CR
support chassis, slide the star wheel holder to the front to release the small tabs from the
square holes of the CR support chassis and remove it.
CR frame spring

CR support chassis
Idle pulley

Square holes

Vertical loop end

Large holes

Star wheel holder

Small tabs

Boss
CR frame spring
Large tabs

Boss

CR guide rail

(Front)

Paper ejection roller

(6_45)

Assembling Notes:
• When mounting the star wheel holder under the CR support chassis, first set the large
tabs on the star wheel holder in the large holes provided in the CR support chassis, then
slide the star wheel holder to the rear to set the small tabs in the square holes provided in
the CR support chassis.
• When securing the CR support chassis to the engine unit with the CR frame springs, set
those springs so that their vertical loop ends come to the front. Pass the left spring under
the idle pulley.
6-65 Confidential
 Paper ejection roller and platen
(13) Release the PF timing belt from the paper ejection roller gear.
(14) Pull the lock arm of the bushing at each end of the paper ejection roller outwards and turn it
upright.
(15) Lift the paper ejection roller and remove the platen from the engine unit.
Paper ejection roller

Lock arm of bushing

Platen

Paper ejection Paper ejection

roller roller
Lock arm of bushing
Paper ejection
roller gear
Hole

PF timing belt (Front)

Engine unit

Paper feed motor Hole

harness

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness (6_72_2)

Assembling Note: When mounting the paper ejection roller, set its bushings into the
engine chassis and turn their lock arms to fit the bosses on the lock arms into the holes
provided in the engine chassis.

6-66 Confidential
 Inner chute ASSY, registration sensor actuator, registration sensor PCB, and PF encoder
PCB
(16) Release the three latches of the inner chute ASSY from the engine unit. First pull and
release the rightmost latch (viewed from the rear) and then the remaining two ones.
Note: Do not pull the inner chute ASSY away from the engine unit since it is connected to
the engine unit with the PF encoder/registration sensor harness.
(17) Release the PF encoder/registration sensor harness from the cable guides on the inner chute
ASSY. (The routing detail is shown on the next page.)

Latches CR guide rail

Inner chute ASSY

Latch

Paper feed (Front)

motor harness

PF encoder PCB
Registration
sensor PCB Engine unit

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Registration
sensor wires
PF encoder disk
Latch
Engine unit PF encoder sensor wires
Carriage motor harness (6_73)

Assembling Note: When mounting the inner chute on the engine unit, first set the left two
latches and then the rightmost one.

6-67 Confidential
 (18) Turn the registration sensor actuator in the direction of the arrow shown below and take it
off the inner chute ASSY. The sensor actuator spring comes off.
(19) Take the registration sensor PCB out of the support arms.
Note: The registration sensor PCB and the PF encoder PCB are assembled with their
harnesses. To completely release the registration sensor PCB from the engine unit,
therefore, you need to remove the PF encoder PCB at the next step.

Hooking the sensor actuator spring

Sensor actuator spring

Registration
Routing the PF encoder/registration sensor sensor actuator
harness on the inner chute ASSY

Registration
sensor PCB
Support arms
Cable guide
Inner chute ASSY

Inner chute
ASSY

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Registration sensor PCB

Cable guide

Support
arms

Sensor actuator spring

Actuator support Registration sensor actuator (6_74)

Assembling Note: Before mounting the inner chute on the engine unit, set the registration
sensor actuator and its spring. Also set the registration sensor PCB and route the PF
encoder/registration sensor harness as shown above.

6-68 Confidential
(20) At the left end of the engine unit, remove the screw that secures the PF encoder PCB and its
support to the engine unit, taking care not to touch the PF encoder disk (if it has not been
removed in Section 6.1.12).
(21) If the PF encoder disk needs to be replaced, peel it off from the PF roller gear L.
Note: Once removed, the PF encoder disk will become unusable and a new disk will have
to be put back in.
Note: Remove any adhesive remaining left on the PF roller gear L.

Paper feed roller

Paper feed
motor harness CR guide rail

Encoder PCB support

PF encoder PCB
Screw, bind
M2x12
PF roller Engine unit
gear L

PF encoder wires
Ejection idle gear
PF encoder disk (6_75)

Assembling Note: When attaching the PF encoder disk to the PF roller gear L, using a
spatular tool makes the job easier. Put on clean gloves to protect the disk surface from dust
or fingerprints.

6-69 Confidential
Paper pull-in rollers R and L, and ASF gear shaft outer
(22) Pull the pawl outwards and remove the paper pull-in roller R. Then pull out the paper pull-
in roller L while turning it. The paper pull-in gear also comes off.
(23) Remove the ASF idle gear holder from the right side of the engine unit.
(24) Pull the ASF gear shaft outer to the right and out of the engine unit.
Apply grease here.
Apply grease here.

Paper pull-in gear

Paper pull-in roller R
Paper pull-in roller L

Paper pull-in
roller R
Paper pull-in roller L
Paper pull-in
gear

Pawl
Engine unit
(placed upside down)

(Front)
ASF idle gear holder Apply grease here.
Paper pull-in idle gear

ASF gear shaft outer

(6_76_r1)

Assembling Note: Before mounting the paper pull-in roller L, apply the specified
lubricant to the paper pull-in idle gear and paper pull-in roller L, referring to Section 6.2.

6-70 Confidential
PE actuator
(25) Lift up the front end of the PE actuator as shown below. Using the spring hook or the like,
release the long end of the PE actuator spring from the groove provided in the PE actuator,
and then remove the spring.
Note: When releasing the spring, hold it taking care not to let the spring bounce off.
(26) Pull the PE actuator outward at the point connected with the gear holder, release its bosses
from the gear holder, and take it off.

PE actuator

Long end of the

PE actuator spring
PE actuator
Bosses

Spring hook

Gear
holder

PE actuator spring

Engine unit
(placed upside down)

(PE actuator_1)

6-71 Confidential
 Assembling Note: First mount the PE actuator on the gear holder and then set the spring
back into place, using the following steps.
1) Fit either one of the bosses on the PE actuator into the hole in the gear holder, pull the
PE actuator outward, and fit the other one.
Bosses
PE actuator

Gear
holder

Engine unit
(placed upside down)

(PE actuator_2)

2) Lift up the front end of the PE actuator. After fitting the short end of the PE actuator
spring into the groove provided in the gear holder, set the spring back into place, and
then fit the long end into the groove in the PE actuator.
PE actuator

Fit the long end of the

PE actuator spring into
the groove.

Gear holder

Engine unit
(placed upside down)
PE actuator spring

Fit the short end of the

PE actuator spring into
the groove.

PE actuator spring

(PE actuator_3)

6-72 Confidential
6.1.15 Bank ASSY and Base Pad on the Paper Tray ASSY
(1) Pull the four lock arms on the rear of the paper tray outwards and release the four latches of
the bank ASSY. Then pull the bank ASSY up and out of the paper tray.
(2) If the base pad needs to be replaced, peel it off the bottom of the paper tray.
Note: Once removed, the base pad will become unusable and a new pad will have to be put
back in.
Depressed
section Base pad
Bank ASSY Paper tray

Pawls

Align the edge of the

base pad with the front edge
of the depressed section on the
paper tray.

Paper tray

Base pad

Latch Unlatching the bank ASSY

Bank ASSY

Lock arm

Paper tray

(6_79_BHL9_A3_J)

Assembling Notes:
• When attaching a new base pad to the paper tray, align the edge of the base pad with the
front edge of the depressed section on the paper tray as shown above.
• When mounting the bank ASSY, first insert the four pawls into the openings in the paper
tray and then press the inside of the bank ASSY so that the latches snap into place.

6-73 Confidential
6.1.16 Routing of the Harnesses, Flat Cables, and Ink Supply Tubes
Routing A: Document sensor PCB harness, CIS motor harness, ADF motor harness and
grounding wires on the upper cover

Cable guide

Cable guides

Cable guide

Route the bundle of ADF motor

harness and its grounding wire, Route the document
the CIS motor harness, and the sensor PCB harness
grounding wire on this left side. on this right side.
CIS motor harness
Cable guides Grounding wire
Document sensor
PCB harness
Cable guides Main PCB

Ferrite core

Grounding wire

ADF motor harness Upper cover

(6_08)

6-74 Confidential
Routing B: Document sensor PCB harness, ADF motor harness, and grounding wires on
the lower ADF chute
„ On the lower ADF chute

Lower ADF chute Document front

Ferrite core sensor actuator

Document sensor
PCB

ADF motor
harness

Cable Document rear

guides sensor actuator
Ferrite core
Grounding Document sensor
wire PCB harness

Document sensor PCB harness (6_24)

Grounding wire ADF motor harness

„ On the document cover

Document cover

Cable tie

Cut off the excess of the

cable tie with nippers.

Bundle of harnesses
(ADF motor harness, grounding wire,
and document sensor PCB harness)

(6_25)

6-75 Confidential
 Routing C: Battery harness and speaker harness on the upper cover
„ Battery harness and speaker harness

Backup battery

Cable guide

Speaker Cable guide

Cable guide

Cable guides
Main PCB

Cable guide Battery harness

Upper cover Speaker harness (6_37)

„ Speaker harness

Upper cover

Speaker

(6_33_1)
Cable guides

6-76 Confidential
Routing D: WLAN PCB harness (for wireless LAN-enabled model)

Main PCB
Lower cover

(6_39a)

WLAN PCB harness

WLAN PCB Front cover

6-77 Confidential
Routing E: Carriage motor harness, ASF motor harness, paper feed motor harness, PF
encoder/registration sensor harness, power supply harness, main-MJ (EXT)
harness, and main-MJ (LINE) harness on the lower cover

„ On the SDAA enclosure

Carriage motor harness Main-MJ (LINE)
Paper feed motor harness harness (yellow)
ASF motor harness SDAA enclosure
Main-MJ (EX
harness (black

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness
Main PCB

Power supply harness (6_41)

„ On the lower cover

Main-MJ (LINE) harness (yellow) Main-MJ (EXT) harness (black)

Carriage motor harness Paper feed motor harness
ASF motor harness
Main PCB

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Power supply harness

Channel (6_49_BHL9_A3)

6-78 Confidential
 Routing F: Power supply harness, power cord, main-MJ (LINE) harness, main-MJ
(EXT) harness in the MJ/PS shield unit

PS PCB insulator
Cable guide on the
MJ PCB insulator

Power supply PCB

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (yellow)

Lower MJ/PS shield

Power supply harness

Power supply PCB

PS PCB insulator
Lower MJ/PS shield

Fit the corner of the PS PCB insulator

into the cutout provided in the lower
Routing of power cord MJ/PS shield. (6_47_1_J)

Lock of the lower

MJ/PS shield

Power supply
shield

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)

Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (yellow)

Lower MJ/PS shield

Square hole provided in
the lower MJ/PS shield
Power supply harness
Shield support on the
power supply shield (6_47_2_J)

6-79 Confidential
 Top view
Ferrite core

MJ PCB

Main-MJ (EXT) Cable guides

harness (black)
Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (yellow) Power supply
shield
Cable guide on the
MJ PCB insulator Power supply
Power cord
PS PCB insulator harness
Power supply PCB Route the power cord
under this tab.

Power supply harness

Top view
For 200 V series
Ferrite core

MJ PCB

Main-MJ (EXT)
harness (black)
Cable guides
Main-MJ (LINE)
harness (yellow)
Power supply
Cable guide on the shield
MJ PCB insulator
PS PCB insulator Power supply
Power cord
harness
Power supply PCB
Route the power cord
under this tab.

Power supply harness (6_48_1_BHL9)

6-80 Confidential
Routing G: Ink supply tubes

(Front)
Tube guide

Sponge

Tube/cable guide

Tube support plate

Lower cover

Bent section of
tube support wire

Magenta
Tube support wire
Cyan Yellow Black
(6_64)

6-81 Confidential
 Routing H: Head flat cables
Cable guides
Tube/cable guide
Lower cover
Head flat
cables

Cable guide
Tube support plate
Tube support wire
(6_63_1)

Routing I: Purge cam switch harness, cap lift cam switch harness, carriage motor
harness, and ASF motor/encoder harness on the lower cover
ASF encoder harness Carriage motor harness Ferrite cores
ASF motor harness

Cable guide
(on the maintenance unit)

Cap lift cam

switch harness
Purge cam
switch harness Note: When routing the cap lift cam
switch harness on the lower cover,
pass it under the 2nd cable guide counted
from the rear without any slack, pulling it
Cap lift cam
with your fingers.
switch harness
Cable guide
(on the lower cover)
(6_67_1_BHL9_A3_E)

6-82 Confidential
 Routing J: PF encoder/registration sensor harness
„ On the inner chute ASSY

Registration sensor PCB

Inner chute ASSY

Cable guide

PF encoder/registration
sensor harness

Cable guide
(6_74_1)

„ On the lower cover

Registration sensor PCB CR guide rail PF encoder disk

Paper feed motor harness

Lower cover

(Left) PF encoder sensor

wires (4-wire) PF encoder/
(Rear) registration
sensor harness
Registration sensor wires (3-wire) (7-wire)

(6_69_1)

Routing K: ASF motor/encoder harness on the lower cover

ASF encoder harness ASF motor

ASF motor
harness

Cable guides

Hook (Rear) (6_69_2)

6-83 Confidential
 Routing L: Harnesses, flat cables and ink tubes on the lower cover

Top view

(Lower cover) Ink supply tubes Head flat cables

Paper feed motor

harness
Carriage motor
harness

ASF motor harness

PF encoder/
registration
sensor harness

Power supply
harness

Head flat Head flat Cap lift cam

WLAN PCB harness cable 3 cable 1 Ink empty switch harness
sensor
Main-MJ (LINE) ASF encoder harness
harness (yellow) Head flat harness Ink cartridge
cable 2 Purge cam detection sensor
Main-MJ (EXT) switch harness harness
harness (black)
(6_83_BHL9_A3)

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

6-84 Confidential
6.2 LUBRICATION

Apply the specified lubricants to the lubrication points as shown below.

Lubricant type No. of Lubricant amount

Lubrication points
(Manufacturer) points per point
Permalub BAN-5 Head/carriage unit 3 1.5 mm diameter ball
(Nippon Koyu)
Motor plate and CR guide rail 1 mm diameter ball
4
(bottom edges)
Switching lever guide 1 3 mm diameter ball
FLOIL BG1319 CR guide rail (upper face) 11 2 mm diameter ball
(Kanto Kasei)
CR support chassis (upper face) 11
CR support chassis (front and rear
28
sides of upright rear edge)
Molykote EM-30LP Paper pull-in idle gear 1 3 mm diameter ball
(Dow Corning)
Paper pull-in roller L 2 1 mm diameter ball

„ Head/carriage unit
Apply a 1.5 mm diameter ball of grease (Permalub BAN-5) to the lubrication points below.

Apply grease here.

Head/carriage unit
(6_84)

6-85 Confidential
„ Motor plate and CR guide rail (bottom edges)
Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (Permalub BAN-5) to the lubrication points below.
Viewed from the bottom
CR support chassis

Motor plate
34+1

19+1

0.5 to 1.0
(Right)
Apply grease here.

0.5 to 1.0
42+1

8+1

(mm)
CR guide rail (6_86)

„ Switching lever guide

Apply a 3 mm diameter ball of grease (Permalub BAN-5) to the lubrication point below.
Switching lever guide

Apply grease here. (6_89)

6-86 Confidential
„ CR guide rail and CR support chassis (upper face)
Apply a 2 mm diameter ball of grease (FLOIL BG1319) to each of the 22 lubrication points
below.
Lubrication procedure
(1) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel and hit it against the stoppers
provided at the left end of the CR guide rail and support chassis. This is to make the pair of
slider cams protrude to the right from the head/carriage unit, making the gap between the
head and the platen 1.6 mm.
(2) Before applying grease, wipe dirt or dusts off the lubrication area with an alcohol soaked
cloth.
(3) Apply grease to the 22 lubrication points on the CR guide rail and support chassis as
specified below, with the head/carriage unit placed on the left end of its travel.
(4) Move the head/carriage unit from the left to the right ends of its travel to spread the applied
grease on the CR guide rail and chassis.

Apply grease to
these 11 points. CR guide rail
30 55

CR support chassis 40.7+0.5 59.6+0.5

Apply grease to (mm)
these 11 points.
(6_85)

6-87 Confidential
 „ CR support chassis (front and rear sides of upright rear edge)
Apply a 2 mm diameter ball of grease (FLOIL BG1319) to each of the 28 lubrication points
(front and back surfaces of the rear vertical edge of CR support chassis) as shown below.

Head/carriage unit

25
35

CR support chassis

(Front)

Apply grease to these 28 points

(14 points on each of the front and
back surfaces of the rear vertical
edge of CR support chassis).
5.3+0.5
(mm)

(6_85_2)

6-88 Confidential
„ Paper pull-in idle gear and paper pull-in roller L
Apply a 3 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LP) to the lubrication point on the
paper pull-in idle gear as shown below. After applying the grease at the center of a gear teeth,
rotate the gear until the lubrication point is hidden by the adjacent gear, taking care not to touch
the paper pull-in rollers.
Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LP) to the lubrication points on the
paper pull-in roller L as shown below.
Apply grease here.
Apply grease here.

Paper pull-in gear

Paper pull-in roller R
Paper pull-in roller L

Paper pull-in
roller R
Paper pull-in roller L
Paper pull-in
gear

Pawl
Engine unit
(placed upside down)

(Front)
ASF idle gear holder Apply grease here.
Paper pull-in idle gear

ASF gear shaft outer

(6_76_r1)

6-89 Confidential
 CHAPTER 7
ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT

Confidential
CHAPTER 7 ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,
REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT

This chapter details adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the head/carriage unit,
main PCB and some other parts have been replaced.

CONTENTS

7.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.1 Requirements ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 Installing the Maintenance USB Printer Driver .......................................... 7-3
7.2 IF YOU REPLACE THE HEAD/CARRIAGE UNIT OR ENGINE UNIT................... 7-7
[1] Update the head property information stored in the EEPROM
on the main PCB ............................................................................... 7-7
[2] Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76) ...................... 7-10
For the head/carriage unit having a round, blue seal* ...................... 7-10
For the head/carriage unit having no seal......................................... 7-10
[3] Print out a test pattern (Function code 09) ........................................ 7-11
[4] Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit...................... 7-12
[5] Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58) ........ 7-15
[6] Align vertical print lines (Function code 65) ...................................... 7-19
[7] Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66) ................. 7-21
[8] Print out a total check pattern ........................................................... 7-26
[9] Switch back to standby ..................................................................... 7-28
[ 10 ] Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part ........................... 7-28
7.3 IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB ....................................................................... 7-29
[1] Load update programs/data .............................................................. 7-29
[2] Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01) ........... 7-29
[3] Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74) ....... 7-29
[4] Specify the LCD type (For models with 3.3-inch LCD)
(Function code 12) ............................................................................ 7-29
[5] Specify the CIS type (Function code 59)........................................... 7-29
[6] Check the control panel PCB for normal operation
(Function code 13) ............................................................................ 7-29
[7] Check the sensor operation (Function code 32) ............................... 7-29
[8] Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area
(Function code 55) ............................................................................ 7-29
[9] Set an ID code and update the head property information ............... 7-29
[ 10 ] Back up machine information (Function code 46)............................. 7-31

Confidential
 [ 11 ] Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58) ........ 7-32
[ 12 ] Align vertical print lines (Function code 65) ...................................... 7-32
[ 13 ] Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66) ................. 7-32
[ 14 ] Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart
in ADF scanning................................................................................ 7-32
[ 15 ] Check LCD operation and specify the LCD type
(Function code 12) ............................................................................ 7-32
[ 16 ] Get EEPROM data (incl. MAC address) from the WLAN PCB
(For wireless LAN-enabled model).................................................... 7-32
[ 17 ] Switch back to standby ..................................................................... 7-32
7.4 IF YOU REPLACE THE ADF UNIT OR ADF-RELATED PARTS ........................... 7-33
[1] Check the "Total Quality Check Pattern" ........................................... 7-33
[2] Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart
in ADF scanning................................................................................ 7-33
7.5 IF YOU REPLACE THE INK ABSORBER BOX OR FLUSHING BOX ................... 7-36
[1] Reset each of the purge and flushing counters................................. 7-36
7.6 IF YOU REPLACE THE CONTROL PANEL ASSY OR CONTROL PANEL PCB .. 7-37
[1] Check LCD operation and specify the LCD type
(Function code 12) ............................................................................ 7-37
[2] Check the operation of the control panel PCB (Function code 13) ... 7-37
7.7 IF YOU REPLACE THE SCANNER COVER (SCANNER UNIT) ........................... 7-37
[1] Specify the CIS Type (Function code 59).......................................... 7-37
[2] Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area
(Function code 55) ............................................................................ 7-37
[3] Check the "Total Quality Check Pattern" ........................................... 7-37
[4] Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart
in ADF scanning................................................................................ 7-37
7.8 IF YOU REPLACE THE WLAN PCB
(FOR WIRELESS LAN-ENABLED MODEL) .......................................................... 7-37
[1] Transfer EEPROM data (incl. MAC address) to the main PCB......... 7-37

Confidential
7.1 PREPARATION

7.1.1 Requirements
Before proceeding to perform any adjustments or update any settings, you need the executables,
data files, spare parts and supplies (provided by Brother Industries) and must set up your PC.
Note: Before starting any operation involving printing of check patterns, be sure to set A4-size
recording paper.
Note: Data files having the extension .prn in the table below are provided with actual names
****_a3.prn or ****_a4.prn. When printing check patterns for adjustment, use a file suitable
for the allowable maximum print size (A3 or A4) of the machine.
Note: Executables and data files listed below should be saved in an arbitrary folder in your PC
beforehand.

Executables and Data Files Required for Adjustments and Updating of Settings

Brother
Maintenance USB brusbsn.exe brusbsn.ini filedg32.exe incline.prn
Printer driver
Head/carriage unit, Engine unit √ √ √ √
(Section 7.2) √

Main PCB (Section 7.3) √ √ √ √ √

ADF unit, ADF-related parts
√ √
(Section 7.4)
Ink absorber box, Flushing box
(Section 7.5)
Control panel ASSY,
Control panel PCB (Section 7.6)
Scanner cover (Section 7.7) √
WLAN PCB (Section 7.8)

pfadj.prn exitadj.prn media.prn bottomadj.prn qualbh9.prn chart.prn

Head/carriage unit, Engine unit
(Section 7.2) √ √ √ √ √

Main PCB (Section 7.3) √ √ √ √ √ √

ADF unit, ADF-related parts √ √
(Section 7.4)
Ink absorber box, Flushing box
(Section 7.5)
Control panel ASSY,
Control panel PCB (Section 7.6)
Scanner cover (Section 7.7) √ √
WLAN PCB (Section 7.8)

7-1 Confidential
Spare Parts and Supplies Required for Adjustments and Updating of Settings

Recording paper Ink cartridges Protective part

(A4-size)
Head/carriage unit, Engine unit √ √ √
(Section 7.2)
Main PCB (Section 7.3) √ √
ADF unit, ADF-related parts
√ √
(Section 7.4)
Ink absorber box, Flushing box
(Section 7.5)
Control panel ASSY,
Control panel PCB (Section 7.6)
Scanner cover (Section 7.7) √ √
WLAN PCB (Section 7.8)

Note: Use a PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 2000 or later.

7-2 Confidential
7.1.2 Installing the Maintenance USB Printer Driver
If you want to change the programs stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB or after you
replace the main PCB, load the desired programs to the flash ROM.
Loading requires a PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 2000 or later.
Caution: During loading, never turn off your PC or the machine, unplug the USB interface
cable, interrupt loading, or load invalid data. If you do so, loading will fail, causing the PCB to
be unusable. You will have to replace the main PCB and load programs to a new PCB.
Preparation
You need the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver and filedg32.exe (provided by Brother
Industries). Save them in an arbitrary folder in your PC.

Installing the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver

To identify machines connected via USB direct interface, the PC requires the corresponding
driver for the virtual USB device. If you connect any number of machines to your PC, the same
number of virtual USB devices will be automatically configured on your PC. To prevent many
virtual USB devices from being configured, use the unique driver installation procedure
described below that enables your PC to identify terminals via one single virtual USB device.
NOTES: • Once this installation procedure is carried out for a PC, no more driver/software
installation will be required for that PC to identify machines. If the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer driver has been already installed to your PC according to
this procedure, skip this section.
• Before proceeding to the procedure given below, make sure that the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer driver is stored in your PC.
(1) Check that the power switch of the machine is turned off. Disconnect the USB cable that
connects the machine with your PC.
(2) Turn on your PC.
(3) Turn on the power switch of the machine.
(4) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.

7-3 Confidential
(5) Connect the machine to your PC using the USB cable.
The following window appears.

(6) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of new hardware device by the
system. Select "No, not this time." And click Next.

(7) Select "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" and click Next.

7-4 Confidential
(8) Alert warning message of WHQL appears. Click Continue Anyway to proceed.

7-5 Confidential
(9) Repeat steps (6) to (8) three times. Installation is completed.
(10) If the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver is successfully installed, the following
message screen appears. Click Finish to return.

NOTE: In order to check whether the printer driver is successfully installed, click Start |
Settings | Printers to call up the Printers window. Then, check that the Brother Maintenance
USB Printer icon is shown.

7-6 Confidential
7.2 IF YOU REPLACE THE HEAD/CARRIAGE UNIT OR ENGINE UNIT

[ 1 ] Update the head property information stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB
(1) Make sure that the machine's power cord is unplugged from an electrical outlet.
If the machine is connected to a PC, unplug the USB cable.
(2) Switch on the PC.
(3) Plug the machine's power cord into an electrical outlet.
(4) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(5) Connect the machine to the PC using a USB cable.
(6) On the PC, run the ID/head property setup utility (brusbsn.exe) in the folder created in
Section 7.1.1. The following window appears.

(7) On the model menu, click BH9.

7-7 Confidential
(8) In Port on the BrUsbSn screen, select the port number assigned to the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer. If the port number is unknown, follow steps 1) through 4)
below.
1) Click Start | Settings | Printers.

The Printers window appears as shown below.

2) Right-click the Brother Maintenance USB Printer icon.

3) Click Properties.

7-8 Confidential
 The Brother Maintenance USB Printer Properties window appears as shown below.
4) Click the Ports tab.

In this example, the port number assigned to the Brother Maintenance USB Printer is
USB001.
(9) In the Head Info. box on the BrUsbSn screen (page 7-7), type the 16-digit property code
(e.g., ALR7765501200000) which is printed on the bar code label attached to the lower
cover. Click the OK button.
(10) To check that the entered head property code is correct (using function code 68 in Chapter
9, Section 9.4.21), press the 6 and 8 keys in this order. Then press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in
this order.
The LCD shows the current head property information (16-digit code) stored in the
EEPROM on the main PCB.
(11) Check that the character string entered in step (9) appears.
If it is OK, press the Stop/Exit key.
If something other than that appears, check the connection between the PC and machine
and go back to step (6).

7-9 Confidential
[ 2 ] Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76)
(1) Open the ink cartridge cover, set new ink cartridges into the ink refill ASSY, and close the
ink cartridge cover.
(2) Carry out a purge operation (with function code 76) using the steps below. (See Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.25.)
Press the 7 and 6 keys in this order.
The machine displays "CLEANING ALL" on the LCD and enters the purge mode.
For the head/carriage unit having a round, blue seal*
Press the 0 and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order to start the head replacement
purge.
For the head/carriage unit having no seal
Press the 4 and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order to start the initial purge.
* Some spare head/carriage units have a round, blue seal on their left sides as shown below.

Blue seal

(head_blue_seal_BHM9)

The machine starts a head replacement purge or an initial purge that refills the ink supply
tubes and the new print head with fresh ink.

7-10 Confidential
[ 3 ] Print out a test pattern (Function code 09)
To check that the head/carriage unit normally sprays ink droplets from all head nozzles, print
out a test pattern with function code 09 (see Chapter 9, Section 9.4.4) with the following steps.
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order.
(2) If a missing dot or any other print problem is found, go back to [ 2 ] above to clean the
head/carriage unit again.

Test Pattern

7-11 Confidential
[ 4 ] Correct the positioning error of the head/carriage unit
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) Run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "incline.prn" icon onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon
in the Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "Incline
Adjust" test pattern shown on the next page.
(3) Out of the three rows of the "Incline Adjust" test pattern (on the next page), check the
middle row and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block
number.

7-12 Confidential
Head Positioning Test Pattern

7-13 Confidential
(4) Move the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel with function code 63 (see Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.18) using the following key operation.
Press the 6, 3, and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order to display "START 63?" on
the LCD. Next, press the * key.
(5) Turn the head skew adjuster knob by the number of divisions specified by the pattern
number you recorded in step (3), using a spanner.
If block +1 is the least uneven print, for example, turn the head skew adjuster knob
clockwise by one division; if block -1, turn it counterclockwise by one division.

Counterclockwise

Clockwise
Head skew adjuster knob

(head_skew_adjuster_knob_BHM9)

(6) After completion of the adjustment, press the Stop/Exit key. The head/carriage unit returns
to the home position (head capping position).

7-14 Confidential
[ 5 ] Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

For the paper feed roller adjustment

(2) Drag and drop the "pfadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in the
Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out "PF adjust
check" pattern (see page 7-17 for a sample printout).
(3) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(4) To select the paper feed roller adjustment, press the 1 key.
The "PF ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(5) Out of the three rows of the "PF adjust check" pattern (on page 7-17), check the middle row
and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.
If the least unevenness seems to be far to the left of -8, regard it as -8; if it seems to be far to
the right of +8, regard it as +8. In this case, you need to check whether the paper feed roller
and head/carriage unit are set into place.

7-15 Confidential
(6) Enter the number of the least uneven block found in step (5).
For example, if the number of the least uneven block is +4, press the 4 key when the "PF
ADJ NO. +0" is displayed on the LCD.
If the number is -4, press the key to display the "PF ADJ NO. -0" and press the 4 key.
Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.

For the paper ejection roller adjustment

(7) On your PC, drag and drop the "exitadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer
driver icon in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "EXIT
adjust check" pattern (see page 7-18 for a sample printout).
(8) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(9) To select the paper ejection roller adjustment, press the 2 key.
The "EXIT ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(10) On the "EXIT adjust check" pattern (on page 7-18) consisting of two rows, check each row
and select the block that is the least uneven print on each row. Make a note of the average
of the two block numbers.
If the number of the block that is the least uneven print is 0 on one row, and it is -2 on the
other row, for example, the average is -1.
(11) Enter the average obtained in step (10) in the same way as in step (6).
Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.

7-16 Confidential
Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Feed Roller

7-17 Confidential
Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Ejection Roller

7-18 Confidential
[ 6 ] Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) Press the 6, 5 and 1 keys in this order.
The machine displays the "PRINTING" on the LCD and prints three sets of vertical
alignment check patterns (see below and the next page) in monochrome for 450 dpi, 600
dpi and 1200 dpi, each of which consists of #0 through #8 blocks. If the vertical alignment
is ON, #5 block shows vertically aligned lines.
The "450DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(2) For 450 dpi, check the printed vertical alignment check patterns and find which number
block shows full alignment.
If the full alignment block is other than #5, enter that block number, using the numerical
keys.
The "600DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(3) For 600 dpi, perform the same operation as in step (2).
The "1200DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(4) For 1200 dpi, perform the same operation as in step (2).
The machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If #1 or #8 block is fully aligned so that you press the 1 or 8 key in the above
procedure, then go back to step (1) to confirm that #5 block becomes aligned.

Vertical Alignment Check Patterns (1/2)

7-19 Confidential
Vertical Alignment Check Patterns (2/2)

7-20 Confidential
[ 7 ] Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66)
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

Left and right margin adjustment

(2) Drag and drop the "media.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in
the Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "MEDIA
CHECK" pattern (see page 7-24 for a sample printout). This is for checking the left and
right margins.
(3) Measure the left and right margins on the printed pattern.
The upper row is printed in 600 dpi, and the lower row, in 1200 dpi.
(Example) 600 dpi Left: 0.8 mm, Right: 1.1 mm
1200 dpi Left: 0.9 mm, Right: 1.2 mm
If both of the left and right margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, no adjustment
is required. If not, go to step (4).
(4) If either of the left and right margins is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice and
the * key on the machine.
The "LEFT: 10" appears on the LCD.

7-21 Confidential
(5) To adjust the left margin in 600 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the left margin measured in step (3) is 0.8 mm, so press the 0, 8, and OK
keys.
NOTE: In models having no OK key on the control panel, press the Photo Capture key.
The "RIGHT1: 10" appears on the LCD.
(6) To adjust the right margin in 600 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (3) is 1.1 mm, so press the 1, 1, and OK
keys.
The "LEFT2: 10" appears on the LCD.
(7) To adjust the left margin in 1200 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (3) is 0.9 mm, so press the 0, 9, and OK
keys.
The "RIGHT2: 10" appears on the LCD.
(8) To adjust the right margin in 1200 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (3) is 1.2 mm, so press the 1, 2, and OK
keys.
Upon completion of the entry, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
(9) Go back to step (2) and print out the left and right margin check pattern again.
(10) Measure the left and right margins on the printed pattern.
If both of the left and right margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, the adjustment
is completed.

Bottom margin adjustment

(11) Drag and drop the "bottomadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon
in the Filedrgs window shown on the previous page.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the
"BOTTOM Adjust" pattern (see page 7-25 for a sample printout). This is for checking the
bottom margin.
(12) Measure the bottom margin on the printed pattern.
(Example) Bottom margin: 3.1 mm
If it is within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, no adjustment is required. If not, go to step
(13).
(13) If the bottom margin is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice and the # key on the
machine.
The "BOTTOM: 30" appears on the LCD.

7-22 Confidential
(14) To adjust the bottom margin, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by
10.
In this example, the bottom margin measured in step (12) is 3.1 mm, so press the 3, 1, and
OK keys.
Upon completion of the entry, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
(15) Go back to step (11) and print out the bottom margin check pattern again.
(16) Measure the bottom margin on the printed pattern.
If it is within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, the adjustment is completed.

7-23 Confidential
Left and Right Margin Check Pattern

7-24 Confidential
Bottom Margin Check Pattern

7-25 Confidential
[ 8 ] Print out a total check pattern
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "qualbh9.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in
the Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "Total
Quality Check Pattern" (see the next page for a sample printout).
(3) Check the printed check pattern. If any problem is found, go back to the related item (any
of [ 4 ] through [ 7 ] above) and make adjustments again.
A: Leading-edge print start position Check that the top margin is within 3±1 mm and the first printed line is not
inclined.
B: Checking for horizontal streaks Check for no banding or black/white horizontal streaks.
C: Margin adjustment for borderless Check that there is no left or right margin in 600 dpi.
printing (600 dpi) Go back to Section 7.2 [ 7 ].
D: Paper feed roller adjustment Check the result of PF roller compensation. Check that the section number
with the lightest checkered pattern is within ±2. Go back to Section 7.2 [ 5 ].
E: Margin adjustment for borderless Check that there is no left or right margin in 1200 dpi.
printing (1200 dpi) Go back to Section 7.2 [ 7 ].
F: Adjustment of vertical print lines Check that #2 block with "OK" shows full alignment in each of 450 dpi, 600
(450 dpi, 600 dpi, and 1200 dpi) dpi, and 1200 dpi. Go back to Section 7.2 [ 6 ].
G: Head positioning adjustment Check the result of the head skew adjustment. Check that the section number
with the lightest checkered pattern is within ±2. Go back to Section 7.2 [ 4 ].
H: Margin adjustment for borderless Check that there is no left or right margin in 600 dpi.
printing (600 dpi) Go back to Section 7.2 [ 7 ].
I: Adjustment of discharging
conditions of all nozzles Check that all nozzles discharge ink normally.

J: Checking for vertical streaks Check for no white/black vertical streaks.

K: Margin adjustment for borderless Check that there is no left or right margin in 1200 dpi.
printing (1200 dpi) Go back to Section 7.2 [ 7 ].
L: Paper ejection roller adjustment Check the result of the exit roller compensation. Check that the section
number with the lightest checkered pattern is within ±2. Go back to Section
7.2 [ 5 ].
M:Margin adjustment for borderless Check that the bottom margin is within 5±2 mm. Go back to Section 7.2 [ 7 ].
printing (trailing edge)

(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until no problem is found.

7-26 Confidential
 A

Total Check Pattern

A: Leading-edge print start position
B: Checking for horizontal streaks
C, E, H, K, M: Margin adjustments for borderless printing
D: Paper feed roller adjustment
F: Adjustment of vertical print lines
G: Head positioning adjustment
I: Adjustment of discharging conditions of all nozzles
J: Checking for vertical streaks
L: Paper ejection roller adjustment

7-27 Confidential
 [ 9 ] Switch back to standby
After completion of the adjustment, disconnect the USB cable.
Then press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.
Note: Be sure to disconnect the USB cable first. Returning to standby without disconnecting the
USB cable runs "Found New Hardware Wizard" that starts USB driver installation (as
described in Section 7.1.2).

[ 10 ] Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part

Remove all four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead. Check that the small tabs on
both sides of the protective part fit in the holes inside the ink refill ASSY.

(protective_part)
Protective part

7-28 Confidential
7.3 IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB

Note: If you replace the main PCB, it is necessary to make a backup of the machine information and
user setting information into an external memory before starting disassembly of the machine. After
the completion of reassembling jobs, restore the backup data to the new main PCB. For detailed
procedure of the backup and restoration, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.11 "Backup of Machine
Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)."

[ 1 ] Load update programs/data

„ If the main PCB is replaced with a new one:
Load the desired programs onto the flash ROM. Refer to Appendix 2, page App. 2-5.
„ If the main PCB loaded with programs is used (Updating existing programs):
Change the firmware stored in the flash ROM. Refer to Appendix 2, page App. 2-7.

[ 2 ] Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.1.

[ 3 ] Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.23.

[ 4 ] Specify the LCD type (For models with 3.3-inch LCD) (Function code 12)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.6.
[ 5 ] Specify the CIS type (Function code 59)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.17.

[ 6 ] Check the control panel PCB for normal operation (Function code 13)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.7

[ 7 ] Check the sensor operation (Function code 32)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.9.

[ 8 ] Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)
Refer toChapter 9, Section 9.4.15.

[ 9 ] Set an ID code and update the head property information

Note: Make sure that the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver has been installed to your
PC. To do it, click Start | Settings | Printers to call up the Printers window and confirm that the
Brother Maintenance USB Printer icon (shown on the sample window on page 7-8) is
displayed. If the driver has not been installed, install it referring to Section 7.1.2.
(1) Make sure that your PC is turned off, then connect the machine to your PC using a USB
cable.
(2) Switch your PC on.

7-29 Confidential
(3) On your PC, run the ID/head property utility (brusbsn.exe) in the folder created in Section
7.1.1. The following window appears.

(4) On the model menu, click BH9.

(5) In Port on the BrUsbSn screen, select the port number assigned to the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer. If the port number is unknown, follow the instructions given in
Section 7.2 [ 1 ], step (8).
(6) In the Serial No box on the BrUsbSn screen, type the 9-digit serial number (e.g.,
D6F111101) printed on the nameplate labeled to the machine as an ID code.

(app01b)
Serial number label

7-30 Confidential
 (7) In the Head Info. box, type the 16-digit property code (e.g., ALR7765501200000) which
is printed on the bar code label attached to the lower cover. Click the OK button.

Head property label

(Bar code) (head_property_BHL9_A3)

(8) Check whether the entered character strings (ID code and head property information) are
correct with the following procedure.
In the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the 8 and 0 keys in this order to call up
the log information on the LCD.
Then press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the ID code appears on
the LCD. Check that the displayed code is that string entered in step (6).
Next, press the 6 and 8 keys in this order to call up the property data on the LCD.
Then press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in this order, and the head property code appears on the
LCD. Check that the displayed code is that string entered in step (7).
(9) If both are OK, proceed to [ 9 ] below.
If something wrong is displayed, check the connection between the PC and machine and go
back to step (2).

[ 10 ] Back up machine information (Function code 46)

Restore the machine information and user setting information that have been saved in an
external memory, referring to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.11.
If the machine has failed to back up the machine information into an external memory at the
start of repair, reset each of the purge and flushing counters with the following procedure.
(1) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(2) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge (or flushing) count
appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge (or flushing) count.
7-31 Confidential
 (5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(6) Press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode.

[ 11 ] Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 5 ].

[ 12 ] Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 6 ].

[ 13 ] Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66)

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 7 ].

[ 14 ] Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning
Refer to Section 7.4, [ 2 ].

[ 15 ] Check LCD operation and specify the LCD type (Function code 12)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.6.

[ 16 ] Get EEPROM data (incl. MAC address) from the WLAN PCB (For wireless LAN-
enabled model)
MAC address: Media access control address
(1) Disconnect the USB cable and then press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.
(2) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the , , , and keys
in this order.
(3) Press the 0 key twice.
The "SPECIAL MAINT" appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 0 and 2 keys in this order.
The "PLS INPUT NO.0-b" appears on the LCD.
(5) Enter "A" using the steps below.
Press the 1 key with the # key held down.
The main PCB gets the MAC address from the WLAN PCB. (This operation backs up the
EEPROM data stored on the WLAN PCB.)
The LCD displays the "E2PCOPY START" once and then returns to the "PLS INPUT
NO.0-b."
NOTE: Pressing the 8 key displays the obtained MAC address like "MAC:
XXXXXXXXXXXX" on the LCD. If an error is detected during the backup operation or
when the 8 key is pressed, the machine displays "E2P BACKUP ERR!!" on the LCD and
becomes inoperable. If it happens, turn the machine off and check the connection between
the WLAN PCB and main PCB, and then go back to step (2).
(6) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

[ 17 ] Switch back to standby

Refer to Section 7.2, [ 9 ].

7-32 Confidential
7.4 IF YOU REPLACE THE ADF UNIT OR ADF-RELATED PARTS

[ 1 ] Check the "Total Quality Check Pattern"

Refer to Section 7.2 [ 8 ].

[ 2 ] Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
and making a copy of the check pattern. To get the accurate print data, we suggest using the
Brother genuine plain paper PB60 or other higher quality one (DO NOT USE glossy paper).
(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the "chart.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in the
Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "ADF
COPY CHART" (see page 7-35 for a sample printout).
(3) Fully insert the top edge of the printed "ADF COPY CHART" with face up into the ADF,
then fit the document guides to the document size.
Set the copy quality mode to "Best" and press the Copy key to make a copy.
Note: Check that the document does not skew.
Note: During copying, do not touch the document to prevent printed images from
displacement.
(4) Check the copied chart referring to the "Check Items on the ADF COPY CHART" given on
the next page.
If any problem is found, remove the newly mounted ADF unit or ADF-related parts once
and set it (them) into place, or check and correct the connection of ADF-related harnesses.

7-33 Confidential
Check Items on the ADF COPY CHART
Check that the copied chart has none of the following defects.
A: Contrast chart 1
• Black or white vertical streaks
• Patchy color
• Missing dots
B: Color blocks
• Patchy color
• Second black block printed in yellow or red
• Area expansion of block(s)
• Third blocks printed too light
• Frames of white blocks missing or discolored
Note: Vertical streaks in color blocks are negligible.
C: Contrast chart 2
• Vertical streaks in 0.3 to 0.5 blocks
(Vertical streaks only in 0.2 block is negligible.)
• Patchy color in 0.3 to 0.5 blocks
(Patchy color only in 0.2 block is negligible.)
• Missing dots in 0.2 to 0.5 blocks
D: Resolution chart
• Overlapping lines (diagonal or horizontal) in 4 to 6 mm blocks
• Curved lines in 4 to 6 mm blocks
• Black or color vertical streaks in 4 to 6 mm blocks
• Discoloration in 4 to 6 mm blocks
E: Whole page
• Ghost (image printed on the blank area)
• Color horizontal streaks
• Black vertical band

7-34 Confidential
 A

ADF Copy Chart

7-35 Confidential
7.5 IF YOU REPLACE THE INK ABSORBER BOX OR FLUSHING BOX

When either the ink absorber box or flushing box is replaced, you should replace both of them.

[ 1 ] Reset each of the purge and flushing counters

(1) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(2) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge (or flushing) count
appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge (or flushing) count.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(6) Press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode.

Tip: This machine counts all purge operations and flushing operations performed since
produced in order to prevent the ink absorber box and flushing box from overflowing with
drained and flushed ink, respectively. An initial purge, for example, advances the counter by
155 + 331 = 486.
When the purge or flushing counter approaches 12480 or 619318182, respectively, the "Unable
to Clean 46" appears, and further purge or flushing operations are prohibited. Replace the ink
absorber box and flushing box, and then reset their counters.

7-36 Confidential
7.6 IF YOU REPLACE THE CONTROL PANEL ASSY OR CONTROL
PANEL PCB

[ 1 ] Check LCD operation and specify the LCD type (Function code 12)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.6.

[ 2 ] Check the operation of the control panel PCB (Function code 13)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.7.

7.7 IF YOU REPLACE THE SCANNER COVER (SCANNER UNIT)

[ 1 ] Specify the CIS Type (Function code 59)

Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.17.

[ 2 ] Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)
Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.15.

[ 3 ] Check the "Total Quality Check Pattern"

Refer to Section 7.2 [ 8 ].

[ 4 ] Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning
Refer to Section 7.4 [ 2 ].

7.8 IF YOU REPLACE THE WLAN PCB (FOR WIRELESS LAN-ENABLED MODEL)

[ 1 ] Transfer EEPROM data (incl. MAC address) to the main PCB

MAC address: Media access control address
(1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys. Next press the , , , and keys
in this order.
(2) Press the 0 key twice.
The "SPECIAL MAINT" appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the 0 and 2 keys in this order.
The "PLS INPUT NO.0-b" appears on the LCD.

7-37 Confidential
(4) Enter "A" using the steps below.
Press the 1 key with the # key held down.
The main PCB gets the MAC address from the WLAN PCB. (This operation backs up the
EEPROM data stored on the WLAN PCB.)
The LCD displays the "E2PCOPY START" once and then returns to the "PLS INPUT
NO.0-b."
NOTE: Pressing the 8 key displays the obtained MAC address like "MAC:
XXXXXXXXXXXX" on the LCD. If an error is detected during the backup operation or
when the 8 key is pressed, the machine displays "E2P BACKUP ERR!!" on the LCD and
becomes inoperable. If it happens, turn the machine off and check the connection between
the WLAN PCB and main PCB, and then go back to step (1).
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

7-38 Confidential
CHAPTER 8
CLEANING

Confidential
 CHAPTER 8 CLEANING

This chapter provides cleaning procedures not covered by the User's Guide. Before starting any repair
work, clean the machine as it may solve the problem concerned.
For the cleaning procedures of the head/carriage unit, scanner unit, and platen, refer to the User's Guide.

CONTENTS

8.1 CLEANING THE EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL SURFACE OF THE MACHINE .... 8-1
8.2 CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT ................................................................ 8-2

Confidential
8.1 CLEANING THE EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL SURFACE OF THE
MACHINE

(1) If the external surface of the machine is stained, clean it with a soft, clean and lint-free
cloth.
Note: Do not use isopropyl alcohol (IPA) to remove dirt or stains from the molding parts.
Doing so may cause cracks in those parts.
(2) If the inside of the machine is stained, first unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet
and then clean it with a soft, clean and lint-free cloth.
Note: Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
(3) If the PF encoder disk or CR encoder strip is stained, replace it with a new one. Do not try
to clean it.

8-1 Confidential
8.2 CLEANING THE MAINTENANCE UNIT

(1) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
(2) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(3) Move the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel (function code 63 in Chapter 9,
Section 9.4.18) by pressing the 6, 3, Black Start (Mono Start), and * keys in this
sequence.
(4) Unplug the power cord of the machine from the electrical outlet.
(5) Open the scanner cover (scanner unit).
(6) Clean the two head cap unit and wiper of the maintenance unit with a "Rubycel" stick that
is a cleaner stick provided as a spare part.
Note: Do not use a cotton swab that may leave lint on the cleaned sections. Lint left on the
maintenance unit will affect the print performance.
Note: Use a new Rubycel stick and do not use the used one for any other maintenance
units.
Note: During the cleaning jobs, take care not to touch the head caps or wiper directly by
hand or scratch their surfaces. Do not remove them from the head cap holder.
(7) Close the scanner cover.
(8) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
(9) Hear the head/carriage unit moving. After the moving sound stops, unplug the machine's
power cord from the electrical outlet.

Rubycel stick

Head wiper

Head cap unit

Maintenance unit (cleaning_BHM9_E)

8-2 Confidential
 CHAPTER 9
MAINTENANCE MODE

Confidential
 CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE MODE

This chapter describes the maintenance mode which is exclusively designed for the purpose of checks,
settings and adjustments of the machine using the keys on the control panel.
In the maintenance mode, you can update memory (EEPROM: electrically erasable programmable
read-only memory) contents for optimizing the drive conditions of the head/carriage unit or the paper
feed roller and paper ejection roller in the engine unit, if those units have been replaced, or for setting
the CIS scanner area, for example. You can also customize the EEPROM according to the shipment
destination of the machine concerned. In addition, you can perform operational checks of the LCD,
control panel PCB or sensors, perform a print test, display the log information or error codes, and
modify firmware switches (WSW).

CONTENTS

9.1 ENTRY INTO THE MAINTENANCE MODE........................................................... 9-1

9.2 LIST OF MAINTENANCE-MODE FUNCTIONS ..................................................... 9-2
9.3 USER-ACCESS TO THE MAINTENANCE MODE................................................. 9-3
9.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE-MODE FUNCTIONS.................. 9-4
9.4.1 EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 01, 91) ........................ 9-4
9.4.2 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data (Function code 05) .................. 9-5
9.4.3 ADF Performance Test (Function code 08) ............................................... 9-7
9.4.4 Test Pattern (Function code 09) ................................................................ 9-8
9.4.5 Firmware Switch Setting and Printout (Function codes 10 and 11)
(User-accessible) ..................................................................................... 9-10
9.4.6 Operational Check of LCD and Specifying of the LCD Type
(Function code 12) (User-accessible) ....................................................... 9-15
9.4.7 Operational Check of Control Panel PCB (Function code 13) .................. 9-17
9.4.8 Updating of Firmware Using an External Memory (Function code 28)...... 9-18
9.4.9 Sensor Operational Check (Function code 32) ......................................... 9-19
9.4.10 Printout of Dial Log (Function code 37) (User-accessible)........................ 9-20
9.4.11 Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)..... 9-21
9.4.12 Setting of Country/Language (Function code 52) (User-accessible)......... 9-23
9.4.13 Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log
(Function code 53) (User-accessible) ....................................................... 9-24
9.4.14 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Start/End Position (Function code 54)........ 9-26
9.4.15 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
(Function code 55) .................................................................................... 9-27
9.4.16 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value (Function code 58)............. 9-28
9.4.17 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type (Function code 59) .. 9-32
9.4.18 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Initial Setup Mode
(Function code 63) .................................................................................... 9-34
Confidential
9.4.19 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome (Function code 65)....... 9-35
9.4.20 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing (Function code 66)
(User-accessible) ...................................................................................... 9-38
9.4.21 Updating of Property Data (Function code 68).......................................... 9-43
9.4.22 Head/Carriage Unit Traveling Speed Check (Function code 69) .............. 9-44
9.4.23 EEPROM Customizing (Function code 74) ............................................... 9-45
9.4.24 Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and dust
accumulated on the maintenance unit) (Function code 75)
(User-accessible) ...................................................................................... 9-46
9.4.25 Purge Operation (Function code 76) (User-accessible) ............................ 9-47
9.4.26 Print of the Equipment’s Log (Function code 77) ...................................... 9-50
9.4.27 Display of the Equipment's Log (Function code 80) (User-accessible) ..... 9-52
9.4.28 Equipment Error Code Indication (Function code 82) (User-accessible) .. 9-54
9.4.29 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line
(Function code 87) (User-accessible) ....................................................... 9-54
9.4.30 Assurance Mode Switch Setting (Function code 88) (User-accessible).... 9-55
9.4.31 Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to Japanese
and U.S.A. models) ................................................................................... 9-65

Confidential
9.1 ENTRY INTO THE MAINTENANCE MODE

(1) Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next press the key
four times to switch the machine to the maintenance mode.
The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
TIP: Models with numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the maintenance mode
in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4
keys in this order.
(2) To select one of the maintenance-mode functions listed in Section 9.2, enter the
corresponding 2-digit function code with the numerical keys on the control panel. (The
details of each maintenance-mode function are described in Section 9.4.)
NOTES • To exit from the maintenance mode and switch to standby, press the 9 key twice
in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
• Pressing the Stop/Exit key after entering only one digit restores the machine to
the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
• If an invalid function code is entered, the machine resumes the initial stage of
the maintenance mode.

9-1 Confidential
9.2 LIST OF MAINTENANCE-MODE FUNCTIONS

Maintenance-mode Functions
Function Function Reference Section
Code (Page)
01 EEPROM Parameter Initialization 9.4.1 (9-4)
05 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data 9.4.2 (9-5)
08 ADF Performance Test 9.4.3 (9-7)
09 Test Pattern 9.4.4 (9-8)
10 Firmware Switch Setting 9.4.5 (9-10)
11 Printout of Firmware Switch Data 9.4.5 (9-13)
12 Operational Check of LCD and Specifying of the LCD Type 9.4.6 (9-15)
13 Operational Check of Control Panel PCB (Check of Keys) 9.4.7 (9-17)
28 Updating of Firmware Using an External Memory 9.4.8 (9-18)
32 Sensor Operational Check 9.4.9 (9-19)
37 Printout of Dial Log 9.4.10 (9-20)
46 Backup of Machine Information 9.4.11 (9-21)
52 Setting of Country/Language 9.4.12 (9-23)
53 Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log 9.4.13 (9-24)
54 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Start/End Position 9.4.14 (9-26)
55 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting 9.4.15 (9-27)
58 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value 9.4.16 (9-28)
59 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type 9.4.17 (9-32)

63 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Initial Setup Mode 9.4.18 (9-34)
65 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome 9.4.19 (9-35)
66 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing 9.4.20 (9-38)
68 Updating of Property Data 9.4.21 (9-43)
69 Head/Carriage Unit Traveling Speed Check 9.4.22 (9-44)

74 EEPROM Customizing 9.4.23 (9-45)

Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and dust
75 9.4.24 (9-46)
accumulated on the maintenance unit)
76 Purge Operation 9.4.25 (9-47)
77 Print of the Equipment’s Log 9.4.26 (9-50)
80 Display of the Equipment's Log 9.4.27 (9-52)
82 Equipment Error Code Indication 9.4.28 (9-54)
87 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line 9.4.29 (9-54)
88 Assurance Mode Switch Setting 9.4.30 (9-55)

91 EEPROM Parameter Initialization (except the telephone number storage area) 9.4.1 (9-4)
99 Exit from the Maintenance Mode ------ (9-1)
(Menu + #, 2, Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to Japanese and 9.4.31 (9-65)
7, 9, 0, 0) U.S.A. models)

: A function that the end user can use. (Refer to Section 9.3.)

9-2 Confidential
9.3 USER-ACCESS TO THE MAINTENANCE MODE

Basically, the maintenance-mode functions listed on the previous page should be accessed by
service personnel only. However, you can allow end users to access some of these under the
guidance of service personnel (e.g., by telephone).
The user-accessible functions (codes 10 to 12, 37, 46, 52, 53, 66, 75, 76, 80, 82, 87, 88, and 91)
are shaded in the table given on the previous page. Function code 10 accesses the firmware
switches, each of which has eight selectors. You should not allow end users to access all of
those selectors, but you can allow them to access user-accessible selectors which are shaded in
the firmware switch tables in Appendix 4.

The service personnel should instruct end users to follow the procedure given below.
(1) Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start), and Menu keys in this order.
TIP: For models with numerical keypad, you may press the Menu, Black Start (Mono
Start), and 0 keys instead in the same way as conventional models.
(2) When the machine shows " " on the LCD, indicating that the
machine is ready to accept a function code number, enter a desired user-accessible code.
(3) To make the machine return to standby, press the Stop/Exit key. When each of the user-
accessible functions is completed, the machine automatically returns to standby.

Menu key Stop/Exit key

0 key Black Start key

(Mono Start key)

9-3 Confidential
9.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MAINTENANCE-MODE FUNCTIONS

9.4.1 EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 01, 91)

„ Function

The machine initializes the parameters, user switches, firmware switches and assurance mode
switch settings registered in the EEPROM, to the initial values. Entering function code 01
initializes almost all of the EEPROM areas, but entering 91 does not initialize some areas, as
listed below.

Function code
01 91
Data item

Maintenance-mode functions
User switches
These will be
Firmware switches
initialized.
Remote activation code
Assurance mode switch settings
All of these will be
Activity report
initialized.
Station ID data
Outside line number
Telephone function registration These will not be
Speed dialing initialized.
Group dialing
Call transfer data

EEPROM customizing code This will not be initialized.

(4-digit) (Note that the first digit of the 4-digit code will be
initialized to "0." If the code is 1001, for example,
it will be initialized to 0001.)

NOTE: If you replace the main PCB with the one used for any other machine, carry out this
procedure and then customize the EEPROM (function code 74 in Section 9.4.23).

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 0 and 1 keys (or the 9 and 1 keys according to your need) in this order in the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SELECT 01?" ("SELECT 91?") appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "PARAMETER INIT" appears on the LCD.
(3) Upon completion of parameter initialization, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

9-4 Confidential
9.4.2 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data (Function code 05)
„ Function

The machine prints out the white and black level data for scanning compensation.

„ Operating Procedure
Do not start this function merely after powering on the machine but start it after carrying out a
sequence of scanning operation. Unless the machine has carried out any scanning operation,
this function cannot print out correct scanning compensation data. This is because at the start of
scanning operation, the machine initializes white and black level data and takes in the scanning
compensation reference data.
NOTE: If this function is used after monochrome scanning, only the green data is valid.
NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the USB cable from the machine before proceeding to the
procedure below.
(1) Press the 0 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "PRINTING" appears on the LCD.
(2) The machine prints out the scanning compensation data list containing the following:
a) Black/white data graph
b) LED light intensity PWM data for color image (1 byte)
c) LED light intensity PWM data for monochrome image (1 byte)
d) LED light intensity pulse data for green image (2 bytes)
e) LED light intensity pulse data for blue image (2 bytes)
f) LED light intensity pulse data for red image (2 bytes)
g) LED light intensity pulse data for monochrome image (2 bytes)
h) AFE RLCV*1 data (1 byte)
i) AFE offset data (1 byte)
j) AFE gain data (1 byte)
k) Background color compensation data*2 (1 byte)
l) Black level data*3
m) White level data for red image*3
n) White level data for green image*3
o) White level data for blue image*3
*1 AFE: Analog Front End
RLCV: Reset Level Clamp Voltage
*2 Data for background color compensation (filtering out background color) to be
performed in monochrome copying of a document printed on colored paper.
*3 Last scanned data, any of the 2592 bytes in 300 dpi, 5184 bytes in 600 dpi, or 10368
bytes in 1200 dpi.
(3) Upon completion of recording of the compensation data list, the machine returns to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If any data is abnormal, its code will be printed in inline style.

9-5 Confidential
Scanning Compensation Data List

9-6 Confidential
9.4.3 ADF Performance Test (Function code 08)
„ Function

The machine counts the documents fed by the automatic document feeder (ADF) and displays
the count on the LCD for checking the ADF performance.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Set documents. (Allowable up to the ADF capacity.)

The "DOC. READY" appears on the LCD.
(2) Press 0 and 8 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine feeds the documents in and out while counting them and displaying the
current count on the LCD as shown below.

ADF CHK P.01

Current count (1st page in this example)

(3) After counting all documents, the machine shows the final count. To return the machine to
the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key.

9-7 Confidential
9.4.4 Test Pattern (Function code 09)
„ Function

This function prints out a test pattern (Print Quality Check sheet) to allow the service personnel
to check the print quality.
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.

„ Operating Procedure

Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The figure on the next page shows a test pattern which is printed on the Print Quality Check
sheet. According to the instructions printed on the sheet, you can check or correct the print
quality.

9-8 Confidential
Test Pattern

9-9 Confidential
9.4.5 Firmware Switch Setting and Printout (Function codes 10 and 11)
(User-accessible)
[ A ] Firmware switch setting
„ Function
The machine incorporates the following firmware switch functions which can be activated with
the procedures using the control panel keys.
The firmware switches have been set at the factory in conformity to the communications
standards and codes of each country. Do not disturb them unless necessary. Some firmware
switches may not be applicable in some versions. The firmware switch data list indicates "Not
used." for those inapplicable switches.

Firmware Switches (WSW01 through WSW60)

WSW No. Function
WSW01 Dial pulse setting
WSW02 Tone signal setting
WSW03 PBX mode setting
WSW04 TRANSFER facility setting
WSW05 1st dial tone and busy tone detection
WSW06 Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection
WSW07 Dial tone setting 1
WSW08 Dial tone setting 2
WSW09 Protocol definition 1
WSW10 Protocol definition 2
WSW11 Busy tone setting
WSW12 Signal detection condition setting
WSW13 Modem setting
WSW14 AUTO ANS facility setting
WSW15 REDIAL facility setting
WSW16 Function setting 1
WSW17 Function setting 2
WSW18 Function setting 3
WSW19 Transmission speed setting
WSW20 Overseas communications mode setting
WSW21 TAD setting 1
WSW22 ECM and call waiting caller ID
WSW23 Communications setting
WSW24 TAD setting 2
WSW25 TAD setting 3
WSW26 Function setting 4
WSW27 Function setting 5
WSW28 Function setting 6
WSW29 Function setting 7 (Not used.)
WSW30 Function setting 8 (Not used.)
WSW31 Function setting 9
WSW32 Function setting 10
WSW33 Function setting 11

9-10 Confidential
 Firmware Switches (WSW01 through WSW60) Continued
WSW No. Function
WSW34 Function setting 12
WSW35 Function setting 13 (Not used.)
WSW36 Function setting 14
WSW37 Function setting 15
WSW38 V.34 transmission settings
WSW39 V.34 transmission speed
WSW40 V.34 modem settings
WSW41 ON-duration of the scanning light source
WSW42 Internet mail settings (Not used.)
WSW43 Function setting 21
WSW44 Speeding up scanning-1
WSW45 Speeding up scanning-2 (Not used.)
WSW46 Monitor of power ON/OFF state and parallel port kept at high
WSW47 Switching between high- and full-speed USB
WSW48 USB setup latency
WSW49 End-of-copying beep and black ink print mode
WSW50 SDAA settings
WSW51 Function setting 16
WSW52 Function setting 17
WSW53 Function setting 18
WSW54 Function setting 19
WSW55 Function setting 20 (Not used.)
WSW56 Function setting 21
WSW57 Function setting 22
WSW58 Function setting 23
WSW59 Function setting 24
WSW60 Function setting 25

9-11 Confidential
„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 1 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays the "WSW00" on the LCD and becomes ready to accept a firmware
switch number.
(2) Enter the desired number from the firmware switch numbers (01 through 60).
The following appears on the LCD:
Selector 1 Selector 8
↓ ↓
WSWXX = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) Use the and keys to move the cursor to the selector position to be modified.
(4) Enter the desired number using the 0 and 1 keys.
(5) Press the OK key. This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the
EEPROM and readies the machine for accepting a firmware switch number.
(6) Repeat steps (2) through (5) until the modification for the desired firmware switches is
completed.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTES • To cancel this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode during the above procedure, press the Stop/Exit key.
• If there is a pause of more than one minute after a single-digit number is entered for
double-digit firmware switch numbers, the machine will automatically return to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.

„ Details of Firmware Switches

The details of the firmware switches are described in Appendix 4 in which the user-accessible
selectors of the firmware switches are shaded.

9-12 Confidential
[ B ] Printout of firmware switch data
„ Function

The machine prints out the setting items of the firmware switches and their contents specified.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 1 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "PRINTING" appears on the LCD.
(2) The machine prints out the configuration list as shown on the next page.
(3) Upon completion of printing, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.

9-13 Confidential
Configuration List

9-14 Confidential
9.4.6 Operational Check of LCD and Specifying of the LCD Type
(Function code 12) (User-accessible)
„ Function
This function allows you to check whether the LCD works normally. It should be used to
specify the LCD type if the 3.3-inch LCD unit or main PCB is replaced.

„ Operating Procedure
Checking the display state of the LCD
If the 3.3-inch LCD unit or main PCB has been replaced, first specify the LCD type using the
procedure given on the next page before proceeding to the following steps.
(1) Press the 1 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Press the key. The LCD shows the screen given below.

(2) Each time you press the key, the LCD cycles through the displays as shown below.

=ً?

=ً?

=ً?

=ً?

=ً?

=ً?

=ً?

(3) Press the Stop/Exit key in any process of the above display cycle. The machine returns to
the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-15 Confidential
Specifying the LCD type (Only for models with 3.3-inch LCD)
If the 3.3-inch LCD unit or main PCB has been replaced, specify the LCD type using the
procedure below.
(1) Press the 1 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(2) Press the key.
The LCD shows the screen given below.

(3) Press the 3 key.

The LCD shows "LCD TYPE SET."
(4) If 1 (enclosed by a square ) is printed at the location shown below, press the 1 key; if not,
press the 0 key.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(6) Press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode and switch to standby.
The new setting goes into effect.
(7) Enter the maintenance mode again referring to Section 9.1.
(8) Perform the operational check of the LCD on the previous page.

LCD unit

LCD flat cable

9-16 Confidential
9.4.7 Operational Check of Control Panel PCB (Function code 13)
„ Function

This function allows you to check the control panel PCB for normal operation.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 1 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "00 " will appear on the LCD.
(2) Press the keys in the order designated in the illustration shown below.
The LCD shows the corresponding number in decimal notation each time a key is pressed.
Check that the displayed number is correct by referring to the illustration below.
If a key is pressed out of order, the machine beeps and displays the "INVALID OPERATE"
on the LCD. To return to the status ready to accept key entry for operational check, press
the Stop/Exit key.
(3) After the last number key is pressed, the machine beeps and returns to the initial stage of
the maintenance mode.
To terminate this operation, press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the initial
stage of the maintenance mode.

Key Entry Order

9-17 Confidential
9.4.8 Updating of Firmware Using an External Memory (Function code 28)
„ Function

This function updates firmware stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB using an external
memory (memory card or USB flash memory). It enables updating of firmware without
connecting the machine to a PC.
TIP: For how to update firmware when the main PCB has been replaced or for operations using
a PC, refer to Appendix 2 "Firmware Installation."

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Switch your PC ON and insert an external memory.
(2) Create a folder named "BROTHER" in the top layer of the external memory's directory and
copy the firmware file having the extension .pjl into that folder.
NOTE: Before copying, check that the file name of the firmware matches with your
machine. Be sure to save only one firmware file having the extension .pjl in the
"BROTHER" folder. Otherwise, the firmware cannot be updated correctly.
TIP: If a firmware file not matching the machine is used, the firmware cannot be updated,
but note that you can superficially continue the operation until step (5) below without any
error.
TIP: For how to obtain the firmware file, refer to Appendix 2 "Firmware Installation."
(3) Remove the external memory from the PC and insert it into the machine in the initial stage
of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: Do not insert more than one external memory at a time.
NOTE: One external memory should be exclusively used for one machine. Do not use one
external memory for more than one machine.
(4) On the machine, press the 2 and 8 keys in this order.
The file name ********.pjl appears on the LCD. Check that ******** is identical with the
file name that has been copied into the external memory.
(5) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "Receiving Data" appears on the LCD, and after a while, "Program Updating" appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Color Start key does not start updating.
NOTE: Never remove the external memory from the machine when the updating is in
progress.
(6) Updating will complete in a few minutes, and the machine automatically restarts and
returns to the standby state.
Remove the external memory from the machine and store it in a safe place.
NOTE 1: If any of the error messages listed below appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and the
machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Error Message Cause
Card is used The external memory is being used by another operation.
Insert Card No external memory is inserted.
No file - No "BROTHER" folder in the external memory
- Invalid file name
Too many files There is more than one file having the extension .pjl in the folder.
Card Error External memory defective
NOTE 2: After the completion of firmware updating, a file named "mfu-send.log" (which
stores the execution log) is created in the layer right below the "BROTHER" folder.

9-18 Confidential
9.4.9 Sensor Operational Check (Function code 32)
„ Function

This function allows you to check the following:

• Document front sensor
• Document rear sensor
• Scanner cover sensor
• Registration sensor
• Ink cartridge cover sensor
• Purge cam switch
• Cap lift cam switch
• Ink cartridge detection sensors (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta)
• Ink empty sensors (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta)
• Head thermistor (in the head driver chip)
• Casing internal temperature thermistor

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 3 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine sounds 1100 Hz and 400 Hz tones cyclically through the following volumes
for testing the speaker:

NOTE: To stop beeping, press the Menu or OK key.

If the sensing statuses are as listed on the next page, the LCD will show
"DFDRCVRSCCP1CP**," "IKIYICIMEKEYECEM," and "********VT CRTH," which
can be switched by pressing the Black Start (Mono Start) key.

9-19 Confidential
 Given below is the relationship between the LCD indication, sensor name and sensor
status.
LCD Sensors Sensing status
DF Document front sensor No document detected.
DR Document rear sensor No document detected.
CV Scanner cover sensor Scanner cover closed.
RS Registration sensor No recording paper detected.
CC Ink cartridge cover sensor Ink cartridge cover closed.
P1 Purge cam switch Any of the cam driving positions
CP Cap lift cam switch Any of the cam driving positions
IK Black ink cartridge detection sensor Black ink cartridge loaded.
IY Yellow ink cartridge detection sensor Yellow ink cartridge loaded.
IC Cyan ink cartridge detection sensor Cyan ink cartridge loaded.
IM Magenta ink cartridge detection sensor Magenta ink cartridge loaded.
EK Black ink empty sensor Black ink remaining
EY Yellow ink empty sensor Yellow ink remaining
EC Cyan ink empty sensor Cyan ink remaining
EM Magenta ink empty sensor Magenta ink remaining
VT Head thermistor Driver chip temperature within the
allowable range.
CR Carriage motor driver thermistor* Normal temperature detected.
TH Casing internal temperature thermistor Normal temperature detected.
* The "CR" is always displayed even on models not equipped with a carriage motor driver
thermistor.

(2) Change the detecting conditions (e.g., open the scanner cover or insert paper through the
registration sensor or remove the ink cartridges), and then check that the indication on the
LCD changes according to the sensor states.
(3) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode,
press the Stop/Exit key.

9.4.10 Printout of Dial Log (Function code 37) (User-accessible)

„ Function

The machine prints out a list of telephone numbers dialed.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 3 and 7 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays the "PRINTING" on the LCD and prints out a list of telephone
numbers that the machine has dialed.

9-20 Confidential
9.4.11 Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)
„ Function
This function backs up the following machine information and user setting information into an
external memory (memory card or USB flash memory) and restores it when necessary.
- Machine information (Preset values, counter values, error information, machine
specifications data, etc.)
- User setting information (Telephone directory, password, station ID, transfer information,
telephone area code, user settings, etc.)
- Other data (Received fax data, ICM/OGM data, etc.)
Note that the following information cannot be backed up.
- Serial number of the machine
- MAC address
- Call and caller ID records
- Activity report
- Fax data to be sent (by delayed-timer, redialing, and polling)
NOTE: The user can use the backup and restoration (given on the next page) procedures,
except "Import all" in the restoration procedure.
NOTE: An external memory (memory card or USB flash memory) for backup should have a
free space larger than the RAM size of the machine.
NOTE: When performing this procedure for any other machine with the same external
memory, delete the data previously stored in the external memory.
NOTE: Do not use a Memory Stick; using it may fail to transfer data correctly.

„ Backup Procedure
(1) On the PC, create a "Brother" folder in an external memory to be used for saving backup
data.
(2) Insert the external memory into the slot of the machine in the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
The "**** Active" appears on the LCD. (**** shows the name of the external memory
inserted.)
NOTE: Do not insert more than one external memory at a time.
NOTE: If an external memory already containing backup data of the same model is
inserted, the following backup procedure will overwrite the existing data with new data.
(3) Press the 4 and 6 keys in this order.
The "Export to Card" appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "********.msd" appears on the LCD. The "********" is unique to each model.
(5) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "Export to Card" appears again on the LCD.
(6) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "Please wait" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: Never remove the external memory from the machine when the exporting is in
progress.
NOTE: If this procedure has been started with the user-access (see Section 9.3), the machine
returns to the standby state after showing the "Please wait" on the LCD.

9-21 Confidential
 (7) Wait for the machine to automatically return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode
and show "**** Active" on the LCD.
Remove the external memory from the machine and keep it in a safe place.
NOTE: If any of the error messages listed below appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and the
machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Error Message Cause
Card is used The external memory is being used by another operation.
Insert Card No external memory is inserted.
No file - No "BROTHER" folder in the external memory
- Invalid file name
Card Error Failed to open the file.
Machine ID Error Mismatch of serial numbers between the machine and the backup
data (which is detected only in data restoration).
Write Error Writing to an external memory failed due to insufficient capacity.

„ Restoration Procedure

(1) Insert the external memory containing the backup data into the slot of the machine in the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "**** Active" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: Do not insert more than one external memory at a time.
NOTE: If the serial number in the backup data stored in the external memory does not
match that of the machine, data restoration cannot be performed.
(2) Press the 4 and 6 keys in this order.
The "Export to Card" appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the or key until the desired item, any of the following, appears on the LCD.
"Import from Card" for restoring only user setting information
"Import all" for restoring all backup data including machine information
(4) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "********.msd" appears on the LCD. The "********" is unique to each model.
(5) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "Import from Card" or "Import all" appears again on the LCD.
(6) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "Please wait" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: Never remove the external memory from the machine when the exporting is in
progress.
(7) Wait for the machine to automatically return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode
and show "**** Active" on the LCD.
Remove the external memory from the machine and keep it in a safe place.
NOTE: If any of the error messages shown above appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and the
machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-22 Confidential
9.4.12 Setting of Country/Language (Function code 52) (User-accessible)
„ Function

Machines have been customized for their destination countries with the corresponding
EEPROM customizing codes (see Section 9.4.23, Function code 74). However, some
customizing codes are shared by two or more destination countries, so the machines customized
by these codes require further specifying individual destination countries or languages.
Usually, the user specifies the destination country or language on the LCD screen called up
automatically when turning the machine on first after purchase. In the same way, the service
personnel also specifies it if the main PCB is replaced; however, if he/she skips the
specification process at that timing, be sure to perform the procedure given below.

EEPROM Customizing Code Countries

0057 Norway, Sweden, Finland, and Denmark
0056 Australia and New Zealand

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 5 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "Set Country" appears on the LCD.
NOTE: If an EEPROM customizing code other than those listed above has been specified,
the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode without
displaying the country/language menu.
NOTE: The messages shown during this procedure are in US English.
(2) Use the and keys to display the desired country or language.
NOTE: For selectable countries, refer to the table shown above.
(3) Press the OK key, and the machine saves the new setting and returns to the initial stage of
the maintenance mode. This completes the setting procedure.

9-23 Confidential
9.4.13 Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log (Function code 53)
(User-accessible)
„ Function
This function transfers received FAX data to another machine. It is useful when the machine
cannot print received data due to the printing mechanism defective.
NOTE: The number of files that can be transferred at a time is 99. To transfer 100 files or more,
carry out the following procedure more than one time.
TIP: If there are both color and monochrome data in a file to be transferred, the monochrome
data will be transferred first. If the receiver machine does not support the color function, the
sender machine cannot transfer color data, resulting in an error.
TIP: If using this function results also in an error, use Function code 46 to save received FAX
data into an external memory. (Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.11.)

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 5 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "FAX TRANSFER" appears on the LCD.
(2) To check the number of received files, press the 1 key.
The "1.NO. OF JOBS" appears on the LCD.
Press the OK key, and the number of received files appears, just as "NO. OF JOBS: 10."
Pressing the Stop/Exit key returns the machine to the "FAX TRANSFER" state.
(3) Select data to transfer as follows.
To transfer the activity report only, press the 2 key.
The "2.ACTIVITY" appears.
To transfer received files (together with the activity report), press the 3 key.
The "3.DOCUMENTS" appears. Note that if there is no received file, the "NO
DOCUMENTS" appears.
To transfer the communication list for the latest communication, press the 4 key.
The "4.COM.LIST (NEW)" appears.
To transfer the communication list for the last three errors, press the 5 key.
The "5.COM.LIST (ERR3)" appears.
(4) With the "2.ACTIVITY," "3.DOCUMENTS," "4.COM.LIST (NEW)," or "5.COM.LIST
(ERR3)" being displayed in step (3), press the OK key.
The "ENTER NO. &SET" appears.
(5) Enter the telephone number of the receiver machine and press the OK key again.
NOTE: Be sure to type the telephone number with the numerical keys. No auto-dial
numbers stored in memory can be used in this procedure.
The machine displays the "ACCEPTED" for approx. two seconds and starts dialing to
transfer data.
No station ID will be attached. A cover page and end page as shown on the next page will
be automatically attached, instead.

9-24 Confidential
 Cover page sample

 Title

   Job number
   Total number of pages to be transferred
    Station ID registered in the sender equipment
    FAX number of the sender equipment
    Telephone number of the sender equipment
    Transfer start date

 Model code
  Boot ROM info
  Program manager ROM info
  Main ROM info
  Serial number

End page sample

 Title

   Job number
   Total number of pages to be transferred
    Station ID registered in the sender equipment
    FAX number of the sender equipment
    Telephone number of the sender equipment

  Error code 1
  Error code 2
  Error code 3
  Error code 4
  Error code 5
  Error code 6
  Error code 7
  Error code 8
  Error code 9
  

9-25 Confidential
9.4.14 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Start/End Position (Function code 54)
„ Function

This function allows you to adjust the scanning start/end position.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 5 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SCAN START ADJ." appears on the LCD.
(2) Wait for the LCD to display the "1.ADF 2.FB."
(3) Press the 1 or 2 key. The current scanning position correction value appears.
You can adjust the correction value to 11 levels from +5 to -5 (mm).
(4) To increase the correction value, press the key; to decrease it, press the key.
If you press the Stop/Exit key, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode without making change of the correction value.
(5) Press the OK key.
The "ACCEPTED" appears on the LCD. After one second, the LCD returns to the "1.ADF
2.FB" screen.
(6) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Note: The relationship between
the scanning start/end positions
5 and 4 keys and their correction values is
shown below.

Stop/Exit key

1 or 2 key
OK key Stop/Exit key

Left arrow key Right arrow key

Stop/Exit
key

OK key

1 second later

9-26 Confidential
9.4.15 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
(Function code 55)
„ Function

This function allows the machine to obtain white level data for the CIS scanner and save it
together with the CIS scanner area into the EEPROM on the main PCB.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 5 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SCANNER AREA SET" appears on the LCD.
The machine automatically obtains white level data.
(2) If this operation completes normally, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
If any error is detected, the "SCANNER ERROR" appears on the LCD. To return the
machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key.

9-27 Confidential
9.4.16 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value (Function code 58)
„ Function

To keep the paper feeding performance in the best condition for quality print, the controller
optimizes the rotation of the paper feed roller, using the correction value stored in the EEPROM
on the main PCB.
If you replace the engine unit or head/carriage unit, you need to update the paper feeding
correction value according to the procedure given here.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Switch on your PC.
(2) Place the machine in the maintenance mode (see Section 9.1) and set A4-size paper in the
paper tray to print check patterns.
(3) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
(4) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

For the paper feed roller adjustment

(5) Drag and drop the "pfadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in the
Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out "PF adjust
check" pattern (see page 9-30 for a sample printout).
(6) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(7) To select the paper feed roller adjustment, press the 1 key.
The "PF ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.

9-28 Confidential
(8) Out of the three rows of the "PF adjust check" pattern (on page 9-30), check the middle row
and select the block that is the least uneven print. Make a note of that block number.
If the least unevenness seems to be far to the left of -8, regard it as -8; if it seems to be far to
the right of +8, regard it as +8. In this case, you need to check whether the paper feed roller
and head/carriage unit are set into place.
(9) Enter the number of the least uneven block found in step (8).
For example, if the number of the least uneven block is +4, press the 4 key while the "PF
ADJ NO. +0" is displayed on the LCD.
If the number is -4, press the key to display the "PF ADJ NO. -0" and press the 4 key.
Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.

For the paper ejection roller adjustment

(10) On your PC, drag and drop the "exitadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer
driver icon in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the "EXIT
adjust check" pattern (see page 9-31 for a sample printout).
(11) On the machine, press the 5 and 8 keys in this order.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(12) To select the paper ejection roller adjustment, press the 2 key.
The "EXIT ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(13) On the "EXIT adjust check" pattern (on page 9-31) consisting of two rows, check each row
and select the block that is the least uneven print on each row. Make a note of the average
of the two block numbers.
If the number of the block that is the least uneven print is 0 on one row, and it is -2 on the
other row, for example, the average is -1.
(14) Enter the average obtained in step (13) in the same way as in step (9).
Then press the OK key, and the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.

9-29 Confidential
Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Feed Roller

9-30 Confidential
Paper Feeding Check Pattern for the Paper Ejection Roller

9-31 Confidential
9.4.17 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type (Function code 59)
„ Function

This procedure allows you to check the movement of the CIS unit integrated in the scanner
cover (scanner unit). The CIS unit travels to the three positions--the white reference film
position, scanning start and end positions.
It also allows you to specify the CIS type into the EEPROM on the main PCB. If you replace
the scanner cover or the main PCB, you need to specify the CIS type according to the procedure
given below.

„ Operating Procedure

-- Check the movement of the CIS unit --

(1) Press the 5 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "1:MO 2:CO 3:CHG?" appears on the LCD.
(2) To call up the CIS travel menu, press the 1 key.
(The "3:CHG" is for specifying the CIS type, as described on the next page. The "2:CO" is
for checking scanning clocks at the factory, so do not access it.)
The "0:30 1:60 2:12 1" appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the OK key.
The "LED PWM : 00" appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the OK key.
The "G PULSE : 0000" appears on the LCD.
(5) Press the OK key.
The "1:WHT 2:FRT 3:MV" appears.
(6) Press the 3, 1, or 2 key, then press the OK key.
The CIS unit moves to the scanning end position, white reference film position, or scanning
start position, respectively.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key, and the CIS unit returns to the home position.
The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-32 Confidential
-- Specify the CIS type --
Note: Before proceeding to the CIS type specification procedure, be sure to update the
firmware to the latest version. Otherwise, an error may occur.
(1) Open the scanner cover and check the CIS type shown on the bar code label.

G Press 0 key.
H Press 2 key.
M, R, S, No bar code label Press 1 key.
Bar code label
(CIS_Label_BHL9_A3_E)

(2) Press the 5 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "1:MO 2:CO 3:CHG?" appears on the LCD.
(3) To call up the CIS type menu, press the 3 key.
(The "1:MO" is for checking the CIS travel, as described on the previous page. The "2:CO"
is for checking scanning clocks at the factory, so do not access it.)
The "CIS TYPE SET" appears on the LCD.
(4) Check the particular code in the bar code label as specified above.
If the code is "G," press the 0 key; if "H," press the 2 key; if "M," "R," "S" or "No bar code
label," press the 1 key. The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-33 Confidential
9.4.18 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Initial Setup Mode
(Function code 63)
„ Function

This procedure moves the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel (Function code 63 + *).
It can also enable or disable the initial setup mode when the power is applied at the next time
(Function code 63 + 1 or Function code 63 +3).

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 6 and 3 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SELECT 63?" appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "START 63?" appears on the LCD.
(3) To make the head/carriage unit travel to the center of its travel, press the * key.
After completion of head replacement or adjustment jobs, press the Stop/Exit key. The
head/carriage unit returns to the home position and then locks itself.
(4) To enable or disable the initial setup mode when the power is applied at the next time,
perform steps (1) and (2) again and then press the 1 or 3 key, respectively.
If you enable the initial setup mode, wait until the "INIT" appears on the LCD and the
head/carriage unit becomes locked. When the "HEAD LOCKED" appears, turn the power
off.
NOTE: Enabling the initial setup mode resets all counts which can be displayed with
Function code 80 (described in Section 9.4.27 "Display of the Equipment's Log (Function
code 80) (User-accessible)").
If you disable the initial setup mode, the machine displays the "NOT INIT" on the LCD
and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-34 Confidential
9.4.19 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome (Function code 65)
„ Function

This function allows you to align vertical lines printed in the forward and backward direction of
the head/carriage unit.
If the head/carriage unit or main PCB is replaced with a new one, you need to make the
adjustment given in this section.
NOTE: If the head/carriage unit is replaced, you need to make other adjustments in addition.
Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2 [ 4 ].

„ Operating Procedure

Before starting the operation below, be sure to set A4-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) Press the 6 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode. Then press
the 1 key.
The machine displays the "PRINTING" on the LCD and prints three sets of vertical
alignment check patterns (shown on the following pages) in monochrome for 450 dpi, 600
dpi and 1200 dpi, each of which consists of #0 through #8 blocks. If the vertical alignment
is ON, #5 block shows vertically aligned lines.
The "450DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(2) For 450 dpi, check the printed vertical alignment check patterns and find which number
block shows full alignment. If the full alignment block is other than #5, enter that block
number by using the numerical keys. The "600DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(3) For 600 dpi, perform the same operation as in step (2).
The "1200DPI NO. (1-8)" appears on the LCD.
(4) For 1200 dpi, perform the same operation as in step (2).
The machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

NOTE: If #1 or #8 block is fully aligned so that you press the 1 or 8 key in the above
procedure, then go back to step (1) to confirm that #5 block becomes aligned.

9-35 Confidential
Vertical Alignment Check Patterns (1/2)

9-36 Confidential
Vertical Alignment Check Patterns (2/2)

9-37 Confidential
9.4.20 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing (Function code 66) (User-
accessible)
„ Function

This function allows you to adjust the left, right and bottom margins for borderless printing.
You print out a margin check pattern, measure each margin, and enter the correction values.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Switch on your PC.
(2) Place the machine in the maintenance mode (see Section 9.1) and set A4-size paper in the
paper tray to print margin check patterns.
(3) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
(4) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created in Section 7.1.1.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.

Left and right margin adjustment

(5) Drag and drop the "media.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in
the Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out the "MEDIA
CHECK" patterns (see page 9-41 for a sample printout). This is for checking the left and
right margins.
(6) Measure the left and right margins on the printed pattern.
The upper row is printed in 600 dpi, and the lower row, in 1200 dpi.
(Example) 600 dpi Left: 0.8 mm, Right: 1.1 mm
1200 dpi Left: 0.9 mm, Right: 1.2 mm
If both of the left and right margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, no adjustment
is required. If not, go to step (7).

9-38 Confidential
(7) If either of the left and right margins is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice and
the * key on the machine.
The "LEFT: 10" appears on the LCD.
(8) To adjust the left margin in 600 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the left margin measured in step (6) is 0.8 mm, so press the 0, 8, and OK
keys.
(9) To adjust the right margin in 600 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (6) is 1.1 mm, so press the 1, 1, and OK
keys.
The "LEFT2: 10" appears on the LCD.
(10) To adjust the left margin in 1200 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (6) is 0.9 mm, so press the 0, 9, and OK
keys.
The "RIGHT2: 10" appears on the LCD.
(11) To adjust the right margin in 1200 dpi, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the right margin measured in step (6) is 1.2 mm, so press the 1, 2, and OK
keys.
Upon completion of the entry, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
(12) Go back to step (5) and print out the left and right margin check pattern again.
(13) Measure the left and right margins on the printed pattern.
If both of the left and right margins are within the range from 0.9 to 1.1 mm, the adjustment
is completed.

Bottom margin adjustment

(14) Drag and drop the "bottomadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon
in the Filedrgs window shown on the previous page.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out the
"BOTTOM adjust" pattern (see page 9-42 for a sample printout). This is for checking the
bottom margin.
(15) Measure the bottom margin on the printed pattern.
(Example) Bottom margin: 3.1 mm
If it is within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, no adjustment is required. If not, go to step
(16).

9-39 Confidential
(16) If the bottom margin is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice and the # key on the
machine.
The "BOTTOM: 30" appears on the LCD.
(17) To adjust the bottom margin, enter the measured value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by
10.
In this example, the bottom margin measured in step (15) is 3.1 mm, so press the 3, 1, and
OK keys.
Upon completion of the entry, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
(18) Go back to step (14) and print out the bottom margin check pattern again.
(19) Measure the bottom margin on the printed pattern.
If it is within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, the adjustment is completed.

9-40 Confidential
Left and Right Margin Check Pattern

9-41 Confidential
Bottom Margin Check Pattern

9-42 Confidential
9.4.21 Updating of Property Data (Function code 68)
„ Function

To keep the print quality, the controller optimizes the drive conditions of individual head/
carriage units according to the property data. For instance, the controller optimizes the head
drive strength, ink jet-out timing and other drive conditions according to the electromechanical
properties unique to individual head/carriage units and ambient temperature.
The property data is stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB and its property code is printed on
the property labels attached to the machine and the head/carriage unit.
If you replace the head/carriage unit with a new spare part, you need to enter its property code
printed on the property label (that comes with the new spare part) and replace the old property
label on the machine (see Appendix 1 for the label location) with the new one. If the old part
may be used in future, store the old property label also with the old part.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 6 and 8 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(2) Press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in this order.
The current property data stored in the EEPROM appears on the LCD and the machine is
ready for entry.
(3) Check the property label that comes with a new head/carriage unit and then enter the
property code.
The code to be entered is 13 digits excluding the heading alphabets.

ALR7765501200000 Head property code

If the customizing code contains letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while
holding down the # key, respectively.
(4) Press the OK key.
The machine beeps, shows the "INPUT ACCEPTED" on the LCD, and writes the entered
property code into the EEPROM. Then it returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
NOTE: If the entered data contains any checksum error, the machine beeps, shows the
"INPUT ERROR" and returns to the ready-to-enter state. Go back to step (3).

9-43 Confidential
9.4.22 Head/Carriage Unit Traveling Speed Check (Function code 69)
„ Function

This function checks whether or not the traveling speed of the head/carriage unit is within the
specified range.
This procedure should be performed when you replace the head/carriage unit or carriage motor,
or when you loosen the CR timing belt.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 6 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine starts aging the head/carriage unit, showing the "CR AGING" on the LCD.
In each of travel speeds 57.7, 43.3, and 21.7 inches/second, the machine checks whether
the maximum and minimum speeds are within the specified range.
• If the maximum and minimum speeds in all of the three travel speeds are within the
range, the "57O 43O 21O" appears on the LCD.
• If any one is out of the range, the machine shows some message, e.g., "57O 43O 21X" on
the LCD. This sample message indicates that the speed variation is within the allowable
range when the head/carriage unit travels at 57.7 and 43.3 inches/second; however, it is
out of the range at 21.7 inches/second.
(2) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

9-44 Confidential
9.4.23 EEPROM Customizing (Function code 74)
„ Function

This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language, function settings,
and firmware switch settings.
NOTE: If you replace the main PCB, be sure to carry out this procedure.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SELECT 74?" appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key, and the current customizing code appears.
(3) Enter the desired customizing code. (Refer to Appendix 3 "EEPROM Customizing Codes
List" on page App. 3-2.)
If the customizing code contains letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while
holding down the # key, respectively.
The newly entered code appears.
NOTE: If a wrong 4-digit code is entered, the machine will malfunction.
(4) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The machine saves the setting and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
If you press the Stop/Exit key or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above
procedure, the machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

9-45 Confidential
9.4.24 Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and dust
accumulated on the maintenance unit) (Function code 75) (User-accessible)
„ Function

This function is used to remove paper particles and dust accumulated between the maintenance
unit and head/carriage unit. Using this function moves the head/carriage unit to the center of its
travel, allowing you to easily remove the paper particles and dust accumulated.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "PLS OPEN COVER" appears on the LCD.
(2) Open the scanner cover.
The head/carriage unit moves to the center of its travel.
(3) Remove the paper particles and dust accumulated.
(4) Close the scanner cover.
The head/carriage unit moves back to the home position and the machine returns to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.

TIP: Holding down the Stop/Exit key with the scanner cover opened for more than five
seconds can also move the head/carriage unit in the same manner as above.

9-46 Confidential
9.4.25 Purge Operation (Function code 76) (User-accessible)
„ Function

The machine can carry out several types of purge operations--head replacement purge, normal
purge, periodical reset purge, power purge, initial purge, user reset purge, and engine setup
purge. This function allows you to select the desired purge type and carry it out.
TIP: The purge types and their details are described on the next page.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 and 6 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays the "CLEANING ALL" on the LCD and enters the purge mode.
(2) Press the or key to display the target color for purge.
Each time the or key is pressed, the "CLEANING ALL," "CLEANING BLACK,"
"CLEANING MAGENTA," "CLEANING CYAN," or "CLEANING YELLOW" appears
cyclically.
"CLEANING ALL": Purge for all four color inks
"CLEANING BLACK": Purge for black ink
"CLEANING MAGENTA" / "CLEANING CYAN" / "CLEANING YELLOW": Any color
choice performs purge for all three color inks.
(3) Enter the purge code according to the table on the next page.
(4) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
Upon completion of purging, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

9-47 Confidential
Purge types, ink usage, purge counts, and purge codes
Purge Codes
(In the
Purge Types Description Ink Usage Purge Counts maintenance
mode, Function
code 76)
Head replacement This is a specially prepared Black: 3.060 ml Black: 140 0
purge purge for eradicating mixed Per color: 2.720 ml 3 colors: 380
(See Note below.) color inks.
Normal purge This purge operation Black: 0.246 ml Black: 12 1
removes dried ink sticking Per color: 0.130 ml 3 colors: 19
to the head nozzles.
Periodical reset This purge operation Black: 0.538 ml Black: 25 2
purge removes air bubbles that Per color: 0.360 ml 3 colors: 50
have accumulated in the ink
supply tubes.
Power purge More powerful than a Black: 0.662 ml Black: 31 3
periodical reset purge, this Per color: 0.420 ml 3 colors: 59
purge operation is for
removing stubborn clogging
from the head nozzles and
ink supply tubes.
Initial purge When the user loads ink Black: 3.360 ml Black: 155 4
(See Note below.) cartridges for the first time, Per color: 2.400 ml 3 colors: 331
this purge operation
automatically runs to refill
the ink supply tubes and
print head with fresh ink.
User reset purge This purge operation should Black: 0.608 ml Black: 28 5
be performed if the print Per color: 0.360 ml 3 colors: 50
quality problem persists
after a user has performed
the purge operation
repeatedly by pressing the
Ink (Ink Management)
key.
Engine setup This purge operation refills Black: 3.360 ml Black: 155 6
purge the ink supply tubes with ink Per color: 2.400 ml 3 colors: 331
when there is no ink in those
tubes.

The above information is as of May 14, 2008.

(Note) If the head/carriage unit is replaced with a spare part having a round, blue seal on its left side
(shown in Appendix 1, "(2) Head property labels"), perform the head replacement purge. If it is replaced
with the one having no seal, perform the initial purge.

This machine counts all purge operations and flushing operations performed since produced in
order to prevent the ink absorber box and flushing box from overflowing with drained and
flushed ink, respectively. An initial purge, for example, advances the counter by 155 + 331 =
486.
When the purge or flushing counter approaches 12480 or 619318182, respectively, the "Unable
to Clean 46" appears, and further purge or flushing operations are prohibited. Replace the ink
absorber box and flushing box, and then reset their counters. (Refer to the next page for the
reset procedure.)

9-48 Confidential
„ Resetting purge or flushing counter

1) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode.
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
2) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode to call
up the machine's log information. (Function code 80. Refer to Section 9.4.27.)
3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge or flushing count
appears on the LCD.
4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge or flushing count.
5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
6) Press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.

9-49 Confidential
9.4.26 Print of the Equipment’s Log (Function code 77)
„ Function

The machine prints its log information.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 7 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays "MAINTENANCE 77" on the LCD and prints out the equipment’s
log as shown below.
Upon completion of the printing, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.

Real-time clock (RTC) check result

RTC backup check result (not required for servicing)
Model code
Country code (See Appendix 3.)
Checksum of WSW, PSW, USW, and FSW (not required for servicing)
Version and production date of main firmware
Version and production date of sub firmware
Version and production date of boot firmware
Serial number of the machine
Head property code
CIS type/Engine type/LCD type

9-50 Confidential
PictBridge information (only for models supporting PictBridge)
Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from each of the
current ink cartridges (including droplets used for purging)
Ink drop count after detection of "Ink Low," indicating how many droplets have been
jetted out from each of the current ink cartridges after detection of "Ink Low"
Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from each of the ink
cartridges onto the platen in borderless printing
Total ink drop count, indicating how many droplets the machine has jetted out from each
of the ink cartridges since produced (excluding droplets used for purging)
Ink cartridge change count
Left: High-yield ink cartridges
Right: Standard ink cartridges
Ink cartridge detection failure count, indicating how many times an undetectable
cartridge has been inserted
Total printed page count (since the machine was produced)/Total jam count
Total printed page count in duplex printing/Jam count in duplex printing/Paper pull-in
rollers (paper pick-up rollers) cleaning count in duplex printing
(This item is printed, but not required for servicing.)
Printed page count for copy, PC print, memory card, fax & list print
ADF scanning page count/Flat-bed scanning page count/ADF jam count
Purge count/Wiper count/Flushing count, since the machine was produced
Purge count by purge type (automatic/manual)
Printed page count for paper sizes and types
Plain paper-Inkjet paper-Glossy paper for each of A3/A4/4x6/L
Total power-ON time
Machine error history
Communications error history
Initial purge log

9-51 Confidential
9.4.27 Display of the Equipment's Log (Function code 80) (User-accessible)
„ Function

The machine can display its log information on the LCD.

This procedure allows you to reset the purge count. It is necessary to reset the purge count when
the ink absorber box is replaced with a new one without replacing the main PCB.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The calendar clock appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key. Pressing the key more than ten times calls up the
following log information items on the LCD, one by one. (The following list does not
include all items.)
• Head property code
• PictBridge information
• Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from each of the ink
cartridges*1
• Ink drop count after ink near-empty, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out
from each of the ink cartridges*1 after the ink empty sensor detects near-empty.
• Total ink drop count, indicating how many droplets the machine has jetted out from each
of the ink cartridges*1 since produced
• Ink cartridge change count, indicating how many times ink cartridge replacement has
been made for each color*1
• Jam count, indicating how many times a paper jam has occurred
• Total page count, indicating how many pages have been printed since the machine was
produced
• PC print page count, indicating how many pages the machine has been printed as an
output device of the connected PC
• Color copy page count, indicating how many copies in color have been made
• Black copy page count, indicating how many copies in monochrome have been made
• Memory card print page count, indicating how many pages have been printed from the
memory card data
• FAX page count, indicating how many received FAX pages have been printed
• Purge count, indicating how many times the purge operation has been carried out
(With the purge count being displayed, pressing the 2, 7, 8 and 3 keys in this order
resets the purge count.)
• Purge history for purge types of black ink*2
• Purge history for purge types of color inks*2
• Wiper count, indicating how many times the wiper operation has been carried out

9-52 Confidential
 • Flushing count, indicating how many times the flushing operation has been carried out
(With the flushing count displayed, pressing the 2, 7, 8 and 3 keys in this order resets
the flushing count.)
• Printing history for paper sizes and types*3
• Total power-ON time
• Error code of the most recent machine error*4
• ADF paper jam count, indicating how many times a paper jam has occurred
• ADF page count, indicating how many pages the ADF has fed
• Flat-bed page count, indicating how many documents have been scanned
• Error code of the most recent communications error*5

After all of the log information items above are displayed, pressing the Black Start (Mono
Start) key returns the screen to the calendar clock in step (1) above.

(3) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode,
press the Stop/Exit key.

*1 To check each of the four ink cartridges, press the OK key. Pressing the key cycles through
black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.
*2 To check each of the purge types, press the OK key.
*3 To check each of the paper sizes or types, press the OK key.
*4 When a machine error code is displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through recent nine
errors that have occurred.
*5 When a communications error code is displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through the
latest error, 2nd latest error, and 3rd latest error.

9-53 Confidential
9.4.28 Equipment Error Code Indication (Function code 82) (User-accessible)
„ Function

This function displays an error code of the last error on the LCD.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 8 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The LCD shows the "MACHINE ERROR X X."
(2) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode,
press the Stop/Exit key.

9.4.29 Output of Transmission Log to the Telephone Line (Function code 87)
(User-accessible)
„ Function

This function outputs the transmission log (that the machine has stored about the latest
transmission) to the telephone line. It allows the service personnel to receive the transmission
log of the user's machine at a remote location and use it for analyzing problems arising in the
user's machine.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) If the user's machine has a transmission-related problem, call the user's machine at a remote
location from your machine.
(2) If the line is connected, have the user perform the following:
1) Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start), and 0 keys in this order.
2) Press the 8 and 7 keys in this order.
The above operation makes the user's machine send CNG to your machine for sending
the transmission log.
(3) If you hear the CNG sent from the user's machine, press the Black Start (Mono Start) key
of your machine.
Your machine will start to receive the transmission log from the user's machine.

9-54 Confidential
9.4.30 Assurance Mode Switch Setting (Function code 88) (User-accessible)
„ Function

The machine incorporates five assurance mode switches (AMS01 through AMS05) that are
firmware switches just as the ones described in Section 9.4.5.
When the machine does not function normally because the usage environments or operating
conditions are not usual, the assurance mode switches provide workarounds to make the
machine usable by changing the machine settings to untypical ones.
The user is allowed to access the assurance mode switches under the guidance of service
personnel (e.g., by telephone).
The details about AMS01 through AMS05 are described on the following pages.

„ Operating Procedure

(1) Press the 8 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine displays "AMS00" on the LCD and becomes ready to accept an assurance
mode switch number.
(2) Enter the desired number from the assurance mode switch numbers (01 through 05).
The following appears on the LCD:
Selector 1 Selector 8
↓ ↓
AMSXX = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the selector position to be modified.
(4) Enter the desired number (0 or 1) using the 0 and 1 keys.
(5) Press the OK key. This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the
EEPROM and readies the machine for accepting an assurance mode switch number.
(6) Repeat steps (2) through (5) until the modification for the desired assurance mode switches
is completed.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.

NOTES: • To cancel this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode during the above procedure, press the Stop/Exit key.
• If there is a pause of more than one minute after a single-digit number is entered for
double-digit assurance mode switch numbers, the machine will automatically
return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
• Initializing the EEPROM with Function code 01 or 91 initializes the AMS switch
settings.

9-55 Confidential
 AMS01 (Printing assurance 1)
Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Prevention of stains on back side of
1 leading edge of paper in borderless 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
printing
2 Not used.
No. 3 4
0 0 : Enable (Determine the sensor
function depending upon the print
3 Protection of platen from no-paper resolution selected) (default)
printing to prevent stains
0 1 : Enable (Detect the leading edge
(Functional restriction on the paper
width sensor) plus right and left edges of paper)
4
1 0 : Enable (Detect the leading edge
of paper)
1 1 : Disable (No paper detection)
Assurance print 1
5 (Printing with black and cyan inks in 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
monochrome copy)
Assurance print 2
(Printing with black and cyan inks in
6 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
monochrome FAX reception and in list
output)
No. 7 8
0 0 : Detect both the leading edge and
width of paper (default)
7 Workaround for false jam detection 0 1 : Detect both the leading edge and
(Functional restriction on the paper
8 width of paper
width sensor)
1 0 : Detect only the leading edge of
paper
1 1 : No detection

• Selector 1: Prevention of stains on back side of leading edge of paper in borderless printing
Setting this selector to "1" reduces the protruding amount of the leading edge of recording
paper to the platen groove to minimize stains that could be caused by ink mist on the back
side of the leading edge. Enabling this function reduces the throughput than disabling it.

• Selectors 3 and 4: Protection of platen from no-paper printing to prevent stains (Functional
restriction on the paper width sensor)
The setting made by these selectors applies to such printing that is assumed to be at a high
resolution, that is, printing from a PC or memory card, copying, and printing via
PictBridge.
If these selectors are set to "0, 0," the machine automatically determines the functions of
the paper width sensor depending upon the print resolution selected. Therefore, in low
resolution printing, e.g. when the "Fast" print quality is selected, the paper width sensor is
automatically disabled. On the contrary, in high resolution printing, e.g. when the
"Highest" print quality is selected, the sensor is automatically enabled.
Setting these selectors to "1, 1" disables the paper width sensor to save the sensing time for
higher throughput.

9-56 Confidential
• Selectors 5 and 6: Assurance print 1 and 2
Enabling assurance print 1 or 2 causes the machine to mix black ink (pigment-based) and a
little of cyan ink (dye-based) to use in monochrome copy or in monochrome FAX reception
and list output, respectively.
If black ink is not jetted out normally, cyan ink can be substituted for black ink in printing.
This ensures that in list printing (in which data once printed will be deleted) the data will be
preserved as a printout.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Workaround for false jam detection (Functional restriction on the paper width
sensor)
The setting made by these selectors applies to the list and index printing and test printing.
When logo printed recording paper is used, for example, the paper width sensor might
misdetect the paper present state as "no paper loaded" due to the logo's color. Limiting the
paper width sensor functions with these selectors avoids detecting such a false paper jam.

AMS02 (Printing assurance 2)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Head-platen gap offset For glossy paper 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
for prevention of stains on
recording paper For recording paper
2 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
except glossy paper
Paper feed amount compensation No. 3 4 5
3 (for preventing banding at the leading edge of 0 0 0: Enable for 4 x 6 postcards
recording paper fed from the photo tray) (default)
|
1 0 0: Enable for Photo L-size
5 paper in Japan
Others: Disable
Registration time offset to slipping in plain
6 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
paper feeding
7 Unidirectional print for higher print quality 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
8 Improvement of paper feeding reliability 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable

• Selectors 1 and 2: Head-platen gap offset for prevention of stains on recording paper
If using curled or thick recording paper results in a stained print face of the paper, increase
the gap between the head nozzles and the platen with these selectors to reduce stains.
Enabling the head-platen gap offset increases the gap from 1.6 to 2.3 mm. (The details are
given in the table on the next page.)
Selectors 3 and 4 on AMS05 specifies whether to enable or disable the settings made here
when borderless printing is enabled or disabled. By default, the head-platen gap offset
function is enabled only when borderless printing is disabled. For the head-platen gap
offset for A3, B4, and ledger-sized plain paper, see selector 6 on AMS05.

9-57 Confidential
 Head-platen gap offset

Recording paper Print quality ON for recording paper except glossy

selected OFF ON for glossy paper paper (ink jet paper, plain paper, or
(Selector 1 = "1") transparency)
(Selector 2 = "1")

"Highest"
Brother premium
glossy photo "Photo"
paper
"Fine"
2.3 mm ---
"Highest"

Other glossy paper "Photo"

"Fine"
1.6 mm
"Photo"
Inkjet paper
"Fine"

"Fine"
--- 2.3 mm
"Normal"
Plain paper
(except the above) "Fast
Normal"

"Fast"

• Selectors 3 to 5: Paper feed amount compensation (for preventing banding at the leading edge
of recording paper fed from the photo tray)
This compensation function is usually enabled for preventing banding (horizontal streaks)
from occurring at the leading edge of recording paper fed from the photo tray.
When postcards or small size paper are fed from the standard paper tray, however, this
compensation function can be counterproductive. If so, disable the function, and the print
quality may be improved.

• Selector 6: Registration time offset to slipping in plain paper feeding

Enabling the registration time offset with this selector increases the registration time
(during which the paper feed roller rotates in the reverse direction), avoiding the
occurrence of a paper feeding timeout error even if the paper cannot reach the registration
sensor actuator within the predetermined registration time due to slipping of the paper pull-
in rollers against paper in the paper tray.
Selecting the "Fast" print quality disables the registration time offset even if it is enabled
with this selector.
NOTE: Selecting the "Glossy paper" automatically enables the registration time offset.

9-58 Confidential
• Selector 7: Unidirectional print for higher print quality
The machine prints bidirectionally by default. To get higher print quality, set this selector to
"1" to switch to the unidirectional print mode in which printing is performed only when the
head/carriage unit travels from left to right. Note that the unidirectional print mode
sacrifices the print speed.
Print object Unidirectional print
Print FAX message received Yes
Copy Yes
Print from PC No
Print from memory cards or via PictBridge Yes
Print memory card index or PictBridge index Yes
Print a list Yes
Print a test pattern No

• Selector 8: Improvement of paper feeding reliability

Setting this selector to "1" improves the paper feeding reliability, sacrificing the print
speed.

9-59 Confidential
 AMS03 (Maintenance assurance 1)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.

1 Protection of head caps from drying 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable

No. 2 3
2 0 0 : 30 seconds (default)
Auto capping start time 0 1 : 5 seconds
3 1 0 : 15 seconds
1 1 : 300 seconds

4 Purge more powerful than normal 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable

purge
5
Not used.
6

Automatic purging interval

7 programmed for matching the 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable
ambient temperature (for color ink)
Automatic purging interval
8 programmed for matching the 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable
ambient temperature (for black ink)

• Selector 1: Protection of head caps from drying

If the protection function is enabled with this selector, the head/carriage unit automatically
returns to the home position (head capping position) for flushing each time the machine
prints the specified number of pages in order to protect the inside of the head caps from
drying up. This function is useful in a dry environment or for heavy duty print per printing
cycle.

• Selectors 2 and 3: Auto capping start time

If data transfer from the PC stops midway through printing for some reason in the PC, the
head/carriage unit automatically returns to the home position (head capping position) after
the specified auto capping start time (default: 30 seconds) to prevent the head surface from
drying up. At the restart of printing after the auto capping operation, print image
unevenness could occur. To avoid it, increase the auto capping start time with these
selectors.

• Selector 4: Purge more powerful than normal purge

Setting this selector to "1" automatically selects a purge more powerful than the normal
purge from the first if the purge is initiated immediately after printing.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Automatic purging interval programmed for matching the ambient
temperature
The "automatic purging interval programmed for matching the ambient temperature" is
enabled by default. If the machine is set in an excessively hot or cold place, therefore, the
automatic purging interval becomes short, resulting in increased ink waste.
Disabling this interval enables the one programmed for the ordinary temperature. In the
first printing after a long no-print period, however, the print quality may lower.

9-60 Confidential
 AMS04 (Maintenance assurance 2)
Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Line monitor volume (Not used.) 0: Normal (default) 1: Extra-high
2 Not used.
0: Printable with black ink only for a certain
amount after detection of ink empty state
3 Black ink print mode
1: Printable with black ink only regardless of
color ink remaining.
4 Automatic purging for color ink 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable
5 Not used.
No. 6 7
6 0 0 : 30 days (black and color)
Automatic purging interval 0 1 : 20 days (black), 30 days (color)
7 1 0 : 30 days (black), no purge (color)
1 1 : No purge (black and color)
8 Automatic purging for black ink 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable
• Selector 3: Black ink print mode
If any color ink runs out, printing is no longer possible by default. Setting this selector to
"1" allows the machine to function as a monochrome printer, making it possible to print
with black ink only even in an ink empty state as listed below.
Monochrome printing only possible. (A color FAX message
Printing FAX message received
will be printed in monochrome.)
Printing from a PC Monochrome printing only possible.
Monochrome printing only possible. The Black Start
Copying (Mono Start) key is enabled, but the Color Start key is
disabled.
Printing from memory cards No printing possible.
Printing via PictBridge No printing possible.
Printing lists Monochrome printing only possible.
Purge operation possible for black ink only, not possible for
Purge operation
all-color or any specific color.

TIP: Difference between selector 3 on AMS04 and selector 8 on WSW49 (See page App.
4-52.)
Both selector 3 on AMS04 and selector 8 on WSW49 specify the similar black ink print
mode that applies if any color ink runs out. The difference is that the former allows the
machine to print all data received as a monochrome printer with black ink only; the latter to
ignore the ink empty state, receive both color and black data, and print it, resulting in a
printout missing color components.
• Selectors 4 and 8: Automatic purging for color ink and for black ink
The machine periodically performs an automatic purge by default. The automatic purge,
however, wastes ink when no printing has occurred. To avoid it, disable the automatic
purge with these selectors. In the first printing after a long no-print period, disabling it may
lower the print quality.
Setting selector 4 or 8 to "1" disables the setting made by selectors 6 and 7.
• Selectors 6 and 7: Automatic purging interval
These selectors allow you to select the automatic purge interval to reduce ink consumption.
Setting these selectors to "1, 1" (No purge) disables the setting made by selectors 4 and 8.

9-61 Confidential
 AMS05 (Printing assurance 3)
Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.

1
Not used.
2

No. 3 4
Enabling/disabling the 0 0 : Enable (when borderless printing is disabled)
3 head-platen gap offset
(default)
settings (made by selectors
4 1 and 2 on AMS02 and 0 1 : Enable (when borderless printing is enabled)
selector 6 on AMS05) 1 0 : Disable (regardless of borderless printing)
1 1 : Enable (regardless of borderless printing)
Reduction of occurrences of
5 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
paper jams
Head-platen gap offset for
prevention of stains on
0: Disable 1: Enable (Only when borderless
6 recording paper
(For A3, B4, and ledger- printing is disabled) (default)
sized plain paper)
No. 7 8
0 0 : Disable for all paper sizes (without limit)
Reduction of banding in 0 1 : Enable for all paper sizes (with limit)
7 borderless printing 1 0 : Enable for paper in a size larger than 4 x 6
8 (Limit of the number of (with limit),
head nozzles to be used) Disable for paper in 4 x 6 size or smaller
(without limit)
1 1 : Enable for all paper sizes (with limit)
• Selectors 3 and 4: Enabling/disabling the head-platen gap offset settings (made by selectors 1
and 2 on AMS02 and selector 6 on AMS05)
These selectors specify whether to enable or disable the head-platen gap offset settings
made by selectors 1 and 2 on AMS02 and selector 6 on AMS05, depending upon whether
borderless printing is disabled or enabled.
The combination of selectors 1 and 2 on AMS02 and selectors 3, 4 and 6 on AMS05
provides 12 types of settings (see the following pages) for preventing stains from being
produced due to paper friction against the print head in high-duty printing.

• Selector 5: Reduction of occurrences of paper jams

Enable this function when paper jams occur. This function reduces occurrences of paper
jams by slowing down the paper feeding speed. It is effective only for plain paper.

• Selector 6: Head-platen gap offset for prevention of stains on recording paper (For A3, B4, and
ledger-sized plain paper)
If using A3, B4, or ledger-sized plain paper results in a stained print face due to warped
paper, increase the gap between the head nozzles and the platen with this selector to reduce
stains.
If this function is enabled, the machine prints unidirectionally.
Selectors 3 and 4 on AMS05 specifies whether to enable or disable the settings made here
when borderless printing is enabled or disabled. By default, the head-platen gap offset
function is enabled only when borderless printing is disabled. For the head-platen gap
offset for glossy paper or small-sized plain paper, see selectors 1 and 2 on AMS02.

9-62 Confidential
 Combination of AMS02 and AMS05
Enable head-platen gap offset
Assurance
mode when borderless when borderless Regardless of
switch borderless printing
printing is disabled printing is enabled setting

Enable only for glossy AMS02 10****** 10****** 10******

(1) (2) (3)
paper (in any size) AMS05 **00**** **01**** **11****
Enable for plain paper, AMS02 01****** 01****** 01******
inkjet paper, or (4) (5) (6)
transparency (in any size) AMS05 **00**** **01**** **11****
Enable for any type of AMS02 11****** 11****** 11******
(7) (8) (9)
paper (in any size) AMS05 **00**** **01**** **11****
Enable only for plain AMS02 00****** 00****** 00******
paper (in A3, B4, and (10) (11) (12)
ledger sizes) AMS05 **00*1** **01*1** **11*1**
AMS02 00******
Disable
AMS05 **00*0**

Users’ problems/requests and 12 combination patterns of AMS02 and AMS05 settings

Combination
Enable head-platen gap offset pattern of
Users’ problems and requests (for desired target paper and borderless AMS02 and
printing) AMS05
settings
Stains on glossy paper. Enable only for glossy paper (in any size).
Minor stains acceptable, rather than (1)
Enable only when borderless printing is
taking longer print time with borderless disabled.
printing enabled.
Stains on glossy paper. Enable only for glossy paper (in any size).
Minor stains acceptable in printing with
borderless printing disabled. Enable only when borderless printing is (2)
But not acceptable with borderless enabled.
printing enabled.
Stains on glossy paper. Enable only for glossy paper (in any size).
Stains not acceptable, regardless of Enable regardless of borderless printing (3)
borderless printing setting. setting.
Stains on paper except glossy paper. Enable for plain paper, inkjet paper, or
transparency (in any size).
Minor stains acceptable, rather than (4)
Enable only when borderless printing is
taking longer print time with borderless
printing enabled. disabled
Enable for plain paper, inkjet paper, or
Stains on paper except glossy paper. transparency (in any size).
Minor stains acceptable in printing with (5)
borderless printing disabled. Enable only when borderless printing is
But not acceptable with borderless enabled.
printing enabled.
Stains on paper except glossy paper. Enable for plain paper, inkjet paper, or
transparency (in any size).
(6)
Stains not acceptable, regardless of Enable regardless of borderless printing
borderless printing setting. setting.
Stains on any type of paper. Enable for any type of paper (in any size).
Minor stains acceptable, rather than (7)
Enable only when borderless printing is
taking longer print time with borderless disabled.
printing enabled.

9-63 Confidential
 Combination
Enable head-platen gap offset pattern of
Users’ problems and requests (for desired target paper and borderless AMS02 and
printing) AMS05
settings
Stains on any type of paper. Enable for any type of paper (in any size).
Minor stains acceptable in printing with
borderless printing disabled. Enable only when borderless printing is (8)
But not acceptable with borderless enabled.
printing enabled.
Stains on any type of paper. Enable for any type of paper (in any size).
Stains not acceptable, regardless of Enable regardless of borderless printing (9)
borderless printing setting. setting.
Stains on A3, B4, or ledger sized plain
paper. Enable for A3, B4, and ledger plain paper.
Minor stains acceptable, rather than (10)
taking longer print time with borderless Enable only when borderless printing is
disabled.
printing enabled.
Stains on A3, B4, or ledger sized plain
Enable for A3, B4, and ledger plain paper.
paper.
Minor stains acceptable in printing with (11)
borderless printing disabled. But not Enable only when borderless printing is
acceptable with borderless printing enabled.
enabled.
Stains on A3, B4, or ledger sized plain
paper. Enable for A3, B4, and ledger plain paper.
(12)
Stains not acceptable, regardless of Enable regardless of whether borderless
borderless printing setting. printing setting.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Reduction of banding in borderless printing (Limit of the number of head
nozzles to be used)
Enabling this function limits the number of head nozzles to be used in borderless printing
to reduce banding.
The default is "0, 0" for models with movable platen and "1, 1" for other models.

9-64 Confidential
9.4.31 Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to Japanese and
U.S.A. models)
„ Function

This procedure can cancel the Pin TX lock mode. Use this procedure if the user forgets his/her
password entered when setting the Pin TX lock mode so as not to exit from the mode.
NOTE: Carrying out this procedure will lose passwords previously entered but retain FAX
messages received in the Pin TX lock mode.
NOTE: The DCP does not support this function.

„ Operating Procedure
(1) When the PIN TX LOCK is displayed on the LCD, press the Menu and # keys at the same
time. Within two seconds, start to press the 2, 7, 9, 0, and 0 keys.
The Pin TX lock mode will be canceled and the machine returns to the calendar clock
screen.

9-65 Confidential
 Appendix 1. Reading Labels
This appendix shows the location of labels put on some parts and describes the coding information for
serial number and head property data.

Confidential
 Reading Labels
An individual machine has a "serial number label" for the machine itself and "property labels"
for the head/carriage unit. An individual ink cartridge also has a "manufacturing information
label."
This section lists the coding information for those serial number and head property data.

(1) Serial number label for the machine itself

(app01a)

Location

(app01b)
Serial number label

App. 1-1 Confidential

(2) Head property labels
The property code of the head/carriage unit is printed on head property labels--bar code
label and QR code label, each of which is attached to the lower cover and the head/carriage
unit, respectively.
„ On the lower cover

Head property code Production lot number

ALR7765501200000

Serial number (6-digit)

Production year
(Example) 8 : 2008
9 : 2009
Production month
A : January G: July
B : February H : August
C : March J: September
D : April K: October
E : May L: November
F : June M: December
(bar_code_label)

Location

Head property label

(Bar code) (head_property_BHL9_A3)

„ On the head/carriage unit

Location

Head property label

(QR code label)

Blue seal

(head_property_label_BHM9)

Note: Depending on whether the head/carriage unit has a round, blue seal on its left side,
the purge type to be performed differs. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.2 [ 2 ].

App. 1-2 Confidential

 Appendix 2. Firmware Installation
This appendix provides instructions on how to change firmware stored in the flash ROM on the main
PCB or load firmware to a new main PCB from the host PC.

A2.1 Loading the Programs to the Flash ROM ............................................................... App. 2-1
[1] Preparation ................................................................................................... App. 2-1
[2] Installing the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver ................................. App. 2-1
[3] Loading the programs onto the flash ROM of the machine.......................... App. 2-5
[3.1] If the main PCB is replaced with a new one........................................ App. 2-5
[3.2] If the main PCB loaded with programs is used
(Updating existing programs) .............................................................. App. 2-7
„ To load programs from the PC ......................................................... App. 2-7
„ To load programs using an external memory ................................... App. 2-8

Confidential
A2.1 Loading the Programs to the Flash ROM

If you want to change the programs stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB or after you
replace the main PCB, load the desired programs to the flash ROM.
Loading requires a PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 2000 or later.
Caution: During loading, never turn off your PC or the machine, unplug the USB
interface cable, interrupt loading or load invalid data. If you do so, loading will fail,
causing the PCB to be unusable. You will have to replace the main PCB and load
programs to a new PCB.

[ 1 ] Preparation
You need the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver and filedg32.exe (provided by Brother
Industries). Save them in an arbitrary folder in your PC.

[ 2 ] Installing the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver

To identify machines connected via USB direct interface, the PC requires the corresponding
driver for the virtual USB device. If you connect any number of machines to your PC, the same
number of virtual USB devices will be automatically configured on your PC. To prevent many
virtual USB devices from being configured, use the unique driver installation procedure
described below that enables your PC to identify terminals via one single virtual USB device.
NOTES: • Once this installation procedure is carried out for a PC, no more driver/software
installation will be required for that PC to identify machines. If the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer driver has been already installed to your PC according to
this procedure, skip this section.
• Before proceeding to the procedure given below, make sure that the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer driver (listed in Chapter 7, Section 7.1.1) is stored in
your PC.
(1) Check that the power switch of the machine is turned off. Disconnect the USB cable that
connects the machine with your PC.
(2) Turn on your PC.
(3) Turn on the power switch of the machine.
(4) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.

App. 2-1 Confidential

(5) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.
The following window appears.

(6) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of new hardware device by the
system. Select "No, not this time." And click Next.

(7) Select "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" and click Next.

App. 2-2 Confidential

(8) Alert warning message of WHQL appears. Click Continue Anyway to proceed.

App. 2-3 Confidential

(9) Repeat steps (6) to (8) three times. Installation is completed.
(10) If the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver is successfully installed, the following
message screen appears. Click Finish to return.

NOTE: In order to check whether the printer driver is successfully installed, click Start |
Settings | Printers to select the Printers window. Then, check that the Brother Maintenance
USB Printer icon is shown.

App. 2-4 Confidential

[ 3 ] Loading the programs onto the flash ROM of the machine
[3.1] If the main PCB is replaced with a new one
Unplug the power cord of the machine from the electrical outlet and disconnect the USB
cable that connects the machine with your PC.

(1) On the machine, follow the steps below to enter the firmware loading mode.
1) Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet with the 0 key held down and keep
holding it down until the following appears on the LCD. While the 0 key is held
down, the machine beeps.

2) Hold down the 1 key until the following appears on the LCD. While the 1 key is
held down, the machine beeps.

3) Hold down the 2 key until the following appears on the LCD. While the 2 key is
held down, the machine beeps.

4) Hold down the 3 key until the following appears on the LCD. While the 3 key is
held down, the machine beeps.

When the black and white pattern shown above is displayed, the machine is ready to
receive programs or data for firmware installation from the connected PC.
Note: Pressing a wrong key or no key within the specified time in steps 1) through 4)
above causes an error. If it happens, unplug the power cord and go back to step 1)
above.

(2) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.

App. 2-5 Confidential

(3) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe."
The Filedrgs window will appear as shown below.

(4) Drag and drop the firmware (e.g., lz0023_a.pmu) onto the Brother Maintenance USB
Printer driver icon in the Filedrgs window.
Note: To use a firmware file, extract it beforehand by double-clicking. It is a self-
extracting file having the extension .exe.
After approx. 2 to 5 minutes, the loading operation is complete and the machine
automatically reboots and returns to the standby state.
(5) Display the version of the firmware installed on the LCD by simultaneously pressing
the * and # keys to check it.
Sample version number shown on the color LCD: 0V810060953:4B69
(The top line shows the version number.) P0601242005:4123
B0601242005:1C8D
If the displayed version number is identical with the firmware version you installed,
the loading operation has been successfully finished.

Note: If loading operation ends abnormally, turn the machine off and on. Wait for the
machine to emit a long beep and automatically enter the firmware loading mode, and then
perform the loading procedure above again.

App. 2-6 Confidential

[3.2] If the main PCB loaded with programs is used (Updating existing programs)
The current main PCB (not replaced) or the main PCB replaced with the one used for any
other machine has been loaded with programs, so update existing programs using the
procedure given below.

Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and make sure that the machine is
connected with your PC using a USB cable.
While holding down the 5 key, plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
Then press the Mono Start key (Black Start key).
The black and white pattern appears on the LCD as shown on the previous page. The
machine is ready to receive programs or data for firmware installation from the connected
PC.

„ To load programs from the PC

(1) On your PC, run "filedg32.exe."

The Filedrgs window will appear as shown below.

(2) Drag and drop the firmware (e.g., lz0023_a.pmu) onto the Brother Maintenance USB
Printer driver icon in the Filedrgs window shown above.
Note: To use a firmware file, extract it beforehand by double-clicking. It is a self-
extracting file having the extension .exe.
After approx. 2 to 5 minutes, the loading operation is complete and the machine
automatically reboots and returns to the standby state.
(3) On the machine, display the version of the firmware installed on the LCD by
simultaneously pressing the * and # keys to check it.
Sample version number shown on the color LCD: 0V810060953:4B69
(The top line shows the version number.) P0601242005:4123
B0601242005:1C8D
If the displayed version number is identical with the firmware version you installed,
the loading operation has been successfully finished.

App. 2-7 Confidential

Note: If loading operation ends abnormally, turn the machine off and on. Wait for the
machine to emit a long beep and automatically enter the firmware loading mode, and then
perform the loading procedure above again.

„ To load programs using an external memory

(1) Insert an external memory to your PC.
(2) Create a folder named "BROTHER" in the top layer of the external memory's
directory and copy the firmware file having the extension .pjl into that folder.
NOTE: Before copying, check that the file name of the firmware matches with your
machine. Be sure to save only one firmware file having the extension .pjl in the
"BROTHER" folder. Otherwise, the firmware cannot be updated correctly.
TIP: If a firmware file not matching the machine is used, the firmware cannot be
updated, but note that you can superficially continue the operation until step (5)
below without any error.
(3) Remove the external memory from the PC and insert it into the machine in the initial
stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: Do not insert more than one external memory at a time.
NOTE: One external memory should be exclusively used for one machine. Do not
use one external memory for more than one machine.
(4) On the machine, press the 2 and 8 keys in this order.
The file name ********.pjl appears on the LCD. Check that ******** is identical
with the file name that has been copied into the external memory.
(5) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The "Receiving Data" appears on the LCD, and after a while, "Program Updating"
appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Color Start key does not start updating.
NOTE: Never remove the external memory from the machine when the updating is
in progress.
(6) Updating will complete in a few minutes, and the machine automatically restarts and
returns to the standby state.
Remove the external memory from the machine and store it in a safe place.
NOTE 1: If any of the error messages listed below appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and
the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Error Message Cause
Card is used The external memory is being used by another operation.
Insert Card No external memory is inserted.
No file - No "BROTHER" folder in the external memory
- Invalid file name
Too many files There is more than one file having the extension .pjl in the folder.
Card Error External memory defective

NOTE 2: After the completion of firmware updating, a file named "mfu-send.log" (which
stores the execution log) is created in the layer right below the "BROTHER" folder.
NOTE 3: If program loading with an external memory fails, load programs from the PC
following the instructions given on the previous page.

App. 2-8 Confidential

 Appendix 3. EEPROM Customizing Codes
This appendix provides instructions on how to set up the EEPROM customizing codes for the various
preferences exclusively designed for each destination. The specified customizing code is stored in the
EEPROM mounted on the main PCB. If the main PCB is replaced, therefore, you need to set up the
proper customizing code with the machine in the maintenance mode.
Note: Customizing codes customize firmware for individual models, enabling the common firmware to
be used for various models. A list of EEPROM customizing codes comes with the firmware data
provided by Brother Industries.

Confidential
 EEPROM Customizing Codes
This function allows you to customize the EEPROM according to language, function settings,
and firmware switch settings.
Refer to the "EEPROM Customizing Codes List" on the next page.
„ Operating Procedure

(1) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(2) Press the 7 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SELECT 74?" appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key, and the current customizing code appears.
(4) Enter the desired customizing code.
If the customizing code contains letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while
holding down the # key, respectively.
The newly entered code appears.
NOTE: If a wrong 4-digit code is entered, the machine will malfunction.
(5) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
The machine saves the setting and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
If you press the Stop/Exit key or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above
procedure, the machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

App. 3-1 Confidential

„ EEPROM Customizing Codes List
For MFC5890CN

France, French Polynesia,

US UK, Ivory Coast, Morocco, Italy,
Canada Germany
Mexico Ireland New Caledonia, Reunion, San Marino
Senegal, Tunisia
0001 0002 0004 0003 0005 0016

Belgium,
Spain Portugal Switzerland Netherlands Sweden
Luxemburg

0057
0015 0018 0010 0009 0008
(0007/0026/0012/0013)

Finland Denmark Iceland

0057 0057 0057

(0007/0026/0012/0013) (0007/0026/0012/0013) (0007/0026/0012/0013)

Singapore, Malaysia, Philippines,

Indonesia, Vietnam, U.A.E., India,
Thailand, Brunei, Laos, Cambodia, Saudi
Turkey Hong Kong
Myanmar, Jordan, Egypt, Lebanon, Arabia
Mauritius, Yemen, Qatar, Pakistan,
Kenya, Iran, Iraq, Libya, Syria

0040 0054 0004 0040

Australia, New Zealand,

Fiji, Papua New Guinea,
Samoa, Tonga

0056
(0006)(0027)

App. 3-2 Confidential

For MFC5895CW

France, French Polynesia,

US UK, Ivory Coast, Morocco, Italy,
Canada Germany
Mexico Ireland New Caledonia, Reunion, San Marino
Senegal, Tunisia
0001 0002 0004 0003 0005 0016

Belgium,
Spain Portugal Switzerland Netherlands Denmark
Luxemburg

0057
0015 0018 0010 0009 0008
(0007/0026/0012/0013)

Czech, Hungary, Poland, Rumania,

Austria Ireland Bulgaria, Cyprus, Malta, Nigeria, Israel Poland
Estonia, Latovia

0003 0004 0054 0054 0054

The above information is as of August 2010. The up-to-date information is available from your local Brother
Customer Service.

App. 3-3 Confidential

 Appendix 4. Firmware Switches (WSW)
This appendix describes the functions of the firmware switches, which can be divided into two groups:
one is for customizing preferences designed for the shipping destination (as described in Appendix 3)
and the other is for modifying preferences that match the machine to the environmental conditions. Use
the latter group if the machine malfunctions due to mismatching.
Note: Each of the firmware switches has eight selectors. You should not allow end users to access all of
those selectors, but you can allow them to access user-accessible selectors which are shaded in the
firmware switch tables in this appendix.
Note: The firmware switch setting procedure is given in Chapter 9, Section 9.4.5 (Function code 10).

Confidential
WSW No. Function Refer to:
WSW01 Dial pulse setting App. 4-3
WSW02 Tone signal setting App. 4-5
WSW03 PBX mode setting App. 4-6
WSW04 TRANSFER facility setting App. 4-7
WSW05 1st dial tone and busy tone detection App. 4-8
WSW06 Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection App. 4-10
WSW07 Dial tone setting 1 App. 4-12
WSW08 Dial tone setting 2 App. 4-13
WSW09 Protocol definition 1 App. 4-14
WSW10 Protocol definition 2 App. 4-15
WSW11 Busy tone setting App. 4-16
WSW12 Signal detection condition setting App. 4-17
WSW13 Modem setting App. 4-18
WSW14 AUTO ANS facility setting App. 4-19
WSW15 REDIAL facility setting App. 4-20
WSW16 Function setting 1 App. 4-21
WSW17 Function setting 2 App. 4-22
WSW18 Function setting 3 App. 4-23
WSW19 Transmission speed setting App. 4-24
WSW20 Overseas communications mode setting App. 4-25
WSW21 TAD setting 1 App. 4-26
WSW22 ECM and call waiting caller ID App. 4-27
WSW23 Communications setting App. 4-28
WSW24 TAD setting 2 App. 4-29
WSW25 TAD setting 3 App. 4-30
WSW26 Function setting 4 App. 4-31
WSW27 Function setting 5 App. 4-32
WSW28 Function setting 6 App. 4-33
WSW29 Function setting 7 (Not used.) App. 4-34
WSW30 Function setting 8 (Not used.) App. 4-35
WSW31 Function setting 9 App. 4-36
WSW32 Function setting 10 App. 4-37
WSW33 Function setting 11 App. 4-38
WSW34 Function setting 12 App. 4-39
WSW35 Function setting 13 (Not used.) App. 4-40
WSW36 Function setting 14 App. 4-41
WSW37 Function setting 15 App. 4-42
WSW38 V.34 transmission setting App. 4-43
WSW39 V.34 transmission speed App. 4-44
WSW40 V.34 modem settings App. 4-45
WSW41 ON-duration of the scanning light source App. 4-46
WSW42 Internet mail settings (Not used.) App. 4-47
WSW43 Function setting 21 App. 4-47
WSW44 Speeding up scanning-1 App. 4-48
WSW45 Speeding up scanning-2 (Not used.) App. 4-49
WSW46 Monitor of power ON/OFF state and parallel port kept at high App. 4-50

App. 4-1 Confidential

WSW47 Switching between high- and full-speed USB App. 4-51
WSW48 USB setup latency App. 4-52
WSW49 End-of-copying beep and black ink print mode App. 4-52
WSW50 SDAA settings App. 4-53
WSW51 Function setting 16 App. 4-54
WSW52 Function setting 17 (Not used.) App. 4-55
WSW53 Function setting 18 App. 4-56
WSW54 Function setting 19 App. 4-57
WSW55 Function setting 20 (Not used.) App. 4-58
WSW56 Function setting 21 App. 4-58
WSW57 Function setting 22 App. 4-59
WSW58 Function setting 23 App. 4-60
WSW59 Function setting 24 App. 4-62
WSW60 Function setting 25 App. 4-63

App. 4-2 Confidential

 WSW01 (Dial pulse setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : N
1
Dial pulse generation mode 0 1 : N+1
2
1 0 : 10-N
1 1 : N
No. 3 4
0 0 : 60 ms
3
Break time length in pulse dialing 0 1 : 67 ms
4
1 0 : 40 ms (for 16 PPS)
1 1 : 64 ms (at 106-ms intervals)
No. 5 6
0 0 : 800 ms
5
Inter-digit pause 0 1 : 850 ms
6
1 0 : 950 ms
1 1 : 600 ms
Switching between pulse (DP) and
7 tone (PB) dialing, by the function 0: Yes 1: No
switch
Default dialing mode, pulse (DP)
8 0: PB 1: DP
or tone (PB) dialing
ms: millisecond(s)
• Selectors 1 and 2: Dial pulse generation mode
These selectors set the number of pulses to be generated in pulse dialing.
N: Dialing "N" generates "N" pulses. (Dialing "0" generates 10 pulses.)
N + 1: Dialing "N" generates "N + 1" pulses.
10 - N: Dialing "N" generates "10 - N" pulses.
• Selectors 3 and 4: Break time length in pulse dialing
These selectors set the break time length in pulse dialing.
(Example: If "1," "2," and "3" are dialed when N is set by selectors 1 and 2.)

App. 4-3 Confidential

• Selectors 5 and 6: Inter-digit pause
These selectors set the inter-digit pause in pulse dialing.
(Example: If "1," "2," and "3" are dialed when N is set by selectors 1 and 2.)

• Selector 7: Switching between pulse (DP) and tone (PB) dialing, by the function switch
This selector determines whether or not the dialing mode can be switched between the
pulse (DP) and tone (PB) dialing by using the function switch.
• Selector 8: Default dialing mode, pulse (DP) or tone (PB) dialing
This selector sets the default dialing mode (pulse dialing or tone dialing) which can be
changed by the function switch. If the user switches it with the function switch when
selector 7 is set to "0," the setting specified by this selector will also be switched
automatically.

App. 4-4 Confidential

 WSW02 (Tone signal setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : 70 ms
1 Tone signal transmission time
0 1 : 80 ms
2 length
1 0 : 90 ms
1 1 : 100 ms
No. 3 4
0 0 : 70 ms
3
Min. pause in tone dialing 0 1 : 80 ms
4
1 0 : 90 ms
1 1 : 140 ms

5 Attenuator for pseudo ring 0: 0 dB 1: 8 dB

backtone to the line (selectable in 0: 0 dB 1: 4 dB
|
the range of 0-15 dB, in 1 dB 0: 0 dB 1: 2 dB
8 increments) 0: 0 dB 1: 1 dB
ms: millisecond(s)
• Selectors 1 through 4: Tone signal transmission time length and Min. pause in tone dialing
These selectors set the tone signal transmission time length and minimum pause in tone
dialing.
(Example: If "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5" are dialed.)

• Selectors 5 through 8: Attenuator for pseudo ring backtone to the line

These selectors are used to adjust the sound volume of a ring backtone in the F/T mode, an
on-hold sound, or a beep generated as a signal during remote control operation or at the
start of ICM recording.
The larger the value specified by these selectors, the greater the attenuation.

App. 4-5 Confidential

 WSW03 (PBX* mode setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
CNG detection when sharing a
1 modular wall socket with a 0: A 1: B
telephone
No. 2 3 4
0 0 0 : 50 ms
0 0 1 : 210 ms
2 Detection time length of PBX* 0 1 0 : 500 ms
dial tone, required for starting
| 0 1 1 : 800 ms
dialing
(Not used.) 1 0 0 : 900 ms
4
1 0 1 : 1.5 sec.
1 1 0 : 2.0 sec.
1 1 1 : 2.5 sec.
CNG detection when sharing a
5 modular wall socket with a 0: A 1: B
telephone
No. 6 7
0 0 : No detection
(3.5 sec. WAIT)
6 0 1 : No detection
Dial tone detection in PBX*
(5 sec. WAIT)
7 (Not used.)
1 0 : No detection
(7 sec. WAIT)
1 1 : Detection
(Frequency only)
8 Not used.
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)
* PBX: Private branch exchange

Note: Selectors 2 through 4, 6 and 7 are not applicable where no PBX is installed.
• Selectors 1 and 5: CNG detection when sharing a modular wall socket with a telephone
These selectors determine whether or not the machine detects a CNG signal when a line is
connected to a telephone sharing a modular wall socket with the machine. Upon detection
of CNG signals by the number of cycles specified by these selectors, the machine interprets
CNG as an effective signal and then starts FAX reception.
Selector
Cycle
No. 1 No. 5
0 (A) 0 (A) 0.5 cycle
0 (A) 1 (B) 1.0 cycle
1 (B) 0 (A) 1.5 cycles
1 (B) 1 (B) 2.0 cycles

• Selectors 2 through 4: Detection time length of PBX dial tone, required for starting dialing
(Not used.)
Upon detection of the PBX dial tone for the time length specified by these selectors, the
machine starts dialing.
These selectors are effective only when both selectors 6 and 7 are set to "1" (Detection).
App. 4-6 Confidential
• Selectors 6 and 7: Dial tone detection in PBX (Not used.)
These selectors activate or deactivate the dial tone detection function which detects a dial
tone when a line is connected to the PBX.
Setting both of these selectors to "1" activates the dial tone detection function so that the
machine starts dialing upon detection of a dial tone when a line is connected.
Other setting combinations deactivate the dial tone detection function so that the machine
starts dialing after the specified WAIT (3.5, 5.0, or 7.0 seconds) without detection of a dial
tone when a line is connected.

WSW04 (TRANSFER facility setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Earth function in transfer facility
1 0: Provided 1: Not provided
(Not used.)
No. 2 3
2 Dual tone detection frequency in 0 0 : 350 and 440 Hz (A)
ICM recording 0 1 : 440 and 480 Hz (B)
3 (Not used.) 1 0 : 480 and 620 Hz (C)
1 1 : 480 and 620 Hz (C)
Dual tone detection sensitivity in
4 ICM recording 0: Normal 1: High
(Not used.)
Time to be added to the setting
specified by selectors 3 and 4 of
5 WSW24 (Time length from CML 0: Not added 1: +4 seconds added
ON to start of pseudo ring
backtone transmission)
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 : 80 ms
0 0 1 : 100 ms
6
0 1 0 : 110 ms
Break time length for flash
| 0 1 1 : 120 ms
function
1 0 0 : 200 ms
8
1 0 1 : 250 ms
1 1 0 : 500 ms
1 1 1 : 700 ms
ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selectors 6 through 8 are not applicable in those countries where no transfer facility is
supported.
Note: Selectors 2 through 4 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.
• Selector 1: Earth function in transfer facility (Not used.)
This selector determines whether or not the earth function is added to the transfer setting
menu to be accessed by the function switch.

App. 4-7 Confidential

• Selectors 2 and 3: Dual tone detection frequency in ICM recording (Not used.)
If the machine detects either of the frequencies set by these selectors in ICM recording, it
disconnects the line. For example, if these selectors are set to "0, 0," the machine
disconnects the line upon detection of 350 Hz or 440 Hz.
• Selector 4: Dual tone detection sensitivity in ICM recording (Not used.)
Setting this selector to "1" increases the tone detection sensitivity in ICM recording.

• Selectors 6 through 8: Break time length for flash function

These selectors set the break time length.
This setting is effective only when the flash function is selected for the Speed Dial key by
using the function switch.

WSW05 (1st dial tone and busy tone detection)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : 3.5 sec. WAIT
0 0 1 : 7.0 sec. WAIT
1 0 1 0 : 10.5 sec. WAIT
| 1st dial tone detection 0 1 1 : 14.0 sec. WAIT
3 1 0 0 : 17.5 sec. WAIT
1 0 1 : 21.0 sec. WAIT
1 1 0 : 24.5 sec. WAIT
1 1 1 : Detection (Without WAIT)
Max. pause time allowable for
4 0: 2 seconds 1: 1 second
remote ID code detection
No. 5 6
0 0 : No detection
5 Busy tone detection in automatic
0 1 : Detection only after dialing
6 sending mode
1 0 : No detection
1 1 : Detection before and after dialing
Busy tone detection in automatic
7 0: Yes 1: No
receiving mode
8 Not used.
sec.: second(s)

Note: Selectors 5 through 7 are not applicable in those countries where no busy tone detection
is supported.

App. 4-8 Confidential

• Selectors 1 through 3: 1st dial tone detection
These selectors activate or deactivate the 1st dial tone detection function which detects the
1st dial tone issued from the PSTN when a line is connected to the PSTN.
Setting all of these selectors to "1" activates the dial tone detection function so that the
machine starts dialing upon detection of a dial tone when a line is connected. (However, in
those countries which support no dial tone detection function, e.g., in the U.S.A., setting
these selectors to "1" makes the machine start dialing after a WAIT of 3.5 seconds.) For the
detecting conditions of the 1st dial tone, refer to WSW07 and WSW08.
Other setting combinations deactivate the dial tone detection function so that the machine
starts dialing after the specified WAIT (3.5, 7.0, 10.5, 14.0, 17.5, 21.0, or 24.5 seconds)
without detection of a dial tone when a line is connected to the PSTN.

• Selector 4: Max. pause time allowable for remote ID code detection

This selector sets the maximum pause time allowable for detecting the second digit of a
remote ID code after detection of the first digit in remote reception.
If selector 4 is set to "0" (2 seconds), for instance, only a remote ID code whose second
digit is detected within 2 seconds after detection of the first digit will become effective so
as to activate the remote function.

• Selectors 5 and 6: Busy tone detection in automatic sending mode

These selectors determine whether or not the machine automatically disconnects a line
upon detection of a busy tone in automatic sending mode.
Setting selector 6 to "0" ignores a busy tone so that the machine does not disconnect the
line.
Setting selectors 5 and 6 to "0" and "1," respectively, makes the machine detect a busy tone
only after dialing and disconnect the line.
Setting both of selectors 5 and 6 to "1" makes the machine detect a busy tone before and
after dialing and then disconnect the line.

• Selector 7: Busy tone detection in automatic receiving mode

This selector determines whether or not the machine automatically disconnects the line
upon detection of a busy tone in automatic receiving mode.

App. 4-9 Confidential

 WSW06 (Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : No pause
0 0 1 : 3.5 sec. WAIT
0 1 0 : 7 sec. WAIT
0 1 1 : 10.5 sec. WAIT
1 1 0 0 : 14 sec. WAIT
Pause key setting and 2nd dial 1 0 1 : 2nd dial tone detection
|
tone detection both in DP and push-
3 button (PB) dialing system
1 1 0 : 2nd dial tone detection
only in pulse dialing (DP)
system
1 1 1 : 2nd dial tone detection
both in DP and push-
button (PB) dialing system
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : 50 ms
0 0 1 : 210 ms
4 0 1 0 : 500 ms
| Detection of international tone 0 1 1 : 800 ms
6 1 0 0 : 900 ms
1 0 1 : 1.5 sec.
1 1 0 : 2.0 sec.
1 1 1 : 2.5 sec.
No. of 2nd dial tone detection
7 0: 1 cycle 1: 2 cycles
cycles
Allowable instantaneous interrupt
8 0: 30 ms 1: 50 ms
during reception of 2nd dial tone
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selectors 4 through 8 are not applicable in those countries where no dial tone detection is
supported, e.g., U.S.A.

App. 4-10 Confidential

• Selectors 1 through 3: Pause key setting and 2nd dial tone detection

Selectors
1 2 3

0 0 0 No WAIT is inserted even if the Pause key is pressed.

0 0 1 If you press the Pause key during dialing, the machine will insert WAIT as
0 1 0 defined in the above table.
0 1 1 If the Pause key is pressed repeatedly, the machine inserts the specified
0 0 0 WAIT multiplied by the number of depressions. It applies also in hook-up
dialing.

1 0 1 When these selectors are set to "1, 0, 1":

1 1 0 Each time you press the Pause key in dialing, the machine will wait for the
1 1 1 2nd dial tone to be sent via the communications line regardless of pulse
dialing or tone dialing.
When these selectors are set to "1, 1, 0":
If you press the Pause key in pulse dialing, the machine will first wait for the
2nd dial tone to be sent via the communications line. After that, pressing the
Pause key will cause the machine to insert a WAIT of 3.5 seconds. In tone
dialing, the machine will insert a WAIT of 3.5 seconds.
When these selectors are set to "1, 1, 1":
If you press the Pause key, the machine will first wait for the 2nd dial tone to
be sent via the communications line regardless of pulse dialing or tone
dialing. After that, pressing the Pause key will cause the machine to insert a
WAIT of 3.5 seconds.
(In those countries where no dial tone detection function is supported, setting
these selectors to "1, 0, 1," "1, 1, 0," or "1, 1, 1" inserts a WAIT of 3.5
seconds.)

• Selectors 4 through 6: Detection of international tone

Upon detection of the 2nd dial tone for the time length specified by these selectors, the
machine starts dialing.
This setting is effective only when the 2nd dial tone detection function is activated by
selectors 1 through 3 (Setting 101, 110, or 111).
This function does not apply in those countries where no dial tone detection function is
supported.

• Selector 7: No. of 2nd dial tone detection cycles

This selector sets the number of dial tone detection cycles required for starting dialing.

• Selector 8: Allowable instantaneous interrupt during reception of 2nd dial tone

This selector sets the allowable instantaneous interrupt period that should be ignored
during reception of the 2nd dial tone.

App. 4-11 Confidential

 WSW07 (Dial tone setting 1)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : Narrows by 10 Hz
1
Dial tone frequency band control 0 1 : Initial value
2
1 0 : Widens by 10 Hz
1 1 : Widens by 10 Hz
Line current detection
3 0: No 1: Yes
(Not used.)
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : -21 dBm
0 0 1 : -24 dBm
4 0 1 0 : -27 dBm
2nd dial tone detection level
| 0 1 1 : -30 dBm
(Z = 600Ω)
6 1 0 0 : -33 dBm
1 0 1 : -36 dBm
1 1 0 : -39 dBm
1 1 1 : -42 dBm
Allowable instantaneous interrupt
7 0: 30 ms 1: 50 ms
during reception of 1st dial tone
8 Not used.
ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selectors 1, 2, 4 through 7 are not applicable in those countries where no dial tone or line
current detection is supported, e.g., U.S.A.
Note: Selector 3 is not applicable to those models having no loop current detection function.
• Selectors 1 and 2: Dial tone frequency band control
These selectors set the frequency band for the 1st dial tone and busy tone (before dialing) to
be detected.
This setting is effective only when selectors 1 through 3 on WSW05 are set to "1,1,1."

• Selector 3: Line current detection (Not used.)

This selector determines whether or not to detect a line current before starting dialing.

• Selectors 4 through 6: 2nd dial tone detection level

These selectors set the detection level of the 2nd dial tone.

• Selector 7: Allowable instantaneous interrupt during reception of 1st dial tone

This selector sets the allowable instantaneous interrupt period that should be ignored
during reception of the 1st dial tone.

App. 4-12 Confidential

 WSW08 (Dial tone setting 2)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : 50 ms
0 0 1 : 210 ms
1 0 1 0 : 500 ms
| 1st dial tone detection time length 0 1 1 : 800 ms
3 1 0 0 : 900 ms
1 0 1 : 1.5 sec.
1 1 0 : 2.0 sec.
1 1 1 : 2.5 sec.
No. 4 5
4 0 0 : 10 sec.
Time-out length for 1st and 2nd
0 1 : 20 sec.
5 dial tone detection
1 0 : 15 sec.
1 1 : 30 sec.
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 : -21 dBm
0 0 1 : -24 dBm
6 0 1 0 : -27 dBm
Detection level of 1st dial tone and
| 0 1 1 : -30 dBm
busy tone before dialing
8 1 0 0 : -33 dBm
1 0 1 : -36 dBm
1 1 0 : -39 dBm
1 1 1 : -42 dBm
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

Note: The WSW08 is not applicable in those countries where no dial tone detection is
supported, e.g., U.S.A.
• Selectors 1 through 3: 1st dial tone detection time length
Upon detection of the 1st dial tone for the time length set by these selectors, the machine
starts dialing.
This setting is effective only when selectors 1 through 3 on WSW05 are set to "1,1,1."

• Selectors 4 and 5: Time-out length for 1st and 2nd dial tone detection
These selectors set the time-out length for the 1st and 2nd dial tone detection so that the
machine waits dial tone input for the specified time length and disconnects itself from the
line when no dial tone is inputted.

App. 4-13 Confidential

 WSW09 (Protocol definition 1)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Frame length selection 0: 256 octets 1: 64 octets
2 Use of non-standard commands 0: Allowed 1: Prohibited
No. 3 4
3 0 0 : 4 times
No. of retries 0 1 : 3 times
4 1 0 : 2 times
1 1 : 1 time
5 T5 timer 0: 300 sec. 1: 60 sec.
6 T1 timer 0: 35 sec. 1: 40 sec.
No. 7 8
0 0 : 55 sec. (in U.S.A. and Canadian
7 models)
Timeout for response from the
called station in automatic sending 60 sec. (in other models)
mode 0 1 : 140 sec.
8
1 0 : 90 sec.
1 1 : 35 sec.
sec.: second(s)

Note: Selectors 1 through 5 are not applicable in those models which do not support ECM.
• Selector 1: Frame length selection
Usually a single frame consists of 256 octets (1 octet = 8 bits). For communications lines
with higher bit error rate, however, set selector 1 to "1" so that the machine can divide a
message into 64-octet frames.
Remarks: The error correction mode (ECM) is a facsimile transmission manner in which
the machine divides a message into frames for transmission so that if any data error occurs
on the transmission line, the machine retransmits only those frames containing the error
data.
• Selector 2: Use of non-standard commands
If this selector is set to "0," the machine can use non-standard commands (the machine’s
native-mode commands, e.g., NSF, NSC, and NSS) for communications. If it is set to "1,"
the machine will use standard commands only.
• Selectors 3 and 4: No. of retries
These selectors set the number of retries in each specified modem transmission speed.
• Selector 5: T5 timer
This selector sets the time length for the T5 timer.
• Selector 6: T1 timer
This selector sets the time length for the T1 timer.
• Selectors 7 and 8: Timeout for response from the called station in automatic sending mode
If the machine (calling station) receives no response (no G3 command) from the called
terminal in automatic sending mode for the period specified by these selectors, it
disconnects the line.

App. 4-14 Confidential

 WSW10 (Protocol definition 2)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Not used.
Time length from transmission of
2 0: 100 ms 1: 50 ms
the last dial digit to CML ON
Time length from CML ON to
3 0: 2 sec. 1: 4 sec.
CNG transmission
Time length from CML ON to
4 CED transmission (except for 0: 0.5 sec. 1: 2 sec.
facsimile-to-telephone switching)
No. 5 6
5 0 0 : 1 time
No. of training retries 0 1 : 2 times
6 1 0 : 3 times
1 1 : 4 times
7 Encoding system MR 0: Allowed 1: Not allowed
8 (Compression) MMR 0: Allowed 1: Not allowed
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

• Selector 2: Time length from transmission of the last dial digit to CML ON
This selector sets the time length from when the machine transmits the last dial digit until
the CML relay comes on.

• Selector 3: Time length from CML ON to CNG transmission

This selector sets the time length until the machine transmits a CNG after it turns on the
CML relay.

• Selector 4: Time length from CML ON to CED transmission

This selector sets the time length until the machine transmits a CED after it turns on the
CML relay. This setting does not apply to switching between facsimile and telephone.

• Selectors 5 and 6: No. of training retries

These selectors set the number of training retries to be repeated before automatic fallback.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Encoding system (Compression)

This selector determines whether or not to allow the use of the MR/MMR coding system.

App. 4-15 Confidential

 WSW11 (Busy tone setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
1 0 0 : Narrows by 10 Hz
Busy tone frequency band control 0 1 : Initial value
2 1 0 : Widens by 10 Hz
1 1 : Widens by 10 Hz
3 1: 250-750/250-750 ms
4 1: 400-600/400-600 ms
5 ON/OFF time length ranges 1: 175-440/175-440 ms
for busy tone
6 (More than one setting allowed) 1: 100-1000 ms/17-660 ms
7 1: 110-410/320-550 ms
8 1: 100-660/100-660 ms
ms: millisecond(s)

Note: WSW11 is not applicable in those countries where no busy tone detection is supported.
Note: The setting of WSW11 is effective only when selectors 5 and 6 on WSW05 are set to "0,
1" or "1, 1" (Busy tone detection).

• Selectors 1 and 2: Busy tone frequency band control

These selectors set the frequency band for busy tone to be detected.

• Selectors 3 through 8: ON/OFF time length ranges for busy tone

These selectors set the ON and OFF time length ranges for busy tone to be detected. If
more than one selector is set to "1," the ranges become wider. For example, if selectors 4
and 5 are set to "1," the ON and OFF time length ranges are from 175 to 600 ms.

App. 4-16 Confidential

 WSW12 (Signal detection condition setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
Min. detection period required for 0 0 : 1500 ms
1
interpreting incoming calling 0 1 : 500 ms
2 signal (CI) as OFF 1 0 : 700 ms
1 1 : 900 ms
No. 3 4
Max. detection period for 0 0 : 6 sec.
3
incoming calling signal (CI) being 0 1 : 7 sec.
4 OFF 1 0 : 9 sec.
1 1 : 11 sec.
No. 5 6
Min. detection period required for 0 0 : 800 ms (1000 ms*)
5
acknowledging incoming calling 0 1 : 200 ms
6 signal (CI) as ON 1 0 : 250 ms
1 1 : 150 ms
Line connection timing 0: Ringer-OFF 1: Ringer-ON
7
(Not used.) period (default) period
8 Not used.
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)
*1000 milliseconds in Chinese models.

• Selectors 1 through 4: Min. detection period required for interpreting incoming calling signal (CI)
as OFF
Max. detection period for incoming calling signal (CI) being OFF
If the machine detects the OFF state of a CI signal for the period greater than the value set
by selectors 1 and 2 and less than the value set by selectors 3 and 4, it interprets the CI
signal as OFF.

• Selectors 5 and 6: Min. detection period required for acknowledging incoming calling signal (CI)
as ON
These selectors set the period required to make the machine acknowledge itself to be
called. That is, if the machine continuously detects a CI signal with the frequency set by
selectors 1 through 4 on WSW14 during the period set by these selectors 5 and 6, then it
acknowledges the call.

• Selector 7: Line connection timing (Not used.)

If a line is connected in a ringer-ON period, FAX models equipped with an SDAA circuit
may malfunction due to the ringer voltage. To make the line connection stable, this selector
should be set to "0" so that a line is connected in a ringer-OFF period.

App. 4-17 Confidential

 WSW13 (Modem setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : 0 km
1
Cable equalizer 0 1 : 1.8 km
2
1 0 : 3.6 km
1 1 : 5.6 km
No. 3 4
0 0 : -43 dBm
3
Reception level 0 1 : -47 dBm
4
1 0 : -49 dBm
1 1 : -51 dBm

5 0: 0 dB 1: 8 dB
0: 0 dB 1: 4 dB
| Modem attenuator
0: 0 dB 1: 2 dB
8 0: 0 dB 1: 1 dB
The modem should be adjusted according to the user's line conditions.
• Selectors 1 and 2: Cable equalizer
These selectors are used to improve the pass-band characteristics of analogue signals on a
line. (Attenuation in the high-band frequency is greater than in the low-band frequency.)
Set these selectors according to the distance from the telephone switchboard to the
machine.

• Selectors 3 and 4: Reception level

These selectors set the optimum receive signal level.

• Selectors 5 through 8: Modem attenuator

These selectors are used to adjust the transmitting level attenuation of the modem when the
reception level at the remote station is improper due to line loss. This function applies for
G3 protocol signals.
Setting two or more selectors to "1" produces addition of attenuation assigned to each
selector.
If selector 8 on WSW23 is set to "0," this setting is so limited that 10 dB (1 dB in France)
or higher setting only is effective. Note that in Japan and China, 9 dB or higher and 2 dB or
higher settings only are effective, respectively, regardless of whether selector 8 on WSW23
is set to "0."

App. 4-18 Confidential

 WSW14 (AUTO ANS facility setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
1 Frequency band selection (lower 0 0 : 13 Hz
limit) for incoming calling signal 0 1 : 15 Hz
2 (CI) 1 0 : 23 Hz
1 1 : 20 Hz
No. 3 4
3 Frequency band selection (upper 0 0 : 30 Hz
limit) for incoming calling signal 0 1 : 55 Hz
4 (CI) 1 0 : 70 Hz
1 1 : 200 Hz
No. 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 : Fixed to once
0 0 0 1 : 1 to 6 times
0 0 1 0 : 1 to 8 times
0 0 1 1 : 2 to 8 times
0 1 0 0 : 1 to 2 times
0 1 0 1 : 1 to 3 times
5 0 1 1 0 : 1 to 4 times
| No. of rings in AUTO ANS mode 0 1 1 1 : 1 to 5 times
8 1 0 0 0 : 2 to 3 times
1 0 0 1 : 2 to 4 times
1 0 1 0 : 2 to 5 times
1 0 1 1 : 2 to 6 times
1 1 0 0 : 1 to 10 times
1 1 0 1 : 2 to 10 times
1 1 1 0 : 3 to 5 times
1 1 1 1 : 4 to 10 times

• Selectors 1 through 4: Frequency band selection for incoming calling signal (CI)
These selectors are used to select the frequency band of CI for activating the AUTO ANS
facility.
In the French models, if the user sets the PBX to OFF from the control panel, the setting
made by selectors 1 and 2 will take no effect and the frequency's lower limit will be fixed
to 32 Hz. (Even if the setting made by these selectors does not apply, it will be printed on
the configuration list.)

• Selectors 5 through 8: No. of rings in AUTO ANS mode

These selectors set the number of rings to initiate the AUTO ANS facility.

App. 4-19 Confidential

 WSW15 (REDIAL facility setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
1 0 0 : 5 minutes
Redial interval 0 1 : 1 minute
2 1 0 : 2 minutes
1 1 : 3 minutes
No. 3 4 5 6
0 0 0 0 : 16 times
3 0 0 0 1 : 1 times
| No. of redialings 0 0 1 0 : 2 times
6 0 0 1 1 : 3 times
| |
1 1 1 1 : 15 times
Redialing to the called station on
7 0: Yes 1: No
the other end sending no response
8 CRP option 0: Disable 1: Enable

• Selectors 1 through 6: Redial interval and No. of redialings

The machine redials by the number of times set by selectors 3 through 6 at intervals set by
selectors 1 and 2.

• Selector 8: CRP option

If a command error occurs in the machine (calling station), the machine usually waits for
three seconds and then makes a retry three times. This CRP option is a request command
that can be sent from the called station for requesting the calling station to retry the failed
command immediately.

App. 4-20 Confidential

 WSW16 (Function setting 1)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Not used.
ITU-T (CCITT) superfine
2 0: OFF 1: ON
recommendation
3
| Not used.
6
7 Max. document length limitation 0: 400 cm 1: 90 cm
8 Stop key pressed during reception 0: Not functional 1: Functional

Note: Selector 7 is applicable to models with ADF unit.

• Selector 2: ITU-T (CCITT) superfine recommendation
If this selector is set to "1," the machine communicates in ITU-T (CCITT) recommended
superfine mode (15.4 lines/mm). If it is set to "0," it communicates in native superfine
mode.

• Selector 7: Max. document length limitation

This selector is used to select the maximum length of a document to be sent.

• Selector 8: Stop key pressed during reception

If this selector is set to "1," pressing the Stop key can stop the current receiving operation.
The received data will be lost.

App. 4-21 Confidential

 WSW17 (Function setting 2)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : No alarm
1 0 1 : Always valid
Off-hook alarm 1 0 : Valid except when 'call
2 reservation' is selected.
1 1 : Valid except when 'call
reservation' is selected.
3
Not used.
4
5 Calendar clock type 0: U.S.A. type 1: European type
6 Not used.
7 Non-ring reception 0: OFF 1: ON
8 Not used.

• Selectors 1 and 2: Off-hook alarm

These selectors activate or deactivate the alarm function which sounds an alarm when the
communication is completed with the handset being off the hook.

• Selector 5: Calendar clock type

If this selector is set to "0" (USA), the MM/DD/YY hh:mm format applies; if it is set to "1"
(Europe), the DD/MM/YY hh:mm format applies: DD is the day, MM is the month, YY is
the last two digits of the year, hh is the hour, and mm is the minute.

• Selector 7: Non-ring reception

Setting this selector to "1" makes the machine receive calls without ringer sound if the Ring
Delay is set to 0.

App. 4-22 Confidential

 WSW18 (Function setting 3)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Registration of station IDs of PCs
1 0: Permitted 1: Prohibited
sharing a FAX machine
No. 2 3
0 0 : 40 sec.
2 Detection enabled time for CNG or
0 1 : 0 sec. (No detection)
3 "no tone"
1 0 : 5 sec.
1 1 : 80 sec.
4
Not used.
5
6 Registration of station ID 0: Permitted 1: Prohibited
No. 7 8
0 0 : No monitoring
0 1 : No monitoring
7
Tone sound monitoring 1 0 : Up to phase B at the
8 calling station only
1 1 : All transmission phases
both at the calling and
called stations
sec.: second(s)

• Selectors 2 and 3: Detection enabled time for CNG or "no tone"

After the line is connected via the external telephone or by picking up the handset of the
machine, the machine can detect a CNG signal or "no tone" for the time length specified by
these selectors. The setting specified by these selectors becomes effective only when
selector 8 on WSW20 is set to "1."

• Selector 6: Registration of station ID

Setting this selector to "0" permits the registration of station ID for Austrian and Czech
models.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Tone sound monitoring

These selectors set monitoring specifications of the tone sound inputted from the line.

App. 4-23 Confidential

 WSW19 (Transmission speed setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
1 No. 4 5 6
First transmission speed choice for
| 0 0 0 : 2,400 bps
fallback
3 0 0 1 : 4,800 bps
0 1 0 : 7,200 bps
0 1 1 : 9,600 bps
4 1 0 0 : 12,000 bps
Last transmission speed choice for
| 1 0 1 : 14,400 bps
fallback
6 1 1 0 : 14,400 bps
1 1 1 : 14,400 bps
7 V.34 mode 0: Permitted 1: Prohibited
8 V.17 mode 0: Permitted 1: Prohibited

Note: Selector 7 takes effect only in models supporting V.34 mode.

• Selectors 1 through 6: First and last choices of transmission speed for fallback
These selectors are used to set the MODEM speed range. With the first transmission speed
choice specified by selectors 1 through 3, the machine attempts to establish the
transmission link via the MODEM. If the establishment fails, the machine automatically
steps down to the next lowest speed and attempts to establish the transmission link again.
The machine repeats this sequence while stepping down the transmission speed to the last
choice specified by selectors 4 through 6.
If the MODEM always falls back to a low transmission speed (e.g., 4,800 bps), set the first
transmission speed choice to the lower one (e.g., modify it from 12,000 bps to 7,200 bps) in
order to deactivate the high-speed MODEM function and reduce the training time for
shorter transmission time.
Generally, to save the transmission time, set the last transmission speed choice to a higher
one.

• Selector 7: V.34 mode

Permitting the V.34 mode with this selector makes WSW38 to WSW40, and WSW41
(selectors 5 to 8) effective.

App. 4-24 Confidential

 WSW20 (Overseas communications mode setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 EP* tone prefix 0: OFF 1: ON
Overseas communications mode
2 0: 2100 Hz 1: 1100 Hz
(Reception)
Overseas communications mode
3 0: OFF 1: Ignores DIS once.
(Transmission)
No. 4 5
Min. time length from reception of 0 0 : 100 ms
4
CFR to start of transmission of 0 1 : 200 ms
5 video signals 1 0 : 300 ms
1 1 : 400 ms
No. 6 7
0 0 : Yes, at both ON/OFF timings
6 At CNG detection, elimination of
0 1 : Yes, at OFF timing
7 chattering noise
1 0 : No
1 1 : No
8 Limitation on CNG detection 0: OFF 1: ON
ms: millisecond(s)
* EP: Echo protection

Note: Selectors 6 and 7 are applicable to models equipped with an SDAA circuit.
• Selector 1: EP tone prefix
Setting this selector to "1" makes the machine transmit a 1700 Hz echo protection (EP)
tone immediately preceding training in V.29 modulation system to prevent omission of
training signals.
Prefixing an EP tone is useful when the machine fails to transmit at the V.29 modem speed
and always has to fall back to 4,800 bps transmission.
The setting made by this selector takes effect only when the Overseas Mode is set to ON.
• Selectors 2 and 3: Overseas communications mode
These selectors should be used if the machine malfunctions in overseas communications.
According to the communications error state, select the signal specifications.
Setting selector 2 to "1" allows the machine to use 1100 Hz CED signal instead of 2100 Hz
in receiving operation. This prevents malfunctions resulting from echoes, since the 1100
Hz signal does not disable the echo suppressor (ES) while the 2100 Hz signal does.
Setting selector 3 to "1" allows the machine to ignore a DIS signal sent from the called
station once in sending operation. This operation suppresses echoes since the first DIS
signal immediately follows a 2100 Hz CED (which disables the ES) so that it is likely to be
affected by echoes in the disabled ES state. However, such a disabled ES state will be
removed soon so that the second and the following DIS signals are not susceptible to data
distortion due to echoes. Note that some models when called may cause error by receiving
a self-outputted DIS.
The setting made by selector 3 takes effect only when the Overseas Communications Mode
is set to ON. (The setting made by selector 2 is always effective.)
App. 4-25 Confidential
• Selector 8: Limitation on CNG detection
If this selector is set to "1," the machine detects a CNG signal according to the condition
preset by selectors 2 and 3 on WSW18 after a line is connected. If it is set to "0," the
machine detects a CNG signal as long as the line is connected.

WSW21 (TAD setting 1)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3 4 5
0 0 0 0 0 : No detection
"No tone" detection period during 0 0 0 0 1 : 1 sec.
1 0 0 0 1 0 : 2 sec.
recording of ICM
| (Max. waiting time for voice 0 0 0 1 1 : 3 sec.
signal) | |
5
(Not used.) 0 0 1 1 0 : 6 sec. (default)
| |
1 1 1 1 1 : 31 sec.
No. 6 7
0 0 : Enable (signaling for U.S.A.)
6 Taping the call 0 1 : Enable (signaling for
7 (Not used.) countries except U.S.A.)
1 0 : Enable (without signaling)
1 1 : Disable
Erasure of message stored in the
8 0: Yes 1: No
memory after the message transfer
sec.: second(s)

Note: Selectors 1 through 5 are applicable to models equipped with ICM recorder.
Note: Selectors 6 through 8 are applicable to models with a built-in TAD.
• Selectors 1 through 5: "No tone" detection period during recording of ICM (Max. waiting time for
voice signal) (Not used.)
If the machine detects "no tone"* during recording of ICM for the time length specified by
these selectors, it automatically stops recording ICM and disconnects the line. (*Tone
whose level is less than the threshold specified by selectors 1 through 3 on WSW33 is
interpreted as "no tone.")

• Selectors 6 and 7: Taping the call (Not used.)

These selectors select whether or not to tape the call. Setting them to "1, 0" enables taping
the call without signaling to the calling station that the call is being taped.

• Selector 8: Erasure of message stored in the memory after the message transfer
Setting this selector to "0" will erase the message recorded in the memory after the
document retrieval feature transfers the message.

App. 4-26 Confidential

 WSW22 (ECM and call waiting caller ID)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 ECM* in sending 0: ON 1: OFF
2 ECM* in receiving 0: ON 1: OFF
3 Call Waiting Caller ID 0: ON 1: OFF
4 Not used.

5 0: 0% 1: 8%
Acceptable TCF bit error rate (%) 0: 0% 1: 4%
| (Only at 4,800 bps)
(Not used.) 0: 0% 1: 2%
8 0: 0% 1: 1%
* ECM: Error correction mode

Note: Selector 3 is applicable to the American models.

Note: Selectors 5 through 8 are applicable to the Chinese, Taiwanese and Asian models only.
• Selector 3: Call Waiting Caller ID
Setting this selector to "0" allows the user to decide whether or not to interrupt the current
call when a new call comes in. If Call Waiting Caller ID service is available in the area and
the user subscribes to it, he/she can see information about his/her incoming call on the
LCD.

• Selectors 5 through 8: Acceptable TCF bit error rate (%) (Not used.)
Setting two or more selectors to "1" produces addition of percent assigned to each selector.
If you set selectors 7 and 8 to "1," the acceptable TCF bit error rate will be 3%.

App. 4-27 Confidential

 WSW23 (Communications setting)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Starting point of training check 0: From the head of a series of zeros
1
(TCF) 1: From any arbitrary point
No. 2 3
2 0 0 : 0%
Allowable training error rate 0 1 : 0.5%
3 1 0 : 1%
1 1 : 2%
No. 4 5
4 0 0 : 16%
Decoding error rate for
0 1 : 14%
5 transmission of RTN
1 0 : 10%
1 1 : 8%
6
Not used.
7
8 Limitation of attenuation level 0: Yes 1: No
Note: Selector 8 is not applicable to the French models.
• Selector 1: Starting point of training check (TCF)
At the training phase of receiving operation, the called station detects for 1.0 second a
training check (TCF) command, a series of zeros which is sent from the calling station for
1.5 seconds to verify training and give the first indication of the acceptability of the line.
This selector sets the starting point from which the called station should start counting
those zeros. If this selector is set to "0," the called station starts counting zeros 100
milliseconds after the head of a series of zeros is detected.
If it is set to "1," the called station starts counting zeros upon detection of 10-millisecond
successive zeros 50 milliseconds after the head of a series of zeros is detected. In this case,
if the detection of 10-millisecond successive zeros is too late, the data counting period will
become less than 1.0 second, making the called station judge the line condition
unacceptable.
• Selectors 2 and 3: Allowable training error rate
The called station checks a series of zeros gathered in training (as described in Selector 1)
according to the allowable training error rate set by these selectors. If the called station
judges the line condition to be accepted, it responds with CFR; if not, it responds with FTT.
• Selectors 4 and 5: Decoding error rate for transmission of RTN
The machine checks the actual decoding errors and then transmits an RTN according to the
decoding error rate (Number of lines containing an error per page ÷ Total number of lines
per page) set by these selectors.
• Selector 8: Limitation of attenuation level
Setting this selector to "0" limits the transmitting level of the modem to 10 dB (1 dB in
France).
This setting has priority over the settings selected by WSW02 (selectors 5 through 8) and
WSW13 (selectors 5 through 8).
App. 4-28 Confidential
 WSW24 (TAD setting 2)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : 15 sec.
1 Maximum OGM recording time
0 1 : 20 sec.
2 (Not used.)
1 0 : 30 sec.
1 1 : 50 sec.
No. 3 4
Time length from CML ON to start 0 0 : 4 sec.
3
of pseudo ring backtone 0 1 : 3 sec.
4 transmission 1 0 : 2 sec.
1 1 : 1 sec.
No. 5 6 7 8
Attenuator for playback of ICM/
5 0 0 0 0 : 0 dB
OGM to the line
0 0 0 1 : 1 dB
| (Selectable from the range of
0 0 1 0 : 2 dB
0-15 dB)
8 | |
(Not used.)
1 1 1 1 : 15 dB
sec.: second(s)
• Selectors 1 and 2: Maximum OGM recording time (Not used.)
These selectors specify the allowable maximum recording time for an OGM.

• Selectors 3 and 4: Time length from CML ON to start of pseudo ring backtone transmission
These selectors specify the length of time from CML-ON up to the start of pseudo ring
backtone transmission.
In models with an OGM facility, the settings made by these selectors also apply to the
length of time from CML-ON up to the start of OGM transmission.

• Selectors 5 through 8: Attenuator for playback of ICM/OGM to the line (Not used.)
Setting two or more selectors to "1" produces addition of attenuation assigned to each
selector.
This setting is not limited by selector 8 on WSW23.

App. 4-29 Confidential

 WSW25 (TAD setting 3)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
Delay time for starting "no tone" 0 0: 0 sec.
1 detection in the external TAD
0 1: 8 sec.
2 mode
(Not used.) 1 0: 16 sec.
1 1: 24 sec.
No. 3 4
Threshold level of "no tone" 0 0: -43 dB (A)
3 detection in the external TAD
0 1: -46 dB (B)
4 mode
(Not used.) 1 0: -49 dB (C)
1 1: -51 dB (D)
No. 5 6 7
0 0 0 : 2 sec.
0 0 1 : 4 sec.
5 0 1 0 : 6 sec.
Pause between paging number and
| 0 1 1 : 8 sec.
PIN
7 1 0 0 : 10 sec.
1 0 1 : 12 sec.
1 1 0 : 14 sec.
1 1 1 : 16 sec.
8 Not used.
sec.: second(s)

Note: Selectors 1 through 4 are not applicable to the U.S.A. models, models without "no tone"
detecting function in the external TAD mode, or models with Rockwell modem V24.
Note: Selectors 5 through 7 are applicable to the U.S.A. models only.
• Selectors 1 and 2: Delay time for starting "no tone" detection in the external TAD mode
(Not used.)
These selectors take effect only in the external TAD mode. The machine delays starting
detection of "no tone" by the time length specified by these selectors.
The total length of the delay time specified by these selectors and the maximum waiting
time specified by WSW21 (selectors 1 through 5) should not exceed 40 seconds.

• Selectors 3 and 4: Threshold level of "no tone" detection in the external TAD mode (Not used.)
These selectors specify the threshold level of "no tone" detection in the external TAD
mode.

• Selectors 5 through 7: Pause between paging number and PIN

These selectors set the pause time between a telephone number being paged and PIN
(personal identification number) for the paging feature.

App. 4-30 Confidential

 WSW26 (Function setting 4)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
Not used.
2
Dialing during document reading
3 into the temporary memory in in- 0: Disable 1: Enable
memory message transmission

No. of CNG cycles to be detected No. 4 5

4 (when the line is connected via the 0 0 : 0.5 (A)
external telephone except in the 0 1 : 1 (B)
5 external TAD mode or via the 1 0 : 1.5 (C)
built-in telephone) 1 1 : 2 (D)
No. of CNG cycles to be detected No. 6 7
(when the line is connected via the 0 0 : 0.5 (A)
6 external telephone in the external 0 1 : 1 (B)
TAD mode, via the built-in
7 1 0 : 1.5 (C)
telephone in the TAD mode, or via
the machine in the automatic 1 1 : 2 (D)
reception of the F/T mode)
8 Not used.

• Selector 3: Dialing during document reading into the temporary memory in in-memory message
transmission
If this selector is set to "0," the machine waits for document reading into the memory to
complete and then starts dialing. This enables the machine to list the total number of pages
in the header of the facsimile message.

• Selectors 4 and 5: No. of CNG cycles to be detected (when the line is connected via the external
telephone except in the external TAD mode or via the built-in telephone)
The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects the CNG by the number of
cycles specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone
except in the external TAD mode or via the built-in telephone.

• Selectors 6 and 7: No. of CNG cycles to be detected (when the line is connected via the external
telephone in the external TAD mode, via the built-in telephone in the TAD
mode, or via the machine in the automatic reception of the F/T mode)
The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects the CNG by the number of
cycles specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external telephone in
the external TAD mode, via the built-in telephone in the TAD mode, or via the machine in
the automatic reception of the F/T mode.

App. 4-31 Confidential

 WSW27 (Function setting 5)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Not used.
2 Ringer OFF setting 0: Yes 1: No
Automatic playback of OGM
3 when switched to the TAD mode 0: No 1: Yes
(Not used.)
Detection of distinctive ringing
4 0: Yes 1: No
pattern

5 Not used.

Recording quality
6 0: Normal 1: High
(Not used.)
Recording time for high recording
0: Short 1: Long
7 quality
(9.6 kbps) (8.8 kbps)
(Not used.)
8 Not used.

Note: Selectors 4 and 5 are applicable to the U.S.A. models only.

• Selector 2: Ringer OFF setting
This selector determines whether or not the ringer can be set to OFF.

• Selector 3: Automatic playback of OGM when switched to the TAD mode (Not used.)
This selector determines whether or not to automatically play back an OGM the moment
the machine switches to the TAD mode.

• Selector 4: Detection of distinctive ringing pattern

If this selector is set to "1," the machine detects only the number of rings; if it is set to "0,"
the machine detects the number of rings and the ringing time length to compare the
detected ringing pattern with the registered distinctive one.

• Selector 6: Recording quality (Not used.)

This selector determines the recording quality for the OGM and ICM. Selecting "1" (High)
increases the quality, sacrificing the recording time.

• Selector 7: Recording time for high recording quality (Not used.)

This setting takes effect when selector 6 is set to "1" (High). Setting this selector to "0"
(Short) further increases the recording quality, sacrificing the recording time.
The recording quality and time to be applied when this selector is set to "1" (Long) are
higher and shorter than the ones to be applied when selector 6 is set to "0" (Normal).
The recording quality and time determined by this selector being set to "1" (Long) are
higher and shorter than the ones determined by selector 6 being set to "0" (Normal).

App. 4-32 Confidential

 WSW28 (Function setting 6)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : 0 dB
0 0 1 : +1 dB
1 0 1 0 : +2 dB
Transmission level of DTMF
| 0 1 1 : +3 dB
high-band frequency signal
3 1 0 0 : 0 dB
1 0 1 : -1 dB
1 1 0 : -2 dB
1 1 1 : -3 dB
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : 0 dB
0 0 1 : +1 dB
4 0 1 0 : +2 dB
Transmission level of DTMF
| 0 1 1 : +3 dB
low-band frequency signal
6 1 0 0 : 0 dB
1 0 1 : -1 dB
1 1 0 : -2 dB
1 1 1 : -3 dB
7
Not used.
8

• Selectors 1 through 6: Transmission level of DTMF high-/low-band frequency signal

These selectors are intended for the manufacturer who tests the machine for the Standard.
Never access them.

App. 4-33 Confidential

 WSW29 (Function setting 7) (Not used.)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : -47.0 dBm (A)
0 0 1 : -48.5 dBm (B)
1 Compression threshold level for 0 1 0 : -50.0 dBm (C)
voice signals inputted via the
| 0 1 1 : -51.5 dBm (D)
telephone line in the built-in TAD
3 operation 1 0 0 : -53.0 dBm (E)
1 0 1 : -54.5 dBm (F)
1 1 0 : -56.0 dBm (G)
1 1 1 : OFF (H)
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : -44.0 dBm (A)
0 0 1 : -45.5 dBm (B)
4 Compression threshold level for 0 1 0 : -47.0 dBm (C)
voice signals inputted via the
| 0 1 1 : -48.5 dBm (D)
handset in the built-in TAD
6 operation 1 0 0 : -50.0 dBm (E)
1 0 1 : -51.5 dBm (F)
1 1 0 : -53.0 dBm (G)
1 1 1 : OFF (H)
Impedance switching control in
7 0: OFF 1: ON
pulse dialing
Prompt beep when the memory
8 area for the activity report 0: No 1: Yes
becomes full

Note: Selectors 1 through 6 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.

Note: Selectors 7 and 8 are applicable only to the European versions.
• Selectors 1 through 6: Compression threshold level for voice signals inputted via the telephone
line in the built-in TAD operation
If voice signals inputted via the telephone line are below the level specified by these
selectors, the TAD interprets those received voice signals as no signal, compressing the
recording time.

• Selector 8: Prompt beep for activity report

This selector determines whether or not to beep if the memory area for the activity report
becomes full, for prompting you to print out the report. (Printing it out will clear the
memory area.)

App. 4-34 Confidential

 WSW30 (Function setting 8) (Not used.)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : -38.0 dBm (A)
0 0 1 : -39.5 dBm (B)
1 0 1 0 : -41.0 dBm (C)
Dial tone/busy tone detection level
| 0 1 1 : -42.5 dBm (D)
during recording of ICM
3 1 0 0 : -44.0 dBm (E)
1 0 1 : -45.5 dBm (F)
1 1 0 : -47.0 dBm (G)
1 1 1 : -48.5 dBm (H)
4
| Not used.
8

Note: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.

• Selectors 1 through 3: Dial tone/busy tone detection level during recording of ICM
If the machine (called station) detects dial tone (400 Hz continuously) or busy tone (400 Hz
intermittently) exceeding the detection level specified by these selectors for the period
specified by selectors 1 through 4 on WSW35, then it interprets the calling station as being
disconnected. The machine stops TAD recording and disconnects the line.

App. 4-35 Confidential

 WSW31 (Function setting 9)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Not used.
Limitation of reduction ratio in
2 0: Yes 1: No
copying
3 Not used.
4 (Do not disturb this selector.)
Minimum ON and OFF duration of
5 ringer signals effective in 0: 130 ms 1: 90 ms
distinctive ringing
6
| Not used.
8
ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selector 5 is applicable only to the U.S.A. models.

• Selector 2: Limitation of reduction ratio in copying
When the user selects a ratio less than 70%, if the reduction ratio is limited ("0"), the
machine prints in 70% (fixed); if not limited ("1"), the machine prints in the reduction ratio
matching the horizontal scanning width of recording paper.

• Selector 5: Minimum ON and OFF duration of ringer signals effective in distinctive ringing
The ringer pattern consists of short and long rings, e.g., short-short-long rings. This
selector sets the minimum ON and OFF duration of ringer signals that are required for the
machine to interpret ringer signals as being ON or OFF. This is to prevent components of a
ringer pattern from being misinterpreted due to chattering in distinctive ringing.
The machine monitors ringer signals at 10-millisecond intervals. If the signal is ON, the
machine counts +1; if it is OFF, it counts -1. If the counter increments up to +5 or +13
when this selector is set to "1" (90 milliseconds) or "0" (130 milliseconds), respectively,
the machine interprets the current signal as being ON.
If the counter returns to zero, the machine interprets the signal as being OFF.
If the Distinctive Ring is set to OFF, this selector is not effective.

App. 4-36 Confidential

 WSW32 (Function setting 10)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
| Not used.
4
No. 5 6
0 0 : Standard
5
Default resolution 0 1 : Fine
6
1 0 : Super fine
1 1 : Photo
No. 7 8
0 0 : Automatic
7
Default contrast 0 1 : Automatic
8
1 0 : Super light
1 1 : Super dark

• Selectors 5 and 6: Default resolution

These selectors set the default resolution which applies when the machine is turned on or
completes a transaction.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Default contrast

These selectors set the default contrast which applies when the machine is turned on or
completes a transaction.

App. 4-37 Confidential

 WSW33 (Function setting 11)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : -48 dBm (A)
0 0 1 : -50 dBm (B)
1 0 1 0 : -52 dBm (C)
Threshold level of "no tone"
| detection during recording of ICM 0 1 1 : -54 dBm (D)
(Not used.) 1 0 0 : -56 dBm (E)
3
1 0 1 : -58 dBm (F)
1 1 0 : -60 dBm (G) (default)
1 1 1 : -62 dBm (H)
No. 4 5
FAX receiving speed to be kept 0 0 : 14,400 bps
4 within the transmission speed limit
0 1 : 12,000 bps
5 to the PC
(Not used.) 1 0 : 9,600 bps
1 1 : 7,200 bps
Report output of polled
6 0: Yes 1: No
transmission requests
No. 7 8
7 0 0 : OFF
Comfortable noise level
0 1 : Low (A)
8 (Not used.)
1 0 : Medium (B)
1 1 : High (C)

Note: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.

• Selectors 1 through 3: Threshold level of "no tone" detection during recording of ICM (Not used.)
If the tone level during recording of ICM is less than the threshold setting made by these
selectors, the tone is interpreted as "no tone." When the "no tone" state is kept for the
period specified by selectors 1 through 5 on WSW21, the machine stops recording of ICM
and disconnects the line.

• Selectors 4 and 5: FAX receiving speed to be kept within the transmission speed limit to the PC
(Not used.)
To transmit FAX data being received from other machine to the connected PC, you may
need to keep the FAX receiving speed within the transmission speed limit specified for the
PC. In an initial negotiation sequence for transmission, the machine responds to the calling
station with the allowable FAX receiving speed specified by these selectors.

• Selectors 7 and 8: Comfortable noise level (Not used.)

These selectors set the level of noise to be added during playing-back of voice signals
recorded with no-signal compression.
If they are set to "0, 0," no noise will be added.

App. 4-38 Confidential

 WSW34 (Function setting 12)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : 0 sec.
Erasing time length of ICM tone 0 0 1 : 1 sec.
1 recorded preceding the tone 0 1 0 : 2 sec.
detection starting point in the case
| 0 1 1 : 3 sec.
of automatic line disconnection
3 due to no voice signal received 1 0 0 : 4 sec.
(Not used.) 1 0 1 : 5 sec.
1 1 0 : 6 sec.
1 1 1 : 7 sec.
No. of CNG cycles to be detected No. 4 5
(when the line is connected via the 0 0 : 0.5 (A)
4 external telephone in the external
0 1 : 1 (B)
5 TAD mode or via the machine in
F/T mode) 1 0 : 1.5 (C)
(Not used.) 1 1 : 2 (D)
No. 6 7
Number of DTMF tone signals for 0 0 : 3
6
inhibiting the detection of CNG 0 1 : 2
7 during external TAD operation 1 0 : 1
1 1 : OFF
8 Not used.
sec.: second(s)

Note: Selectors 1 through 5 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.

• Selectors 1 through 3: Erasing time length of ICM tone recorded preceding the tone detection
starting point in the case of automatic line disconnection due to no voice
signal received (Not used.)
If the machine has disconnected the line after detection of disconnection tone in ICM
recording, it erases tone recorded preceding the tone detection starting point for the time
length set by these selectors.

• Selectors 4 and 5: No. of CNG cycles to be detected (when the line is connected via the external
telephone in the external TAD mode or via the machine in F/T mode)
(Not used.)
The machine interprets a CNG as an effective signal if it detects a CNG signal by the
number of cycles specified by these selectors when the line is connected via the external
telephone in the external TAD mode or via the machine in F/T mode.

• Selectors 6 and 7: Number of DTMF tone signals for inhibiting the detection of CNG during
external TAD operation
If the machine receives this specified number of DTMF tone signals during external TAD
operation, it will not detect CNG afterwards.
If these selectors are set to "1, 1," the CNG detection will not be inhibited.

App. 4-39 Confidential

 WSW35 (Function setting 13) (Not used.)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 23 4
0 00 0 : No detection
1 0 00 1 : 1 sec.
Max. detection period of dial tone/
| 0 01 0 : 2 sec.
busy tone during recording of ICM
4 0 10 0 : 4 sec.
| |
1 1 1 1 : 15 sec.
5
| Not used.
8
sec.: second(s)

Note: Selectors 1 through 4 are applicable to models with built-in TAD.

• Selectors 1 through 4: Max. detection period of dial tone/busy tone during recording of ICM
If the machine (called station) detects dial tone or busy tone exceeding the detection level
specified by selectors 1 through 3 on WSW30 for the period specified by these selectors,
then it interprets the state as the calling station's breaking the connection, stops recording
the ICM, and disconnects the line.

App. 4-40 Confidential

 WSW36 (Function setting 14)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 ECP mode* 0: ON 1: OFF
Recovery from Inactive PC
2 0: Disable 1: Enable
Interface
3 PC Power-off Recognition Time 0: Normal 1: Long
4 Not used.
5 Escape from phase C 0: Yes 1: No
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 : 0 (Ignored)
0 0 1 : 4 (448 Hz)
6 Extension of incoming calling 0 1 0 : 8 (244 Hz)
signal (CI) frequency band
| 0 1 1 : 12 (162 Hz)
specified by selectors 1 through 4
8 on WSW14 1 0 0 : 16 (122 Hz)
1 0 1 : 20 (97 Hz)
1 1 0 : 24 (81 Hz)
1 1 1 : 28 (69 Hz)
*ECP (Enhanced Capabilities Port)

Note: Selectors 2 and 3 on WSW36 take effect only when the "Monitoring the PC ON/OFF
state" is enabled with selectors 1 and 2 on WSW46.
• Selector 1: ECP mode*
The ECP mode enhances the normal bidirectional communications between the machine
and the connected PC for higher transmission speed.

• Selector 2: Recovery from Inactive PC Interface

If the machine recognizes via the STB signal line that the connected PC is powered off, it
will turn the PC interface outputs Low to protect the PC from hazards that could be caused
by weak electric current accidentally flown from the machine.
This selector determines whether or not the machine should recover from the inactive PC
interface to normal interfacing state upon receipt of data from the PC.

• Selector 3: PC Power-off Recognition Time

This selector sets the time length from when the machine detects the PC powered off until
it recognizes the detected state as power-off.
If selector 2 is set to "0," it is recommended that selector 3 be set to "1"; otherwise, the
machine may mistakenly detect PC powered off.

• Selector 5: Escape from phase C

This selector determines whether or not the machine will escape from phase C when it
detects an RTC (Return to Control) in non-ECM mode or an RCP (Return to Control
Partial page) in ECM mode.

App. 4-41 Confidential

• Selectors 6 through 8: Extension of incoming calling signal (CI) frequency band specified by
selectors 1 through 4 on WSW14
At the start of reception, if the machine detects the frequency of a CI signal specified by
selectors 1 through 4 on WSW14, it starts the ringer sounding. However, the machine may
fail to detect the CI signal normally due to noise superimposed at the time of reception. To
prevent it, use selectors 6 through 8 on WSW36.
If the machine detects higher frequencies than the setting made here, it regards them as
noise and interprets the detecting state as being normal, allowing the ringer to keep
sounding according to the preset number of ringers (until it starts automatic reception of
FAX data in the FAX mode or enters the TAD mode in the TEL mode).

WSW37 (Function setting 15)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Printout of the stored image data of
1 an unsent document onto an error 0: No 1: Yes
report
Erasure of the stored image data of
an unsent document at the time of
2 0: No 1: Yes
the subsequent in-memory
message transmission
3
| Not used.
8

• Selector 1: Printout of the stored image data of an unsent document onto an error report
This selector determines whether or not to print out the 1st-page image data of a document
onto the error report if the document image data stored in the temporary memory cannot be
transmitted normally.

• Selector 2: Erasure of the stored image data of an unsent document at the time of the
subsequent in-memory message transmission
If in-memory message transmission fails repeatedly when selector 1 is set to "1," the
temporary memory will be occupied with image data. Setting selector 2 to "1" will
automatically erase the stored 1st-page image data of an unsent document at the time of the
subsequent in-memory message transmission only when recording paper or toner runs out.

App. 4-42 Confidential

 WSW38 (V.34 transmission settings)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
1 0 0 : Automatic
Setting of the equalizer 0 1 : Automatic
2 1 0 : Fixed to 4 points
1 1 : Fixed to 16 points
Sending level of guard tone at
3 0: Normal - 7 db 1: Normal
phase 2
Stepping down the transmission
4 0: 2,400 bps 1: 4,800 bps
speed at fallback each
No. 5 6
0 0 : For higher transmission speed
than the current setting
5 Automatic control of modem's 0 1 : No change from the current
EQM gain for proper transmission setting
6 speed choice 1 0 : For lower transmission speed
than the current setting
1 1 : For further lower transmission
than the setting made by 1, 0
Redialing when a communications
7 0: ON 1: OFF
error occurs
Detection of CED for stopping
8 0: ON 1: OFF
CNG
Note: WSW38 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in
models supporting V.34 mode.
• Selectors 1 and 2: Setting of the equalizer
These selectors set the equalizer's training level to be applied if the machine fails to send
training due to weak line connection. If these selectors are set to "0, 0" or "0, 1," the
modem will automatically set the appropriate training level.
• Selector 3: Sending level of guard tone at phase 2
This selector sets the sending level of guard tone for 1800 Hz to be sent at Phase 2 in the V.
34 mode.
• Selector 4: Stepping down the transmission speed at fallback each
This selector determines how much the modem steps down the transmission speed at
fallback when called by the remote station. If this selector is set to "1," the modem may
step down the transmission speed from 33,600 bps to 28,800 bps by one-time fallback.
• Selectors 5 and 6: Automatic control of modem's EQM gain for proper transmission speed
choice
These selectors determine how the modem controls the EQM (Eye Quality Monitor) gain
for proper choice of the transmission speed, which applies if the modem selects higher
transmission speed than the possible speed so that it always repeats falling back.
• Selector 8: Detection of CED for stopping CNG
If this selector is set to "0," the detection time of CED specified by WSW43, selectors 4
and 5 will apply.
App. 4-43 Confidential
 WSW39 (V.34 transmission speed)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3 4
No. 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 : 2,400 bps
0 0 0 1 : 4,800 bps
1
First transmission speed choice for 0 0 1 0 : 7,200 bps
|
fallback 0 0 1 1 : 9,600 bps
4 0 1 0 0 : 12,000 bps
0 1 0 1 : 14,400 bps
0 1 1 0 : 16,800 bps
0 1 1 1 : 19,200 bps
1 0 0 0 : 21,600 bps
1 0 0 1 : 24,000 bps
5 1 0 1 0 : 26,400 bps
Last transmission speed choice for 1 0 1 1 : 28,800 bps
|
fallback 1 1 0 0 : 31,200 bps
8 1 1 0 1 : 33,600 bps
1 1 1 0 : 33,600 bps
1 1 1 1 : 33,600 bps

Note: WSW39 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in
models supporting V.34 mode. For the transmission speed setting in other modes, refer to
WSW19.
• Selectors 1 through 8: First and last choices of transmission speed for fallback
These selectors are used to set the modem speed range. With the first transmission speed
choice specified by selectors 1 through 4, the machine attempts to establish the
transmission link via the modem. If the establishment fails, the machine automatically
steps down to the next highest speed and attempts to establish the transmission link again.
The machine repeats this sequence while stepping down the transmission speed to the last
choice specified by selectors 5 through 8.
If the modem always falls back to a low transmission speed (e.g., 24,000 bps), set the first
transmission speed choice to the lower one (e.g., modify it from 31,200 bps to 26,400 bps)
in order to deactivate the high-speed modem function and reduce the training time for
shorter transmission time.
WSW39 will be limited by selectors 3 through 8 on WSW40.

App. 4-44 Confidential

 WSW40 (V.34 modem settings)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
Not used.
2
Not masking Masking
3 No. 3 0 1 3429 symbols/sec
No. 4 0 1 3200 symbols/sec
| Masking of symbol rate(s) No. 5 0 1 3000 symbols/sec
No. 6 0 1 2800 symbols/sec
8
No. 7 - - Not used.
No. 8 0 1 2400 symbols/sec
sec.: second(s)
Note: WSW40 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in
models supporting V.34 mode.
• Selectors 3 through 8: Masking of symbol rate(s)
These selectors allow you to limit the transmission speed range in V.34 mode by masking
the desired symbol rate(s). Transmission speeds assigned to the symbol rates are listed on
the next page. The setting made by these selectors will limit the setting made by selectors 1
through 4 on WSW39.
If selector 3 is set to "1" to mask the 3429 symbols/second when the first transmission
speed choice is 33,600 bps (specified by selectors 1 through 4 of WSW39), for example,
then the allowable maximum transmission speed will be limited to 31,200 bps. If selector 8
is set to "1" to mask the 2400 symbols/second when the first transmission speed choice is
33,600 bps, then the allowable maximum transmission speed remains 33,600 bps.
If selector 8 is set to "1" to mask the 2400 symbols/second when the first transmission
speed choice is 21,600 bps (specified by selectors 1 through 4 on WSW39), then the
allowable maximum transmission speed remains 21,600 bps but the minimum transmission
speed will be limited to 4,800 bps.
Symbol rate Transmission speed Symbol rate Transmission speed Symbol rate Transmission speed
(bps) (bps) (bps)
2400 2,400 3000 4,800 3429 4,800
4,800 7,200 7,200
7,200 9,600 9,600
9,600 12,000 12,000
12,000 14,400 14,400
14,400 16,800 16,800
16,800 19,200 19,200
19,200 21,600 21,600
21,600 24,000 24,000
2800 4,800 26,400 28,800
7,200 28,800 31,200
9,600 3200 4,800 33,600
12,000 7,200
14,400 9,600
16,800 12,000
19,200 14,400
21,600 16,800
24,000 19,200
26,400 21,600
24,000
26,400
28,800
31,200

App. 4-45 Confidential

 WSW41 (ON-duration of the scanning light source)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : 16 hours
0 0 1 : 24 hours
1 0 1 0 : 12 hours
ON-duration of the scanning light
| source at room temperature 0 1 1 : 8 hours
(Not used.) 1 0 0 : 4 hours
3
1 0 1 : 2 hours
1 1 0 : 10 minutes
1 1 1 : 0 minute
4 I-FAX Relay Report 0: ON 1: OFF
No. 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 : -10 dBm
5 0 0 0 1 : -11 dBm
0 0 1 0 : -12 dBm
| Modem attenuator
0 0 1 1 : -13 dBm
8 0 1 0 0 : -14 dBm
| |
1 1 1 1 : -25 dBm

Note: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to CCD models.

• Selectors 1 through 3: ON-duration of the scanning light source at room temperature (Not used.)
If the scanning operation is started when the scanning light source is off, then it will come
on for scanning. These selectors determine how long the light source is ON after scanning.
If these selectors are set to "1, 1, 1," the light source goes off immediately after the
scanning sequence.

• Selectors 5 through 8: Modem attenuator

These selectors are used to adjust the transmitting level of the modem when the reception
level at the remote station is improper due to line loss. This function applies to super G3
protocol signals.

App. 4-46 Confidential

 WSW42 (Internet mail settings) (Not used.)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Access to the incoming mail
1 (POP3) server 0: Disable 1: Enable
(Periodical or on-demand)
Access to the outgoing mail
2 0: Disable 1: Enable
(SMTP) server
3 I-FAX relay 0: Disable 1: Enable
4
| Not used.
8

Note: WSW42 is applicable to models equipped with LAN interface.

WSW43 (Function setting 21)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Insertion of mail header into
1 0: Yes 1: No
outgoing mails
No. 2 3
Wait time for PC-Fax reception 0 0 : 50 ms
2
(Class 2) and FPTS command 0 1 : 100 ms
3 transmission 1 0 : 150 ms
1 1 : 0 ms
No. 4 5
0 0 : 200 ms
4 Detection time of 2100 Hz CED or
0 1 : 300 ms
5 ANSam
1 0 : 400 ms
1 1 : 500 ms
6 Not used.
Automatic start of remote
7 0: No 1: Yes
maintenance
8 JPEG coding 0: Disable 1: Enable
ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selector 1 is applicable to models equipped with LAN interface.

• Selector 1: Insertion of mail header into outgoing mails
Setting this selector to "1" inserts the station ID as a header into outgoing mails.
• Selector 8: JPEG coding
Setting this selector to "0" disables the machine from sending/receiving JPEG color images
and from receiving JPEG monochrome images.

App. 4-47 Confidential

 WSW44 (Speeding up scanning-1)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
| Not used.
5
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 : Obtained compensation
data ineffective
6 0 0 1 : 1 min.
Effective time length of the white 0 1 0 : 3 min.
| level compensation data obtained
0 1 1 : 5 min.
beforehand
8 1 0 0 : 10 min.
1 0 1 : 15 min.
1 1 0 : 20 min.
1 1 1 : 30 min.
min.: minute(s)
• Selectors 6 through 8: Effective time length of the white level compensation data obtained
beforehand
If you set documents in the ADF and the document front sensor detects them, the controller
will make correction of the reference voltage to be applied to white level compensation for
document scanning before the Copy key is pressed.
These selectors determine how long compensation data obtained beforehand will keep
effective.

App. 4-48 Confidential

 WSW45 (Speeding up scanning-2) (Not used)
Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : No automatic drawing-in
0 0 1 : 1 sec.
1
Delay time from when documents 0 1 0 : 2 sec.
| are set until the ADF starts 0 1 1 : 3 sec.
drawing them in 1 0 0 : 4 sec.
3
1 0 1 : 5 sec.
1 1 0 : 6 sec.
1 1 1 : 7 sec.
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : No correction of reference
voltage during standby
Periodical correction intervals of
4 0 0 1 : 10 sec.
the reference voltage to be applied
0 1 0 : 30 sec.
| to white level compensation for
0 1 1 : 1 min.
document scanning, during
6 1 0 0 : 3 min.
standby
1 0 1 : 5 min.
1 1 0 : 10 min.
1 1 1 : 30 min.
0: CIS home position
7 Standby position of the CIS unit
1: Location of the white reference film
8 Line polarity reversal detector 0: Disable 1: Enable
sec.: second(s), min.: minute(s)
• Selectors 1 through 3: Delay time from when documents are set until the ADF starts drawing
them in
These selectors determine how long the ADF will delay automatic drawing-in of
documents (to the scanning standby position) after you set them in the ADF, as well as
determining whether or not the ADF automatically draws in documents.
• Selectors 4 through 6: Periodical correction intervals of the reference voltage applied to white
level compensation for document scanning, during standby
These selectors set the correction intervals (in seconds) of the reference voltage to be
applied to white level compensation for document scanning during standby, as well as
determining whether or not the controller makes the reference voltage correction during
standby. (Conventionally, the correction has been made immediately before the start of
actual scanning)
This function takes effect in copying. Making the correction during standby may shorten
the preparation time for copying.
Note: Do not access these selectors.
• Selector 7: Standby position of the CIS unit
This selector determines whether the standby position of the CIS unit should be the home
position or the location of the white reference film (attached to the inside of the scanner top
cover). If the location of the reference film is selected, the CIS unit will not return to the
home position so as to shorten the travel time, decreasing the preparation time for copying.
• Selector 8: Line polarity reversal detector
When the remote station breaks the connection, a line polarity reversal occurs. Enabling the
polarity reversal detector with this selector allows the machine to detect the polarity
reversal if detected when the user is leaving a message on the station's answering machine.

App. 4-49 Confidential

 WSW46 (Monitor of power ON/OFF state and parallel port kept at high)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : Disable
1 0 1 : Monitor SELECT IN
Monitoring the PC ON/OFF state
2 1 0 : Monitor STROBE
1 1 : Monitor both SELECT IN
and STROBE
Parallel port output pins kept at
3 0: Enable 1: Disable
high level
Previous filtering parameters for
4 0: Enable 1: Disable
white level compensation
Prevention of ink splashing in ink
5 0: Enable 1: Disable
near-empty state
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 : Without WAIT
0 0 1 : 1 sec.
6 0 1 0 : 2 sec.
Waiting time for scanning for a
| single copy 0 1 1 : 3 sec.
(Not used.) 1 0 0 : 4 sec.
8
1 0 1 : 5 sec.
1 1 0 : 6 sec.
1 1 1 : 7 sec.
sec.: second(s)
Note: Selector 4 is not applicable to models equipped with flat-bed scanner.
• Selectors 1 and 2: Monitoring the PC ON/OFF state
For the related functions, refer to WSW36, selectors 2 and 3.
• Selector 3: Parallel port output pins kept at high level
Setting this selector to "0" will keep all parallel output pins of the machine at high level.
Use this setting if Resource Manager (bundled with MFC models) installed to WindowsNT
running on the connected PC fails to monitor the power ON/OFF state of the machine.
• Selector 4: Previous filtering parameters for white level compensation
At the start of scanning operation, the machine usually initializes white and black level data
stored in the EEPROM by scanning the white reference film attached to the inside of the
scanner top cover. After long use of the machine, however, the film may be contaminated
with dust or dirt. Accordingly, incorrect white level data will be set up so that white vertical
streaks will be brought on the scanning result.
Setting this selector to "0" (Enable) will apply previously saved white level data instead of
new incorrect compensation.
• Selector 5: Prevention of ink splashing in ink near-empty state
Setting this selector to "0" (Enable) prevents ink splashing by decreasing the head drive
voltage when the "Ink near-empty state" is detected.

App. 4-50 Confidential

 WSW47 (Switching between high- and full-speed USB)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Handling paper at the
occurrence of a paper feed 0: Eject paper w/o print 1: Print on the current
1
timing error paper
(Not used.)
Reduction of document size in
2 0: No 1: Yes
real-time transmission
No. 3 4
Delay of FAX line
disconnection when switching 0 0 : 200 ms
3
to the pseudo-ringing external 0 1 : 400 ms
4 telephone 1 0 : 700 ms
(Not used.)
1 1 : 1000 ms
Disable the ringer of external
5 telephone at non-ring reception 0: No 1: Yes
(Not used.)
6 Not used.
Disable the ringer of external
telephone with CAR signal
7 when caller ID service is 0: No 1: Yes
available
(Not used.)
0: Auto switching between high-speed USB (ver.
Switching between high-speed 2.0) and full-speed USB (ver. 1.1)
8
USB and full-speed USB
1: Fixed to full-speed USB (ver. 1.1)
Note: Selector 1 is applicable only to models equipped with flat-bed scanner.
Note: Selectors 3 and 4 are applicable only to models supporting pseudo-ringing of a connected
external telephone.
• Selector 1: Handling paper at the occurrence of a paper feed timing error (Not used.)
When feeding paper to the print start position, the machine might cause a feed timing error
so that the registration sensor goes ON signaling the presence of paper. This selector
determines whether the machine prints on the current paper or ejects the current paper
without printing and prints on the next paper.
• Selector 2: Reduction of document size in real-time transmission
Setting this selector to "1" reduces the document size from B4 to A4 in real-time
transmission.
• Selectors 3 and 4: Delay of FAX line disconnection when switching to the pseudo-ringing
external telephone (Not used.)
When the machine receives a phone call, it can make the connected external telephone ring
(so called pseudo-ringing). During pseudo-ringing, if you pick up the handset of the
external telephone, the line might be disconnected due to cut-off of the line current.
To hold the line, the machine may supply line current by making use of the pulse generator
circuit that forms a parallel loop. This way the FAX line disconnection may be delayed.
These selectors determine the delay period.

App. 4-51 Confidential

 WSW48 (USB setup latency)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
Not used.
2
No. 3 4 5
0 0 0 : 25
0 0 1 : 50
3 0 1 0 : 75
Number of PCs registrable to each
| of TWAIN-enabled applications 0 1 1 : 100
over a network 1 0 0 : 125
5
1 0 1 : 150
1 1 0 : 175
1 1 1 : 200
No. 6 7 8
0 0 0 : Default period
0 0 1 : Shorter 1
6 0 1 0 : Longer 1
USB setup latency
| 0 1 1 : Longer 2
(Not used.)
8 1 0 0 : Longer 3
1 0 1 : Longer 4
1 1 0 : Shorter 2
1 1 1 : Shorter 3

• Selectors 6 through 8: USB setup latency (Not used.)

These selectors should not be disturbed.

WSW49 (End-of-copying beep and black ink print mode)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
Not used.
2
3 End-of-copying beep (Not used.) 0: Yes 1: No
No. 4 5
0 0 : 150 ms
4
Command flag detection time 0 1 : 350 ms
5
1 0 : 550 ms
1 1 : 750 ms
No. 6 7
0 0 : No adjustment
6 CCD warmup time adjustment
0 1 : 80%
7 (Not used.)
1 0 : 120%
1 1 : 150%
8 Black ink print mode 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
ms: millisecond(s)
App. 4-52 Confidential
• Selectors 4 and 5: Command flag detection time
After receiving a command flag, the machine will wait for the command that should follow
for the time length specified by these selectors.
• Selector 8: Black ink print mode
If any color ink runs out, printing is no longer possible by default. Setting this selector to
"1" allows the machine to ignore the ink empty state and print data with black ink only,
resulting in a printout missing color components.
Note: The assurance mode switch setting made by Selector 3 on AMS04 (triggered with
function code 88 described in Chapter 9, Section 9.4.30) allows the machine to print all
color and black data as a monochrome printer with black ink only.

WSW50 (SDAA settings)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
Percentage voltage for interpreting
the external telephone as being 0 0 : 50%
1
hooked up 0 1 : 80%
2
(based on the network's standard 1 0 : 30%
voltage)
1 1 : No detection
0: Apply the initial value specified by local
DC mask curve table to be applied regulations
3
when the line is connected
1: Apply table DC5 prepared specially
AC impedance to be applied when 0: 600Ω termination
4
the line is connected 1: ZR termination
No. 5 6
0 0 : Standard
Current control to be applied 0 1 : Increase start-up current for
5
immediately after connection of termination
6
the line 1 0 : Fine current control for
termination
1 1 : Not used. (equal to "0, 0")
No. 7 8
0 0 : 19 V
7 AC voltage threshold for detection
0 1 : 11 V
8 of ring
1 0 : 25 V
1 1 : 31 V
Note: WSW50 is applicable to models equipped with an SDAA circuit.
• Selectors 5 and 6: Current control to be applied immediately after connection of the line
FAX models equipped with an SDAA circuit (on which an NTU chip is mounted) might
not be connected to a broad band line such as an ADSL (Asynchronous Digital Subscriber
Line) in a stable condition. If those models fail to connect to such a line, try to change the
current control to be applied immediately after connection of the line by using selectors 5
and 6.
If selectors 5 and 6 are set to "0" and "1," respectively, the SDAA draws more current,
decreasing the period required to terminate the current control. If they are set to "1" and
"0," the SDAA finely controls precision of the termination current against the voltage to
approach nearer to the specified DC curve that specifies the current vs. voltage
characteristics of the network termination. Selecting either control may solve an unstable
connection problem.
App. 4-53 Confidential
 WSW51 (Function setting 16)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Output of communications error
1 report when transmission 0: Enable 1: Disable
verification report is disabled
CR motor control for reducing
2 torque fluctuation 0: Activate 1: Deactivate
(Not used.)
No. 3 4
Cordless handset transmitter 0 0 : Middle (default)
3
volume 0 1 : Low
4 (Not used.) 1 0 : High
1 1 : Very high
No. 5 6 7
0 0 0 : Transmitter level 0 &
echo suppression OFF
5
0 0 1 : Transmitter level 1 &
Transmitter level and echo
| echo suppression ON
suppression
7 0 1 0 : Transmitter level 2 &
echo suppression ON
0 1 1 : Transmitter level 3 &
echo suppression ON
Switching from ink near-empty
state (if detected) to ink empty 0: Yes
8
when opening the scanner cover 1: No (No change from ink near-empty)
(Not used.)
Note: Selectors 3 and 4 are applicable to models equipped with cordless handset.
• Selector 2: CR motor control for reducing torque fluctuation (Not used.)
When the CR motor runs, the motor torque may vary so as to cause the head/carriage unit
travel velocity to fluctuate, affecting the print quality. Setting this selector to "0" activates
the CR motor control that regulates the motor drive current to reduce torque fluctuation,
running the CR motor smoothly.
• Selectors 5 through 7: Transmitter level and echo suppression
Transmitter level 0 sets the transmitter volume to a maximum. As the level increases, the
volume decreases. The transmitter level can also be changed by the user switch and its
setting is interlocked with the setting made by these selectors.
Enabling the echo suppression suppresses echoes in both the receiver and transmitter.
• Selector 8: Switching from ink near-empty state (if detected) to ink empty when opening the
scanner cover (Not used.)
If this selector is set to "0," opening the scanner cover in the ink near-empty state ("Ink
low" message) switches to the ink empty state ("Cannot print" message), prompting the
user to replace ink cartridges.

App. 4-54 Confidential

 WSW52 (Function setting 17) (Not used)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : Transmitter level 0 &
echo suppression OFF
1
0 0 1 : Transmitter level 1 &
Transmitter level and echo
| echo suppression ON
suppression for cordless handsets
3 0 1 0 : Transmitter level 2 &
echo suppression ON
0 1 1 : Transmitter level 3 &
echo suppression ON
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : 16 Hz
0 0 1 : 20 Hz
4 0 1 0 : 24 Hz
External telephone pseudo ring
| 0 1 1 : 28 Hz
signal frequency
6 1 0 0 : 32 Hz
1 0 1 : 16 Hz
1 1 0 : 16 Hz
1 1 1 : 16 Hz
Caller ID display (number display)
being kept ON even after
7 0: Enable 1: Disable
switching back to TEL from FAX
mode
Dial number being displayed
8 0: Enable 1: Disable
during faxing

• Selectors 4 through 6: External telephone pseudo ring signal frequency

These selectors provide a choice of pseudo ring sounds of the external telephone.

• Selector 7: Caller ID display (number display) being kept ON even after switching back to TEL
from FAX mode
Enabling this function keeps the caller ID display ON even after the machine switches back
to the TEL mode from the FAX mode.

• Selector 8: Dial number being displayed during faxing

Setting this selector to "0" enables the machine to keep displaying the dial number of the
FAX receiver on the LCD until the end of faxing.

App. 4-55 Confidential

 WSW53 (Function setting 18)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
Not used.
2
No. 3 4
FSK receive timing delay 0 0 : 0 ms
3
for caller ID 0 1 : 100 ms
4 (Not used.) 1 0 : 150 ms
1 1 : 200 ms
No. 5 6
Allowable instantaneous interrupt 0 0 : 20 ms
5 period during reception of caller
0 1 : 10 ms
6 ID
(Not used.) 1 0 : 30 ms
1 1 : 0 ms
CNG detection retry after
7 0: Yes 1: No
detection of invalid CNG
8 JPEG decompressor 0: ASIC (default) 1: Software

Note: Selectors 3 through 6 are applicable to Japanese models when caller ID service is
available.
Note: Selector 8 is applicable to models equipped with PhotoCapture Center.
• Selectors 3 through 6: FSK receive timing delay for caller ID
Allowable instantaneous interrupt period during reception of caller ID
(Not used.)
If a communications error occurs during a telephone conversation when the user has
subscribed to the caller ID service, change the settings of these selectors, and it may
improve the communications state. First, change the settings of selectors 3 and 4. If the
error persists, change the settings of selectors 5 and 6.

• Selector 8: JPEG decompressor

By default, the ASIC (Application specified integrated circuit) in the machine
decompresses the compressed JPEG data in a memory card inserted. If it fails to
decompress the data and reproduce the image normally, switch from the ASIC to any
proven decompressor software with this selector.

App. 4-56 Confidential

 WSW54 (Function setting 19)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2
0 0 : 100 ms (default)
1
PictBridge command delay time 0 1 : 0 ms
2
1 0 : 50 ms
1 1 : 200 ms
Extension of the "No. of CNG
3 cycles to be detected" for Easy 0: No 1: + 2 cycles
Receive mode
Recovery of cordless handset ID
4 0: Enable 1: Disable
(Not used.)
No. 5 6
0 0 : 10 ms (default)
5 Caller ID tone alert detection
0 1 : 20 ms
6 period
1 0 : 30 ms
1 1 : 40 ms
Transmission of caller ID wetting 0: Enable 1: Disable
7
pulse (default)
Switching between DTMF and 0: DTMF 1: FSK
8
FSK for caller ID (default)
ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selectors 1 and 2 are applicable to PictBridge-enabled models.

Note: Selector 4 is applicable to models with cordless handset.
Note: Selectors 5 through 7 are applicable to the UK models.
Note: Selector 8 is applicable to the Chinese models.
• Selectors 1 and 2: PictBridge command delay time
These selectors specify the PictBridge command delay time that applies when the machine
responds to the digital camera connected via PictBridge during negotiation. If the machine
fails to receive data from the digital camera, change the delay time.

• Selector 3: Extension of the "No. of CNG cycles to be detected" for Easy Receive mode
In Easy Receive mode, if the machine fails to detect the CNG even after the setting made
by selectors 4 and 5 on WSW26, extend the "No. of CNG cycles to be detected" by two
cycles.

• Selector 4: Recovery of cordless handset ID (Not used.)

Enabling this function automatically writes the cordless handset ID registered on the main
PCB onto the cordless PCB when the power is turned on if the ID on the cordless PCB is
discrepant with the one on the main PCB.

• Selectors 5 and 6: Caller ID tone alert detection period

If the machine misdetects a tone alert for a caller ID, adjust the detection period with these
selectors.

App. 4-57 Confidential

• Selector 7: Transmission of caller ID wetting pulse
If the machine fails to display a caller ID due to a wetting pulse transmitted after the
detection of a tone alert, disable the transmission of caller ID wetting pulse.

• Selector 8: Switching between DTMF and FSK for caller ID

If the machine fails to receive a caller ID, switch from DTMF to FSK. This setting is
equivalent to the DTMF/FSK setting made from the menu.

WSW55 (Function setting 20) (Not used.)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1
| ---
8

WSW56 (Function setting 21)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 PS emulation (Not used.) 0: Disable 1: Enable
2 Not used.
3 Reprinting (Not used.) 0: Disable 1: Enable
4 Wireless LAN functions 0: Enable (default) 1: Disable
5
| Not used.
8

Note: Selector 4 is applicable to wireless LAN-enabled models.

• Selector 4: Wireless LAN functions

To disable the wireless LAN (WLAN) functions, set this selector to "1" and turn the
machine power off and then on.

App. 4-58 Confidential

 WSW57 (Function setting 22)
Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : 0V
0 0 1 : 5 V (default)
1 0 1 0 : 10 V
Caller ID judgment voltage level
| to discriminate caller ID event 0 1 1 : 15 V
from ring event 1 0 0 : 20 V
3
1 0 1 : 25 V
1 1 0 : 30 V
1 1 1 : Maximum
No. 4 5 6
0 0 0 : 0V
0 0 1 : 5 V (default)
4 0 1 0 : 10 V
Caller ID judgment voltage level
| 0 1 1 : 15 V
to detect line polarity reversal
6 1 0 0 : 20 V
1 0 1 : 25 V
1 1 0 : 30 V
1 1 1 : Maximum
Time limit for judging a caller ID 0: Enable 1: Disable
7
burst ring (Not used.) (default)
Start key on the machine after
0: Disable 1: Enable
8 dialing with cordless handset
(default)
(Not used.)
Note: Selectors 1 through 7 are applicable to the European models.
Note: Selector 8 is applicable to models with a cordless handset.
• Selectors 1 through 3: Caller ID judgment voltage level to discriminate caller ID event from ring
event
If the machine misdetects a caller ID event as a ring event due to voltage variation, it fails
to display a caller ID. If it happens, increase the judgment voltage level provided that the
setting made by these selectors is equal to or more than the setting made by selectors 4
through 6.
• Selectors 4 through 6: Caller ID judgment voltage level to detect line polarity reversal
If the machine fails to detect a line polarity reversal for a caller ID due to a great difference
between the line voltage when a polarity reversal occurs and the one at the steady state, it
fails to display a caller ID. If it happens, increase the judgment voltage level provided that
the setting made by these selectors is equal to or less than the setting made by selectors 1
through 3.
• Selector 7: Time limit for judging a caller ID burst ring (Not used.)
The time limit for judging a caller ID burst ring is enabled by default so that receiving a
burst ring out of the specified time limit causes the machine to interpret it as an ordinary
call involving no caller ID signal, resulting in no caller ID display.
When the machine fails to display a caller ID if you have the caller ID subscriber service
from your telephone company, disable the time limit with this selector to receive a caller
ID burst ring independent of the burst ring time.
• Selector 8: Start key on the machine after dialing with cordless handset (Not used.)
Pressing the Start key on the machine to send a fax during a telephone conversation with
the cordless handset cannot start a sending operation by default. Setting this selector to "1"
enables the Start key pressed even after dialing with cordless handset.
App. 4-59 Confidential
 WSW58 (Function setting 23)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
No. 1 2 3
0 0 0 : Disable
Prevention against line 0 0 1 : 10%
1 disconnection during ICM 0 1 0 : 20%
recording
| 0 1 1 : 30% (default)
(Percentage of guard tone response
3 time relative to end-of-call tone 1 0 0 : 40%
ON time) (Not used.) 1 0 1 : 50%
1 1 0 : 60%
1 1 1 : 70%
Trimming of R key signal issued
from cordless handset--For 0: Disable 1: Enable
4
connection to base unit with PBX (default)
OFF (Not used.)
Call transfer to cordless handset
from telephone(s) connected in 0: Enable 1: Disable
5
parallel with the machine (base (default)
unit) (Not used.)
Extension of the "No. of CNG
cycles to be detected" (which
allows two cycles to be added to
6 0: No 1: +2 cycles
the cycles specified by selectors 6
and 7 on WSW26 and selectors 4
and 5 on WSW34)
No. 7 8
0 0 : -1 cycle
7
No. of busy tone detection cycles 0 1 : +0 cycles (default)
8
1 0 : +1 cycle
1 1 : +2 cycles

Note: Selectors 1 through 3 are applicable to models equipped with TAD.

Note: Selector 4 is applicable to European models with a cordless handset.
Note: Selector 5 is applicable to U.S.A. models with a cordless handset.

• Selectors 1 through 3: Prevention against line disconnection during ICM recording (Percentage
of guard tone response time relative to end-of-call tone ON time)
(Not used.)
If the machine misdetects an ICM tone as an end-of-call tone, it disconnects the line even
during recording of the ICM. If it happens, change the percentage of the guard tone
response time relative to the end-of-call tone ON time with these selectors.
If the percentage of the actual guard tone response time is more than the setting made by
these selectors, the machine interprets it as no detection of end-of-call tone, continuing
recording the ICM.

App. 4-60 Confidential

• Selector 4: Trimming of R key signal issued from cordless handset--For connection to base unit
with PBX OFF (Not used.)
For European models, a cordless handset can be registered to up to four base units.
On the cordless handset registered to more than one base unit, if you have programmed an
R key press as part of a number stored in a Speed-Dial location, you can dial using a
Speed-Dial location stored in the handset when connected to the base unit in which PBX is
set to ON.
When the cordless handset is connected to any other base unit in which PBX is set to OFF,
however, using a Speed-Dial location may dial an unintended telephone number or cause a
malfunction due to the programmed R key signal preceding the intended number. To avoid
such problems, enable the R key signal trimming function with this selector so that the base
unit dials trimming the received R key signal.

• Selector 5: Call transfer to cordless handset from telephone(s) connected in parallel with the
machine (base unit) (Not used.)
Enabling this function allows the machine (base unit) to transfer a call transferred from
telephone(s) connected in parallel with the machine to the cordless handset.

App. 4-61 Confidential

 WSW59 (Function setting 24)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
Transmission of USB serial 0: Enable 1: Disable
1
number to PC (default)
Extension of the waiting time 0: Enable 1: Disable
2
between ANSam and DIS (default)
No. 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0: ASCII
(default for U.S.A/
European models)
0 0 0 0 1: Latin1 (CP1252)
0 0 0 1 0: Latin2 (CP1250)
0 0 0 1 1: Cyrillic (CP1251)
0 0 1 0 0: SJIS (CP932)
(default for Japanese
Checking of the specified models)
3 character code set when displaying 0 0 1 0 1: Thai (CP874)
| or printing the folder/file names 0 0 1 1 0: Korean (CP949)
7 stored in memory cards or USB 0 0 1 1 1: Traditional Chinese
flash memory drives (CP950)
0 1 0 0 0: Simplified Chinese
(CP936)
(default for Chinese
and Asia & Pacific
models)
0 1 0 0 1: Arabic (CP1256)
0 1 0 1 0
| Reserved.
1 1 1 1 1
Improvement of DTMF detection
function (to minimize the effects 0: Disable 1: Enable
8
of momentary power failure or (default)
noise)

Note: Selector 2 takes effect only when the V.34 mode is permitted (WSW19, selector 7) in
models supporting V.34 mode.

• Selector 1: Transmission of USB serial number to PC

By default, the machine transmits the USB serial number to the connected PC.
If Windows Vista is running on the PC, the transmission of the USB serial number to the
PC might cause a problem. If it happens, disable the transmission with this selector.

• Selector 2: Extension of the waiting time between ANSam and DIS

Setting this selector to "0" extends the waiting time between the ANSam and DIS in order
to secure the time required for switching the calling machine’s echo suppressor in
transmission from a G3 to G4 FAX machine.

App. 4-62 Confidential

• Selectors 3 through 7: Checking of the specified character code set when displaying or printing
the folder/file names stored in memory cards or USB flash memory drives
Setting these selectors to "0, 0, 0, 0, 0" does not check any character code set. When folder/
file names stored in memory cards or USB flash memory drives contain Chinese
characters, for example, those characters may get garbled in displaying on the color LCD
or printing indexes. If it happens, select the character code set of the language in use with
these selectors.

• Selector 8: Improvement of DTMF detection function (to minimize the effects of momentary
power failure or noise)
When DTMF cannot be detected due to a momentary power failure or noise, try to use this
selector.

WSW60 (Function setting 25)

Selector
Function Setting and Specifications
No.
1 Not used.
No. 2 3
2 Key repeat start time and interval 0 0 : 0.5 sec.
for the touch panel 0 1 : 1.0 sec.
3 (Not used.) 1 0 : 1.5 sec.
1 1 : 2.0 sec.
No. 4 5
4 Adjustment of temporary 0 0 : No adjustment (default)
connection timing of Caller ID 0 1 : Fast
5 (Not used.) 1 0 : Standard
1 1 : Slow
Output of CNG detection result to 0: Disable 1: Enable
6
the activity report (default)
No. 7 8
7 Delay time from detection of a line 0 0 : 500 ms
polarity reversal until permission of 0 1 : 750 ms
8 polarity reversal interrupt 1 0 : 1000 ms
1 1 : 1500 ms
sec.: second(s), ms: millisecond(s)

Note: Selectors 2 and 3 are applicable to models with touch panel.

Note: Selectors 4 and 5 are applicable to Japanese models when caller ID service is available.

• Selectors 2 and 3: Key repeat start time and interval for the touch panel (Not
used.)
These selectors specify the key repeat start time and interval for the touch panel.
The time (in seconds) specified by these selectors apply to both the key repeat start time
and interval. If these selectors are set to "0, 0," however, the key repeat start time is 0.5
second, but the interval is changed from 0.5 second that applies to the first 2.5 seconds to
0.2 second that applies after the first 2.5 seconds.

App. 4-63 Confidential

• Selectors 4 and 5: Adjustment of temporary connection timing of Caller ID (Not
used.)
If the machine cannot receive Caller ID, try to adjust the temporary connection timing of
Caller ID with these selectors.

• Selector 6: Output of CNG detection result to the activity report

Setting this selector to "1" (Enable) changes the items to be listed in the activity report as
follows.
- FAX NO./NAME → CNG DETECTION STATE (Tone detection status, calling/called status)
- DURATION→ RCV MODE (FAX receive mode setting)
- PAGE(S) → EASY RCV (Easy Receive setting)
- RESULT → TRIGGER (FAX receive trigger)

• Selectors 7 and 8: Delay time from detection of a line polarity reversal until permission of
polarity reversal interrupt
If the machine cannot receive Caller ID due to switching noises from the telephone
switchboard, adjust the delay time from the detection of a line polarity reversal until
permission of polarity reversal interrupt with these selectors.

App. 4-64 Confidential

 Appendix 5. Wiring Diagrams
This appendix provides the wiring diagrams that help you understand the connections between PCBs.

Confidential
 CN15-13

CF
/MS
FIRE5

CN8

LAN

USB
CN11

CN19

CN10
CN26
xD/SD
-12 CN1-21

Media 2
Media 1
CN12-12 FIRE4 COM

USB flash
FG/GND -11 -20

PictBridge/
-11 FIRE3 VSS2

memory drive
Red_LED -19
-10 VTEMP -10
Green_LED VDD2
-9 -9 -18
Blue_LED SIN5 FIRE1
-8 -8 -17
LED Anode SIN4 FIRE2
-7 -16
CIS_CLK -7 FIRE3
-6 SIN3
CIS_TG -6 -15
-5 SIN2 FIRE4

CIS unit
HEAD 1
CIS_Vref -5 -14
-4 SIN1 FIRE5
R3.3V -13
-3 SIN0 -4
R0V VTEMP
-2 -3 -12
CIS_MODE VSS1 SIN0
-1 -2 -11
Vout0 CLK SIN1
MFC5890CN/5895CW

-1 -10
Head

VSS1 SIN2
-9
CN14-28 N.C. SIN3
-8
-27 FIRE2 CN16-12 SIN4
LED_V -7
-26 FIRE1 -11 SIN5
VDD -6
-25 -10 VDD1
VSS MEDIA_CNTL
-24 -5
-9 CLK
LED_VSS VSS2 -4
-23 -8 VSS1
DB7 VSS2
-22 -3
VSS2 -7 VDD2
DB6
-21 -2
VSS2
HEAD 2

DB5 VSS2 -6
-20 -1
DB4 VSS2 -5 COM
-19
DB3 -4
-18 VSS2
DB2 -3
Carriage PCB

-17 VSS2
DB1 -2
-16 T_M_IN
DB0 -1
-15 THM
RDB
-14
WDB
-13 CN17-11
RS ENC2

Color LCD
-12 ENC1 -10
RSTB
-11 CNT5V -9
CS1B
-10 -8
DB8 MEDIA
-9 -7
DB9 MCNT5V
-8 -6
DB10 T_M
-7 DB11 -5
VDD2
HEAD 3

-6 VSS -4
-5 VDD2
VDD -3
-4 VDD2
DB12 -2
-3 VDD2
DB13
-1
-2 VDD1
DB14
-1 DB15 CN5-9
KEMP
-8
YEMP
-7
Main PCB

CEMP
PCB

-6
MEMP
-5
S0V
-4
CN21-5 SDIN LEDPWR
-3
-4 S0V LEDCNT
-2
Ink empty sensor

-3 CLK EMP_THM

PCB
panel
-2 +5V -1
EMP_THM_IN

Control
-1 SDOUT

App. 5-1
CN7-7
CCTRG
-6
MCTRG
PCB

-5
LEDPWR_CTRG
-4
S0V
LEDCNT_CTRG -3
Ink cartridge

KCTRG -2
-1
detection sensor

YCTRG

CN6-4
ACF_GND
-3 ACF_A
ASF

-2 ACF_VCC
-1
encoder

ACF_B

CN27-2 CR_M-
CN3-2
lift

CR

SENIN
Cap

-1 CR_M+
cam

motor

-1
switch

S0V

CN33-2
LF-
feed

-1 LF+
motor
Paper

CN30-4 OUT_B
-3 OUT_B
CIS

-2 OUT_A
motor

-1 OUT_A CN22-5
FSEN
-4
CN35-7 ENC2 S0V
-3
PCB

+5V
-6 SLP5V -2
Document

sensor

RSEN
sensor PCB

-5 S0V -1
SLP5V
-4
PF encoder

ENC1
-3 LED_PWR CN31-2
ACF-
ASF

-2 S0V -1
ACF+
PCB
motor

-1
sensor

RESI
REGI -

CN29-4
OUT_A
CN2-2 PURGE -3
OUT_A
cam

-1
ADF

S0V -2
Purge
motor

OUT_B
switch

-1
S0V

POR

BAT_N
BAT_P
S0V
FG

S0V
RELAY
3.3V

BATCHK
La

OUT_B
+31V
Lb

N.C.
VOUT1
DATA-

+31V
DATA+

PSDOWN
P0V
P0V

-2
-2

-1
-4
-1
-4
-1
-2

-3
-3
-1
-4
-5

-3

-1
-1
CN1-2

CN23-5
CN37-5
CN36-6

VOUT2 CN24-2
CN18-2

PCB
PCB

(EXT)
(LINE)

Power
supply
WLAN

battery
Backup
Speaker
Main-MJ
Main-MJ

MJ PCB
*

TEL

EXT

* For wireless LAN-enabled model.

Confidential
 Appendix 6. Circuit Diagrams
This appendix provides the circuit diagrams of the MJ PCB and power supply PCB.

A. MJ PCB (U.S.A., Canadian, Asian, and Oceanian models)

A. MJ PCB (European models)
A. MJ PCB (S. African models)
B. Power supply PCB (100 V series)
B. Power supply PCB (200 V series)

Confidential
A. MJ PCB (U.S.A., Canadian, Asian, and Oceanian models)
@JW2

MJ PCB
POL

E
C

PS2521-1
S0V

@PH1
to La,Lb D3
2mm
L1 L3
30mm to
Line La,Lb Ta,Tb MAIN

K
L4,L6
1mm RCH-855 332K
MJ-66J-RD315(LF) L4 @L3 RCH-855 332K @L1 SDAA
DL-6503C
S 1 NC F1
1 La

TVB270SC-L

P3100ECL

C221
Ta 2 @C9 @C4
2 Lb
La 3
C682 C153 CN1

D5
JW1

C1
Lb 4 @C8 @C5

D3
F2
Tb 5

C474
D6 L6

C221
DL-6503C C473 C153
E 6 NC R2

JW3

@C6
C2
39k
RA-302M-C6
FG 7
D1
FG 8 NC
CN3

RA-302M-C6

L2
DL-6503C

to
EXT L5
DL-6503C
FG S0V
A5X-G-24E-908
RELAY
CN4 1
NC 7
FG 8 NC 2

330
FG 7 NC 12 11

R1
SW1

Tb 4
D2 1SS120
Ta 3

MJ-62J-RD315(LF)

S0V

@CN2a @CN2b
S0V 2 S0V 3 S0V

RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY

POL B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL

B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

to Main PCB

App. 6-1 Confidential

A. MJ PCB (European models)

MJ PCB POL

E
C

PS2521-1
S0V

@PH1
to L1 L3
30mm to
Line MAIN

K
RCH-855 332K
MJ-66J-RD315(LF) @L3 RCH-855 332K @L1 SDAA
DL-6503C
S 1 NC F1

TVB270SC-L
1 La

P3100ECL

C221
Ta 2 @C9 @C4
2 Lb
La 3
C682 C153 CN1

D5
JW1

C1
Lb 4 @C8 @C5

D3
F2
Tb 5

C474
D6 L6

C221
DL-6503C C473 C153
E 6 NC R2

JW3

@C6
C2
39k
RA-302M-C6
FG 7
D1
FG 8 NC
CN3

RA-302M-C6

L2
DL-6503C

to
EXT L5
DL-6503C
FG S0V
A5X-G-24E-908
RELAY
CN4 1
NC 7
FG 8 NC 2

330
FG 7 NC 12 11

R1
SW1

Tb 4
D2 1SS120
Ta 3

MJ-62J-RD315(LF)

S0V
@CN2a @CN2b
S0V 2 S0V 3 S0V

RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY

POL B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL

B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

to Main PCB

App. 6-2 Confidential

A. MJ PCB (S. African models)
@JW2

MJ PCB POL

E
C

PS2521-1
S0V

@PH1
to La,Lb D3
2mm
L1 L3
30mm to
Line La,Lb Ta,Tb MAIN

K
L4,L6
1mm
RCH-855 332K
MJ-66J-RD315(LF) L4 @L3 39K @L1 SDAA
DL-6503C
S 1 NC F1

TVB270SC-L
1 La

P3100ECL

C221
Ta 2 @C9 @C4
2 Lb
La 3
C682 C153 CN1

D5
JW1

C1
Lb 4 @C8 @C5

D3
F2
Tb 5

C474
D6 L6

C221
DL-6503C C473 C153
E 6 NC R2

JW3

@C6
C2
39k
RA-302M-C6
FG 7
D1
FG 8 NC
CN3

RA-302M-C6

L2
DL-6503C

to
EXT L5
DL-6503C
FG S0V
A5X-G-24E-908
RELAY
CN4 1
NC 7
FG 8 NC 2

330
FG 7 NC 12 11

R1
SW1

Tb 4
D2 1SS120
Ta 3

MJ-62J-RD315(LF)

S0V

@CN2a @CN2b
S0V 2 S0V 3 S0V

RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY

POL B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL

B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

to Main PCB

App. 6-3 Confidential

B. Power supply PCB (100 V series)

App. 6-4 Confidential

B. Power supply PCB (200 V series)

App. 6-5 Confidential

 Appendix 7. Deletion of User Setting Information
This appendix provides instructions on how to delete user setting information recorded in the machine.

A7.1 Deleting User Setting Info from the Machine.......................................................... App. 7-1

Confidential
A7.1 Deleting User Setting Info from the Machine

The user setting information in the machine is recorded in the EEPROM on the main PCB. It
cannot be deleted all by a single operation. Use Function code 01 in the maintenance mode,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and disconnect the backup battery.

[ 1 ] Using Function code 01

Using Function code 01 (EEPROM parameter initialization) in the maintenance mode deletes
the following data that have been recorded in the main PCB:
• Activity report
• Station ID data
• Outside line number
• One-touch dialing
• Speed dialing
• Group dialing
• Call transfer data

„ Operating Procedure

(1) On the machine, press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order. Next
press the key four times to make the machine enter the maintenance mode. (Refer to
Chapter 9.)
TIP: Models equipped with a numerical keypad on the control panel can enter the
maintenance mode in the same way as conventional models; that is, by pressing the Menu,
*, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this sequence.

The machine beeps for approx. one second and displays " " on the
LCD, indicating that it is placed in the initial stage of the maintenance mode, a mode in
which the machine is ready to accept entry from the keys.
(2) Press the 0 and 1 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SELECT 01?" appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
Parameter initialization starts and the "PARAMETER INIT" appears on the LCD.
(4) Upon completion of parameter initialization, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.

[ 2 ] Unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnecting the
backup battery
Unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnecting the backup battery
deletes the Caller ID list, fax data received into memory, transmission verification report (for
image), broadcasting report and batch transmission data (in the memory).
„ Operating Procedure

(1) Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

(2) Disconnect the battery harness from the main PCB. (See Chapter 6.)
(3) Leave the machine for approx. 24 hours.

App. 7-1 Confidential